JP2021007462A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which implements a performance less likely to give misunderstanding or discomfort to a player.SOLUTION: In a normal ball entry state, the game machine variably displays a first decorative symbol corresponding to a first special symbol and variably displays plural first alternate symbols displayed in a region smaller than that of the first decorative symbol. In a ball entry easy state, the game machine variably displays a second decorative symbol corresponding to a second special symbol and variably displays plural second alternate symbols displayed in a region smaller than that of the second decorative symbol. In the initial variable display of the first special symbol in the case of having shifted from the ball entry easy state to the normal ball entry state, the game machine starts the variable display from a symbol combination in which a corresponding main decorative symbol 600 and an alternate symbol 601 indicate losing.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 38

Description

The present invention relates to a ball game machine having a game area in which a game ball is launched.

Conventionally, among various types of ball game machines, the so-called first-class pachinko game machine has a plurality of symbols changed in a display area such as a liquid crystal display provided in the substantially center of the game board. Display (hereinafter, such display is referred to as "design variation" or "variation display", etc.). This game machine shifts to a special game called a big hit, in which more prize balls can be obtained than in a normal game when the combination of symbols when the movement of symbols in a plurality of rows is stopped becomes a specific mode. Known as a thing. In the variable display of symbols in the display area, not only a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed, but also the variable display time is usually set in a state where one more symbol is aligned and a big hit is obtained, as in the so-called reach screen. The production is designed to raise the expectations of the player, such as making it longer than that. In addition, the player's expectation is raised by the effect of using characters in images such as patterns to give a story to the variable display and the advance notice effect that suggests the high degree of expectation for transition to special games. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-230714 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-150101

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that gives a profit to a player by making it easy to generate a small hit while keeping the ball output rate at a normal time within an appropriate range (see, for example, Patent Document 2). However, depending on the design method related to the production of the game, the design may give the player a misunderstanding or a sense of discomfort.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that realizes an effect that does not easily give a player a misunderstanding or a sense of discomfort.

In order to solve the above problems, the ball game machine of a certain aspect of the present invention has a first starting port capable of entering a game ball, a second starting port capable of entering a game ball, and a game ball. An operating port that allows the ball to enter, an expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows the game ball to enter or easily enter the second starting port when expanded, and a game ball when opened. Judgment as to whether or not to shift from the normal game to the special game, which is in a state advantageous to the player, with the large winning opening that allows or facilitates the entry of the ball and the entry into the first starting opening. The first hit / fail judgment means for executing the above, and the first hit / fail judgment for determining whether or not to shift from the normal game to the special game, which is in a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the second starting port. 2 The hit / fail determination means, the first symbol display device in which the first special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means is variablely displayed, and the result of the hit / miss judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means. A second symbol display device in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed, and a normal symbol display device in which the normal symbol for indicating that the expansion mechanism is expanded is variablely displayed when the ball enters the operating port. , The first pattern determining means for determining the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria, and the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is defined. The first is a lottery value used for the second pattern determination means for determining the result from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variation pattern selection criteria and the first hit / fail determination means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. The first hold control means, which is held as the first hold until the hit / fail judgment is made by the hit / fail judgment means, and the lottery value used when the hit / fail judgment is made by the second hit / fail judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers, are second. When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means is a big hit with the second hold control means which is held as the second hold until the hit / fail judgment is made by the hit / miss judgment means. As a state related to the special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening and the ease of entering the ball into the second starting opening, the normal entry state and the entry ease are higher than the normal entry state. A ball entry state setting means that has an easy entry state and can set a normal entry state or an easy entry state, an effect display device that displays the effect content, and an effect determination that determines the effect content. Means and. A plurality of decorative symbols indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment are displayed in a variable manner on the effect display device, and in the normal ball-entry state, the second decorative symbol, which is the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, is not displayed. 1 The first decorative symbol, which is a decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol, is variablely displayed, and a plurality of first alternative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol and displayed in an area smaller than the first decorative symbol are variablely displayed. In the easy-to-enter state, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner without displaying the first decorative symbol, and a plurality of second alternatives corresponding to the second special symbol and displayed in an area smaller than the second decorative symbol are displayed. In the first variable display of the first special symbol when the symbol is variablely displayed and the state is changed from the easy ball entry state to the normal ball entry state, the plurality of first decorative symbols and the plurality of first alternative symbols are the symbols indicating the deviation. Start variable display from the combination.

It should be noted that any combination of the above components, or those in which the components and expressions of the present invention are mutually replaced between methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc. , Is effective as an aspect of the present invention.

According to the ball game machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine that realizes an effect that does not easily give a player a misunderstanding or a sense of discomfort.

It is a figure which shows the basic structure on the front side of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the basic structure on the back side of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the functional block of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of a main board. It is a figure which shows typically the hit / fail judgment table. It is a figure which shows typically the range setting of the winning / failing lottery value for each set value. It is a figure which shows typically the symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table schematically. It is a figure which shows typically the advance hit / fail judgment table referred to in the advance hit / miss judgment. It is a figure which shows typically the advance hit / fail judgment table corresponding to a game setting. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a sub-board. It is a figure which shows the outline of the mobile cooperation system typically. It is a block diagram which shows schematic the hardware composition of the main board and the sub board. It is a block diagram which shows the hardware composition of an effect control device schematicly. It is a flowchart which shows the control start processing of the main board in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process of S124 in FIG. 15 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. 15 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of S120 in FIG. 15 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of an interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the control start processing of the sub-board in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of S518 in FIG. 20 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when the command is received from the main board. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when the timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when a sub CPU receives a command from a control CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when the timer interrupt for various device control occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the special symbol variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the decorative pattern variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a special game. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a small hit game. It is a figure which shows the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine of an Example. It is a functional block diagram which shows the specific game control means in FIG. 4 in detail. It is a figure which shows typically the symbol determination table which is referred in the case of a big hit. It is a game state transition diagram which shows typically the relationship between each game state and a transition trigger. It is a figure which shows typically the hit / fail judgment table in this Example. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the state of a symbol variation and the end condition of a state of easy entry. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the change in the game state and the timing of the left-handed warning. It is a flow chart which shows the relationship between the type of a special game, the production of a transition destination, and the game state. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of a decorative symbol, an alternative symbol, and a simple symbol. Logo Indicates the arrangement of movable accessories and light guide plates. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the production timing in the special game of 2R probability change big hit. It is a flow chart which shows the production process of the 1st special variation effect. It is a flow chart which shows the production process of the 2nd special variation effect. It is a figure of the table which schematically exemplifies the correspondence relationship between the type of a basic variation pattern and the type of a variation addition pattern table. It is a figure of the table which schematically exemplifies the correspondence relationship between the type of a variable addition pattern and the type of a variable addition pattern table. It is a time chart which compares the time of the small hit fluctuation stop and the small hit game with the time of the deviation fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state and an effect mode. An example of a screen showing the number of winning prize balls during the small hit rush is shown.

(Prerequisite technology)
In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, a plurality of games corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machine are mixed. The second game is preferentially executed so that the first game and the second game as the plurality of games are not executed at the same time. Further, in order to achieve both of these playability, a plurality of start winning openings, a plurality of special symbol display devices, and a plurality of hold lamps are provided. It is designed so that the number of big hits in the second game is generally larger than the number of big hits in the first game. For example, the second game has a higher probability of becoming a big hit with a probability change, and the second game has a larger number of unit games constituting a special game when a big hit occurs (opening time of the big winning opening). A long open unit game and a short open unit game with a short open time are mixed in one special game, and even if the number of unit games is the same, the second game is a longer open unit game than the first game. The second game is designed to have a relatively higher profit than the first game, such as (including the case where the number of games is large). On top of that, at first, aim for the first hit in the first game, and after the big hit in the first game gives a shorter time, aim for the second game repeatedly and get a lot of balls. Realize.

FIG. 1 shows a basic structure on the front side of a pachinko gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 100 is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. The gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball plate 105, a lower ball plate 106, a launch handle 107, a speaker 108, an effect button 109, a cross key 110, Includes decorative lamp 111. The outer frame 101 has an opening portion and is a frame body for fixing the pachinko gaming machine 100 at a position where it should be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame 101, and is attached to the outer frame 101 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting a game ball, and the like.

The transparent plate 103 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door 104. The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball plate 105 has a mechanism for storing the game ball, sending the game ball to the launch rail, extracting the game ball to the lower ball plate 106, and the like. The lower ball plate 106 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right sides of the upper part of the door 104, and sound effects and music sounds according to the game state and the effect are output by means for controlling the effect. Most of the resin members constituting the appearance of the door 104 are translucent, and the decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the transparent member. The decorative lamp 111 is an LED that emits light in various colors according to the game state and the effect by means of controlling the effect, and plays a role of the effect by blinking or the like.

The game board 80 has a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a large winning opening 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning port 33 on the game area 81 partitioned by the rail 82. , Out port 34, effect display device 60, center decoration 64. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided so as to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60 over the substantially central portion of the game area 81 and the upper portion and the right portion thereof, and is a flow path of the game ball and the effect display device. It has 60 functions such as protection and decoration. A stage 65 on which the inflowing game ball rolls is formed at the lower part of the center decoration 64, and the falling direction from the stage 65 is the direction of entering the first starting port 11 and the first starting port 11 depending on the rolling method. It is distributed to the side direction that does not enter the ball. At the upper part of the center decoration 64, a movable accessory 66 that is driven according to the content of the effect and performs an effect is provided. In the game area 81, a plurality of mechanisms such as game nails and windmills (not shown) for forming a flow path of the game ball are installed. In this specification, "winning ball", "winning", and "falling in" may be synonymous with each other. In addition, each winning opening and each entry opening may be composed of a "passing opening" (also called a "gate" or "through chucker") of a type through which a game ball passes, and the "entry ball" may be formed. "Prize," "fall," and "pass" may also be synonymous with each other.

The first starting port 11 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first game, and the second starting opening 12 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second game. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 are configured so that the ball can be aimed at one side depending on the launch strength of the game ball according to the player's intention. The first starting port 11 is provided at a substantially central lower portion in the game area 81, and the second starting port 12 is provided directly below the first starting port 11. Left-handed, that is, when the ball is hit relatively weakly aiming to flow to the left passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12, while right-handed. That is, when the ball is hit relatively strongly aiming to flow to the right passage of the center decoration 64, the ball can enter the second starting port 12 or is easy to enter, but cannot enter the first starting port 11. Alternatively, a flow path is formed by arranging the game nails so as to make it difficult to enter the ball. However, since the upper part of the opening of the second starting port 12 is normally covered with the first starting port 11 to prevent the inflow of the game ball, the second starting port 12 is not opened unless the expanding mechanism of the second starting port 12 is opened. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball in 12. The winning / failing lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player, and is executed every time a ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. To.

The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided at positions separated from each other to the extent that it is possible to strike a target depending on the firing strength of the game ball. The first start port 11 and the second start port 12 may be installed separately on the left side and the right side of the game area 81, respectively, so that it is difficult for a game ball aiming at one to enter the other. For example, the first starting port 11 is provided at a position where it is possible or easy to enter the ball when it is left-handed, that is, when it is aimed to flow to the left passage of the center decoration 64 and fired relatively weakly. The second starting port 12 is provided at a position where the ball can be entered or is easily entered when the ball is hit right-handed, that is, when the ball is launched relatively strongly aiming at flowing to the right passage of the center decoration 64.

The first starting port 11 includes a first starting winning detection device 16. The first start winning detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 11, and generates first starting winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry. The second starting port 12 includes a second starting winning detection device 17, an ordinary electric accessory 90 (so-called electric tulip) which is an expansion mechanism, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 90. Be prepared. The second start winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 12, and generates second starting winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry.

The first operating port 31 is provided at a position on the left side of the game area 81 and includes the first passage detection device 36. The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. The second operating port 32 is provided at a position on the right side of the game area 81 and includes the second passage detection device 37. The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the second operating port 32, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. The passage of the game ball through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 triggers an open lottery to determine whether or not to expand the ordinary electric accessory 90. When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol, which is a symbol showing the determination result of the open lottery, is variably displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45. Therefore, the open lottery is also called "ordinary symbol lottery". After a predetermined time has passed from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stops. When the normal symbol stops at the hit symbol, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded by the driving force of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91, and the possibility of entering the second starting port 12 is increased. As a modification, the number of operating ports may be one, and the game area 81 may be provided at the left side position.

Each of the three general winning openings 33 includes a general winning detection device 38 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates general winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry.

The large winning opening 20 includes a large winning opening detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a large winning opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the large winning opening 20. The grand prize detection device 25 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the grand prize opening 20, and generates the grand prize opening winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry. The big winning opening 20 is a horizontally rectangular winning opening that opens as a "big hit" when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined mode. The large winning opening 20 is provided at a position on the upper right side of the out opening 34. As a modified example, another large winning opening may be provided in the lower center of the game area 81 or above or below the large winning opening 20, and a plurality of large winning openings may be provided. The out port 34 is an outlet for discharging game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings, and includes an out detection device 39. The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects a game ball that is discharged through the out port 34, and generates discharge information indicating the detection at the time of detection. The out opening 34 is provided at the lowermost center portion of the game area 81 so that all the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings can be guided and passed through. A plurality of out detection devices 39 may be provided side by side while securing a game ball passage having a sufficient width to prevent the out port 34 from being clogged with balls.

A symbol display unit 120 is arranged below the outside of the game area 81 on the game board 80. The symbol display unit 120 includes a first special symbol display unit 41, a second special symbol display unit 42, a first special symbol hold display unit 71, a second special symbol hold display unit 72, a normal symbol display unit 45, and a normal symbol. Each display unit such as a hold display unit 75, a game status display unit 76, and an abnormality notification unit 77 is provided. Specifically, the first special symbol display unit 41 corresponding to the first game and the second special symbol display unit 42 corresponding to the second game are arranged side by side at the lower left position, and the first special symbol The variations of 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the first winning / failing lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, and is a special game when stopped in a predetermined hit mode. A big hit will occur. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the second winning / failing lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 12, and is a special game when stopped in a predetermined hit mode. A big hit will occur. The first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 are 8-segment LEDs composed of, for example, 7 segments forming a "figure 8" and 8 segments of 1 segment representing a "dot". It is a display device of. With an 8-segment LED, a numerical value equivalent to 8 bits can be expressed by combining 8 segments. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 represented by the combination of segments do not necessarily form the body of letters or numbers, and may be generally meaningless symbols formed by the combination of each segment. .. These symbols are replaced one after another at high speed and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42, or a predetermined display (for example, "-") and non-display (for example, all lights are turned off) are displayed. By displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result after being repeated for a predetermined time, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is realized. The first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 use LED dot arrays that are not 8-segment LEDs, and a plurality of types of first special symbol 51 and second are used depending on the combination of lighting patterns and lighting colors. The special symbol 52 may be expressed.

Further, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have to have a directing role, in this embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol at the lower left of the game area 81 are required. The display unit 42 displays the image in an inconspicuous size. However, when adopting a method of expressing the special symbol without using a decorative symbol by giving it a directing role, the special symbol is displayed on another display device such as a liquid crystal display instead of the 8-segment LED. It may be configured to be made to.

A first special symbol holding display unit 71 is provided above the first special symbol display unit 41 as a holding lamp for special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first game, and a second special symbol display unit 42 is provided above the second special symbol display unit 42. The second special symbol hold display unit 72 is provided as a hold lamp for the special symbol change corresponding to the game of. The first special figure hold display unit 71 is composed of two lamps, and the number of the winning / failing lottery values held in the first game is determined by the number of lighting or the number of blinking lamps (hereinafter, the number of the winning / losing lottery values held). (Simply also called "holding number") is displayed. The number of holds on the first special figure hold display unit 71 is the number (number) of acquisitions of lottery values based on winning a prize in the first start port 11 while the first special symbol 51 is changing or the special game is being executed. Indicates the number of winning balls that are present and the symbol change has not yet been executed. The second special figure hold display unit 72 is also composed of two lamps, and displays the number of holdes in the second game according to the number of lights or the number of blinks. The number of holds in the second special figure hold display unit 72 is the number of times (number) of lottery values obtained based on winning a prize in the second starting port 12 while the second special symbol 52 is changing or the special game is being executed. Indicates the number of winning balls that are present and the symbol change has not yet been executed. The number of hold of the winning / failing lottery value is also displayed at the lower part of the screen of the effect display device 60 in a form represented by the number of lighting of the hold lamp image.

A normal symbol display unit 45 is provided on the right side of the symbol display unit 120. For convenience, the ordinary symbol display unit 45 is composed of two lamps, and the display state of the ordinary symbol is expressed by the lighting combination thereof. First, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is expressed by blinking the first lamp and the second lamp at the same time, and finally the stop symbol of the normal symbol is expressed by the combination of the lighting states of the first lamp and the second lamp. Is expressed. For example, turning on the first lamp and turning off the second lamp expresses the stop symbol of disconnection, turning off the first lamp and turning on the second lamp expresses the first hitting mode, and the first The second hit mode is expressed by lighting both the lamp and the second lamp.

Further, on the right side of the normal symbol display unit 45, a normal symbol hold display unit 75 is provided as a hold lamp for changing the normal symbol. The normal symbol hold display unit 75 is also composed of two lamps, and displays the number of hold of normal symbol fluctuations according to the number of lighting or the number of blinking. The number of reserved normal symbol changes is the number of game balls that have passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 during the changing of the normal symbol, and is the number of ordinary symbol lottery for which the change of the normal symbol has not yet been executed. Is shown.

The symbol display unit 120 is provided with a game status display unit 76 and an abnormality notification unit 77. The game state display unit 76 is a display unit that displays a display corresponding to a game state such as a specific game state described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, each game state is notified by turning on the lamp when the probability is fluctuating, blinking when the ball is easy to enter, and turning off when the ball is in the normal state, and the 7-segment LED during the execution of the special game. Displays the number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in the special game. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that notifies a part of the abnormality of the game machine. For example, the abnormality notification unit 77 is composed of a plurality of lamps and notifies the abnormality by a lighting pattern according to the type of abnormality. In addition, these display units may not be centrally arranged in the symbol display unit 120, and each display unit may be individually configured, or may be divided into a plurality of display devices which are appropriately arranged. Further, the notification of the gaming state such as the specific gaming state may be configured to be performed only for a predetermined period such as a certain time after returning from the power failure.

In the substantially center of the game area 81, an effect display device 60 is provided so that the screen is exposed from the screen frame formed by the center decoration 64, and the decorative symbol 61 linked to the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 is provided. Display the fluctuation of the production image including. Hereinafter, such a display is referred to as "design variation" or "variation display".

The effect display device 60 is a display device including a liquid crystal display that variablely displays the decorative symbol 61 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52. The decorative symbol 61 is a symbol for visually producing the determination result display of the lottery shown by the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. As the decorative symbol 61, the effect display device 60 displays, for example, a moving image in which a plurality of rows of symbols imitating a game of a slot machine are varied in a central region of the screen. In this embodiment, the symbols composed of the numbers "0" to "9" are displayed in three columns and varied, and the hit or miss is indicated by the combination of the three symbols that are finally stopped and displayed. Each of the plurality of symbols constituting the decorative symbol 61 is composed of numbers, letters, or symbols decorated with colors and patterns, and these numbers, letters, and symbols are common to all symbols. It may be configured by adding a different pattern to each and integrating them. This pattern is a pattern on which a motif related to the theme of decoration or production set in the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is drawn, and may be, for example, a pattern on which a character of a person or an animal is drawn. The decorative design 61 is switched between the case where the design including the design is integrally displayed and the case where the design is separated and only the numbers, letters, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the development of the effect. It may be configured to be. In the background of the variable display of the decorative symbol 61, a moving image having a directing effect related to the theme of the decoration or effect set for the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the variation of the symbol.

The effect display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display which is a high-definition dot matrix type display device, but the width of the display area may be about half the width of the game area, or a large size exceeding half. There may be. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the effect display device is formed with a passage width sufficient for one game ball to pass through, and if the player launches the so-called "right-handed" with the maximum strength, the right-hand passage will almost certainly occur. The game ball can be passed through, and it can be distinguished from the so-called "left-handed". The effect display device 60 may be composed not only of a single display device but also of a combination of a plurality of display devices. In the case of a plurality of displays, displays of different sizes such as a combination of a main liquid crystal and a sub liquid crystal may be combined, the sub liquid crystal may be arranged at a position adjacent to the main liquid crystal, or a position other than the game board, for example, a firing handle. It may be installed in the vicinity of (upper ball plate, right decorative lamp, etc.). When installed in the vicinity of the launch handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel that can be operated and input by the player. The effect display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured by a display device such as an organic EL display, a mechanical display means such as a drum rotation type, or a display means such as an LED matrix type. ..

The effect button 109 is an operation input means that the player presses to input a predetermined instruction to the game machine according to the effect content, and the effect content and the like are changed according to the pressing mode. The effect button 109 is provided on the front frame 102. The effect button 109 is normally stored in the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back side of the effect button 109, and the rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 are oriented substantially perpendicular to the board surface. It is provided so that it can be projected. The rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 function as an effect lever 112 in a state of projecting to the outside, and the player can hold the effect button 109 and pull the effect lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input a predetermined instruction to the game machine. The cross key 110 is an operation input means for the player to input a direction instruction to the game machine, and is provided on the outer wall surface on the left side of the upper ball plate 105.

The game method and control flow performed in the game machine having the above configuration will be outlined. When the player manually rotates the launch handle 107, the game balls stored in the upper ball plate 105 are guided one by one to the rail 82 and launched into the game area 81 with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle. .. When the player fixes the rotation position of the firing handle 107 by hand, the firing of the game ball is repeated at regular time intervals. The game ball launched to the upper part of the game area 81 hits a plurality of game nails, a windmill, a center decoration 64, and the like, and falls in a direction corresponding to the way of hitting. When a game ball falls into each of the general winning opening 33, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the large winning opening 20, the winning ball according to the type of the winning opening is the upper ball plate 105 or the lower. It is paid out to the ball plate 106. The game ball that has fallen into each winning opening such as the general winning opening 33 is treated as a safe ball, and the game ball that has fallen into the out opening 34 is treated as an out ball. The specification may be such that the discharge of the safe sphere is excluded from the detection by the out detection device 39, or the safe sphere is also guided to the area where the out detection device 39 is provided and all the discharge is detected by the out detection device 39. May be. Alternatively, the specification may be such that the guidance of the safe sphere and the detection of the safe sphere by the out detection device 39 are not performed, and the total of the number of detected spheres of the safe sphere added to the number of detected spheres of the out sphere is used as the number of discharged spheres.

Further, when the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol is variably displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45, and is stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variable display time determined prior to the display. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode or the second hit mode, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded based on the hit mode of the stopped and displayed symbol and the game state when the stop is displayed. .. That is, when the gaming state when the symbol is stopped is the normal gaming state and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode, a short opening of 0.1 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90. Further, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode in the specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state), the normal symbol is in the second hit mode in the normal state and the specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state). When the stop display is displayed, a long opening for 6 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90. Here, the winning probability of the normal symbol and the execution probability of the long opening are set so as to differ depending on the game state. Specifically, in the open lottery in the normal state, the normal symbol wins with a probability of 1/100, and the execution probability of the short opening in that case (the probability that the winning symbol of the first winning mode is selected) is 1 /. 3. The execution probability of long opening (probability of selecting the hit symbol of the second hit mode) is set to 2/3. Further, in the open lottery in the specific game state (for example, the ball entry easy state), the normal symbol is hit with a probability of 99/100, and the selection probability of the first hit mode and the second hit mode is the same as that in the normal game state. However, it is set so that the long opening is executed regardless of the winning mode. In this way, in the easy-to-enter state, the function of changing the hit probability of the normal symbol (probability change from 1/100 to 99/100) and the function of extending the opening time (the opening time when the stop is displayed in the first hit mode is 0). The ease of entering the second starting port 12 is improved by (extending from .1 second to 6.0 seconds). The function of extending the operating period of the ordinary electric accessory 90 (long opening) may be referred to as "opening extension".

In addition, as described above, by setting the probability of long opening to be higher than the probability of short opening in the normal state, the long opening is executed at a constant rate even in the normal state when the normal symbol is won. .. As a modification, on the contrary, in the normal state, the probability of short opening may be higher than the probability of long opening, the specification may have the same probability of both, or the specification may always be short opening. Good. Further, when the ball is in the easy-to-enter state, the ease of entering the second starting port 12 may be enhanced by using three functions including a function of shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. In that case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the easy-to-enter state. The winning probability of the open lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the normal electric accessory 90 may be expanded only when the open lottery is performed in the easy-to-enter state. Further, when the normal electric accessory 90 expands, it may be notified in advance to that effect, the hold of the normal symbol change may be pre-read and notified before the start of the change of the normal symbol, or the normal symbol may be notified. It may be notified during the fluctuation.

As a modification of the opening mode when the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is opened for a long time, the total opening time is increased to about 6 seconds by repeating the opening for 2 seconds, which is longer than the short opening, three times. It may be an embodiment. In addition, a plurality of combinations of opening time and opening number may be prepared, and one of them may be selected. For example, when the 2-second opening is performed 3 times, the total opening time is the same as when the 6-second opening is performed once, but the former is longer than the latter when the interval period is included. Therefore, especially in the configuration of the modified example in which the second starting port 12 is arranged in the right-handed direction, the former player enters the ball assuming that the player who notices the opening adjusts the hitting direction to the second starting port 12 from that point. It can be said that the chance is long. Further, it may be configured so that there are a plurality of hit types of ordinary symbols, and the opening mode of the expansion mechanism may be different depending on the hit types. For example, when the normal symbol is the first hit, the 0.1 second opening is set once in the normal state, the 1 second opening is set three times in the easy-to-enter state, and the second hit is the normal state. Then, the 6-second opening may be performed once, and the 2-second opening may be performed twice in the easy-to-enter state.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in the first special symbol display unit 41, the second special symbol display unit 42, and the effect display device 60. , And the decorative symbol 61 are displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is stopped after the variation display time determined prior to the display has elapsed. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable manner according to a variable pattern in which the variation mode from the start to the stop of the variation is defined. The decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed according to a variable effect pattern in which the variation mode from the start to the stop of the variation is defined. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns and fluctuation production patterns are prepared, and each has various fluctuation times, long and short. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variablely displayed according to the variation pattern, the decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed according to the variation effect pattern having the same variation time. In the variation pattern, the variation display time is set for each pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and the variation of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 occurs when the variation display time elapses. It will be stopped. Hereinafter, the variation display of the decorative symbol 61 displayed according to the variation effect pattern will be illustrated, and the variation effect pattern will be briefly described. Details of the variation pattern and the method of determining the variation effect pattern will be described separately.

As an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol 61, first, when the variation starts, the symbols are varied in all three rows like the reel rotation of the slot machine, and when the variation end timing is approached, the symbols are stopped one by one in the final stop mode. The symbol combination as is displayed. As an operation when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 190 is stopped, it may be controlled to stop a plurality of rows at the same time instead of one row at a time so that the effect display other than the decorative symbol is noticed during the variable display, or the effect display other than the decorative symbol may be noticed in a shorter fluctuation time. It may be possible to display the symbol variation. In addition, as an operation at the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 190, control is performed so as to delay the start of fluctuation of a part of the columns according to the subsequent development (type of effect pattern, etc.) in the fluctuation to produce a feeling of expectation. It may be.

Next, the variable effect pattern will be briefly described. The variable effect pattern includes a normal off effect pattern, a reach out effect pattern, and a reach jackpot effect pattern. The normal out-of-order effect pattern is an effect pattern when displaying a normal out-of-order symbol combination. The out-of-reach effect pattern is an effect pattern when displaying a combination of out-of-reach symbols through a reach state, which is a state in which one more symbol is aligned and a big hit is made. The reach jackpot effect pattern is an effect pattern when displaying the symbol combination of the jackpot after the reach state. In particular, the pattern when going through the reach state includes a pattern having various fluctuation times, long and short, and a reach pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is called "normal reach", and a reach pattern with a long fluctuation time is called "super reach". ". The normal out-of-reach effect pattern, the reach-out effect pattern, and the reach jackpot effect pattern are divided into a normal pattern displayed in a normal state and a time-saving pattern displayed in a time-saving state, respectively. However, even in the normal state, if the second symbol fluctuates corresponding to the entry of the ball into the second starting port 12, the probability that the jackpot will be accompanied by a probability change or the number of unit games of the special game will increase is the first. Since it can be said that the chance state is higher than the first fluctuation corresponding to the entry of the ball into the 1 start port 11, a pattern for chance effect indicating that the chance is a relatively advantageous jackpot may be used. In the embodiment, the time saving pattern is used in the time saving state, but since the time saving is accompanied in the probability changing state, the time saving pattern is also used in the probability changing state. However, in the modified example, the specification may be such that a pattern for probability variation different from that for time saving is used in the probability variation state. Alternatively, a specification that uses a common pattern for time saving and probability variation may be used, or a specification that uses a probability variation pattern in the probability variation state without particularly using the time reduction pattern may be used.

When the number of pending win / loss lottery reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), the symbol variation time in the case of a loss is shortened than usual in order to improve the game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as "shortening variation"). Similarly, when the number of winning / failing lottery pending is 4, the symbol fluctuation time in the case of losing is further shortened as compared with the case of the above 3 in order to further improve the game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as "super shortened fluctuation"). ). When the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping are in the stop mode showing a big hit after the above-mentioned symbol variation, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to a special game, and the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 20 is started. The stop mode of the decorative symbol 61 showing the jackpot is, for example, a combination mode in which the types of the three symbols match.

There are two types of special games, normal special games and shortened special games, and there is a big difference in the profits from the winning prize balls. Usually, the special game is started by displaying the production screen called the start demo time. After the screen display of the start demo time, the big winning opening 20 is opened, and the opening is continued for about 30 seconds, or is temporarily closed after 9 or more game balls have fallen. The process from opening to closing of the large winning opening 20 is basically called a unit game, but there may be a case where a plurality of short-time openings are repeated during one unit game. After the opening and closing of the large winning opening 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 or 10 times, the special game is usually ended by the display of the effect screen called the end demo time. In normal special games, you can expect enough balls to enter 9 or more balls per unit game, and you can get enough prize balls (also called "balls") by 10 unit games, which is a big profit. Is obtained. A special game in which 10 unit games are repeated is appropriately referred to as a "10R jackpot", and a special game in which 4 unit games are repeated is appropriately referred to as a "4R jackpot". Although the unit game is repeated 10 times, in some unit games, the unit game is substantially repeated a small number of times by opening the large winning opening 20 for a shorter time (for example, 1.6 seconds) than usual. It is also possible to realize a normal special game similar to the one (sometimes referred to as "substantial nR jackpot").

On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demo time and the end demo time are short or almost nonexistent (0.1 seconds, etc.), and the large winning opening 20 is opened for 1.6 seconds in one unit game. This unit game is repeated twice to end the shortened special game. In the shortened special game, since the opening of the large winning opening 20 is only repeated twice for a very short time, it is almost impossible to enter the large winning opening 20, and the number of balls is substantially zero or a small number (for example, number). This is a special game that is equal to the number of balls to be paid out according to the number of balls entered in one round, such as about 10 balls to several tens of balls. A special game in which two unit games are repeated is also appropriately referred to as a "2R jackpot". Although the number of unit games is the same as that of the normal special game, the shortened special game can be realized by opening the large winning opening 20 for a shorter time than usual in all the unit games.

Further, when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping are in the predetermined small hit mode after the above-mentioned symbol variation, the small hit game composed of one unit game The opening and closing operation of the grand prize opening 20 is executed. In one unit game constituting the small hit game, the big winning opening 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds, and the operation mode is similar to the 2R big hit in appearance.

When a special game occurs and the hit stop symbol at that time is in a specific mode (for example, "777"), the probability change, which is one of the specific games, is further started after the end of the special game. During the probability change, a winning / losing lottery with a higher probability of winning than the normal probability state is performed, and a new special game may occur relatively early. It should be noted that the fact that the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery is a specific big hit, that is, a big hit accompanied by a probability change is not clearly shown from the appearance, and a latent probability change state that is not explicitly notified as a decorative pattern or an effect content may be used. In that case, the effect display device 60 does not clearly indicate whether the change is probable or non-probable even during the probable change. In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it may be clearly shown to the effect display device 60 whether it is a probable change or a non-probable change.

In the normal game after the special game is completed, the ball entry easy state, which is one of the specific game states, is started. In the easy-to-enter state, the winning probability of the open lottery is increased more than usual, and the opening extension is executed so that the opening time of the normal electric accessory 90 is extended. Since the number of hits of the normal symbol per fixed time can be increased and the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port 12 is also increased, it is highly possible that the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 will increase. Therefore, as a result of increasing the chances of obtaining a prize ball by entering the second starting port 12, it is possible to continue playing while hardly reducing the number of balls held or gradually increasing the number of balls held.

In the easy-to-enter state, as one of the specific game states, the so-called time reduction in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shorter than in the normal state is further executed. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is returned to the original fluctuation time after a predetermined number of fluctuations, for example, 100 fluctuations are displayed, but reaches the fluctuation number. If a big hit occurs before, the time reduction will end once. Since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened in the time saving, until a big hit occurs as compared with the case of the normal state where the symbol changes with the normal fluctuation time. The time can be shortened, and the ease of obtaining a big hit can be relatively increased. In the modified example, the specification may be such that the special symbol is not shortened in the easy-to-enter state.

FIG. 2 shows the basic structure of the pachinko machine on the back side. The power switch 150 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and processes all game operations such as a lottery when winning a prize in the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. The sub-board 300 includes a liquid crystal unit 151, controls the display content of the effect display device 60, and changes the effect display content particularly according to the determination result of the main board 200. The back setting mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for the prize balls, a payout device 154 for paying out the prize balls, and the like. The payout device 154 pays out the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball plate 105 according to the winning of each winning opening. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154. The launching device 156 launches the stored balls of the upper ball plate 105 into the game area 81 one by one. The launch control board 157 controls the launch operation of the launch device 156. The power supply board 158 supplies electric power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 100. A performance display unit 159 is provided on the substrate of the main substrate 200. The performance display unit 159 is composed of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number for the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launch balls, which is the total of safe balls and out balls.

A setting changing device 170 is provided on the board of the main board 200. The setting change device 170 is a device for changing a setting to one of a plurality of settings (also referred to as a game setting) corresponding to a plurality of game specifications. For example, six levels of settings (settings 1 to 6) are prepared as game settings, and the probability of a big hit can be different depending on the game settings. Specifically, the larger the numerical value among settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specifications can be for the player. When each of the jackpot probabilities from settings 1 to 6 is M1 to M6, M1 ≤ M2 ≤ M3. The jackpot probability of each setting can be determined so that ≦ M4 ≦ M5 ≦ M6. It is not essential to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings, and the jackpot probabilities may be the same between different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all the game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

The setting change device 170 has a setting key cylinder 171 for inserting a setting key held by an employee of the game store, a setting change button 172 for changing the setting to one of a plurality of game settings, and a set setting value. It includes a setting display unit 173 for lighting and displaying, and a setting memory for storing the set setting value. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turnkey type switch for shifting to a state in which the setting can be changed (hereinafter referred to as "setting change state") or a state in which the setting can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation state"). First, the power switch 150 is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 and the setting key is turned to turn it on, and then the power switch 150 is turned on to shift to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In order to shift to the setting change state, the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch (sometimes referred to as "RWM clear switch"). On the other hand, in order to shift to the setting confirmation state, the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When the state shifts to the setting change state, the number "1" indicating the setting 1 is displayed on the setting display unit 173 as the initial value of the game setting, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172. The setting display unit 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays a one-digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is changed in order such as 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → .... When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the off state after changing the setting, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory and the setting change is confirmed. , You will be ready to play. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the setting confirmation state, the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is not switched and the setting cannot be changed. After that, when the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the original state and turned off, the game becomes playable. When the setting key is turned off to enable the game, the setting display unit 173 is turned off and the current set value cannot be visually recognized.

The setting change button 172 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. In this case, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is not turned (setting key off state), RAM clear is executed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is turned (setting key is on), the setting changes state when the RAM is cleared. Further, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch in the setting key-off state, the power is restored without clearing the RAM. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch in the setting key on state, the setting transition state is entered. Further, the setting display unit 173 may also be used as the performance display unit 159. In this case, the combined display unit may function as the performance display unit 159 in the game-enabled state, and may function as the setting display unit 173 in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, the setting changing device 170 may not be provided so that the game setting cannot be changed.

<Functional block>
FIG. 3 shows a functional block of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Hereinafter, the functions realized by using each configuration will be described, but in the present specification, in order to match the physical configuration and the functional configuration, for example, a physical configuration such as a main board 200, a payout control board 155, a launch control board 157, etc. For the part already explained as, the term may be used as it is for convenience.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a power supply board 158 that generates a power source to be used in the gaming machine based on an AC power supply (AC24V or the like) supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and a main control device that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. Main board 200, payout control board 155 as a frame control device for controlling prize ball payout, launch control board 157 for controlling launch of game balls to the game area, and directing operations and processing are controlled. It is configured in a form in which the functions are shared with the sub-board 300 as the sub-control device.

The main board 200 includes a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a large winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning port group (first general winning port 33a, second general winning port). It is electrically connected to the port 33b), the out port 34, the symbol display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and various control signals are transmitted and received between them. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200, the launch control board 157, and the payout device 154. The payout control board 155 transmits a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on a prize ball payout transmitted from the main board 200, a signal indicating the control state of the main board 200, and the like to indirectly transmit the launch control board 157. And control the payout of prize balls by the payout device 154. The payout device 154 includes a payout motor 166 and a ball counting sensor 167. The launch control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launch device 156, and the ball feed device 164, and the ball feed device 164 and the launch device 164 and the launch device are launched based on the launch permission signal transmitted from the payout control board 155. The device 156 is controlled to launch a game ball. The sub-board 300 includes an effect display device 60, a movable accessory 66 (drive motor 67, position detection sensor 68), a speaker 108, an effect input operation device 115 (effect button 109, cross key 110), a decorative lamp 111, and electrical. It is connected to and sends and receives various control signals to and from each.

Data transmission / reception between the main board 200 and the sub board 300 is unidirectional from the main board 200 to the sub board 300. Each configuration for realizing the entire operation by data transmission / reception in one direction is the main board 200. It is arranged on the sub-board 300. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the sub board 300 to the configuration included in the main board 200, and data transmission is performed. I can't even request it. Therefore, the sub-board 300 cannot refer to the information generated by the main board 200 unless the information is transmitted. Further, data is transmitted / received in both directions between the main board 200 and the payout control board 155, and between the payout control board 155 and the launch control board 157. However, as in the case between the main board 200 and the sub board 300, data can be transmitted and received from the main board 200 to the payout control board 155 in one direction, or from the payout control board 155 to the launch control board 157 in one direction. It may be configured to send and receive data.

Note that the functional blocks included in the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the launch control board 157, and the sub board 300 described below are merely examples, and as a modification, some functional blocks are mounted on other boards. It may be mounted. For example, the functional block included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional block included in the launch control board 157 may be mounted on the payout control board 155. Good. Further, for example, a part of the functional block included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the main board 200, or the remaining part may be mounted on the payout control board 155. May be divided into a plurality of substrates to form one functional block as a whole.

<Main board 200>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main board 200. The main board 200 includes a ball entry determination means 201, a performance display unit 159, a random number generation means 202, a first lottery means 211, a second lottery means 212, a preliminary judgment means 235, a general drawing lottery means 213, a hold control means 240, and a main board. Display control means 250, special game control means 260, small hit game control means 265, specific game control means 270, opening / closing control means 275, special figure adjustment means 276, main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, It includes a main error detecting means 284, a setting changing means 286, a setting confirming means 287, and a command communication means 205.

<Ball entry determination means 201>
The ball entry determination means 201 determines the entry of a game ball into each winning opening. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives the first start winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the first start opening 11, and when it receives the second start winning information, the game ball has won the second start opening 12. to decide. When the winning ball determining means 201 receives the large winning opening winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the large winning opening 20, and when it receives the general winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the general winning opening 33. Upon receiving the passing information, the ball entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32. Upon receiving the discharge information, the ball entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the out port 34. The ball entry determination means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launch balls, which is the total of the safe balls and the out balls, and displays them on the performance display unit 159. The ball entry determination means 201 is "number of payout balls" ÷ "number of out balls" x 100 when the probability of a big hit is a normal probability state and a normal ball entry state (so-called low probability and low entry ball). The value of is displayed on the performance display unit 159. Therefore, the performance display unit 159 displays the base in the low base state.

<Random number generation means 202>
The random number generation means 202 generates random numbers to be used for various determinations in the first lottery means 211, the second lottery means 212, and the general drawing lottery means 213. Specifically, the random number generation means 202 has random numbers (also referred to as “win / fail lottery values”) used in the win / loss lottery by the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 from “0” to “65535”. A random number in the range is generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 is "0" to "255" as random numbers (also referred to as "symbol determination lottery value") used in symbol determination (symbol lottery) by the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227. Random numbers in the range up to are generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 has "0" to "255" as random numbers (also referred to as "variation pattern determination lottery values") used in the determination of the variation pattern by the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232. Random numbers in the range up to "" are generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range of "0" to "99" as a random number used in the winning / losing lottery by the general drawing lottery means 213 by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range of "0" to "2" as a random number used when determining a normal symbol by a predetermined means. The "random numbers" here are not only physical random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit and genuine random numbers in the mathematical sense, but also pseudo-random numbers such as random numbers using a 16-bit counter and software random numbers using a random number generation algorithm. But it may be. Alternatively, it may be a random number generated by combining a hardware random number and a software random number. Further, as the random numbers acquired by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212, the random numbers generated by the same generation means may be acquired, or the random numbers generated by another generation means may be acquired. ..

<Public map lottery means 213>
When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol lottery means 213 generates random numbers of a random number used for winning / failing lottery of the normal symbol and a random number used for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol. Obtain from 202 and execute the lottery. The ordinary symbol lottery means 213 has a normal symbol winning / failing determination table (not shown) that is referred to for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct, and a normal symbol determination that is referred to for determining the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol to be displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 45. Hold the table. The normal symbol winning / failing judgment table defines the correspondence between the lottery value for winning / failing and the winning, and the normal symbol judgment table defines the correspondence between the lottery value for determining the stop symbol and the normal symbol. The hit / fail and stop symbols of the normal symbol are determined based on the hit probability and the symbol selection probability. When the lottery value for the winning / failing lottery of the ordinary symbol corresponds to the hit, the ordinary symbol lottery means 213 determines the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol by referring to the ordinary symbol determination table, and the lottery value for the winning / failing lottery of the ordinary symbol is set. When it corresponds to the deviation, the mode of the deviation symbol of 1 is always determined. When the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol corresponds to a hit and the normal symbol stops at a predetermined symbol (first hit mode or second hit mode), the opening / closing control means 275, which will be described later, changes the mode of the stop symbol and the game state. The ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is expanded accordingly. The expansion time is 0.1 seconds at the short opening and 6 seconds at the long opening. The lottery value of the ordinary symbol is temporarily held by the hold control means 240 described later. However, the lottery value is held only when the predetermined upper limit number of holds held by the hold control means 240 is not exceeded.

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 has a function of executing the first lottery related to the first game, such as a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first hit / fail determination means 221 and a first symbol determination means 226, and a first variation pattern determination. The first winning / failing lottery is executed as a winning / failing lottery corresponding to the entry of the ball into the first starting port 11, including the means 231. Based on various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 makes a variable display of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second winning / failing determination means 222, a second symbol determining means 227, and a second variation pattern determining means 232, and corresponds to entering a ball into the second starting port 12. The second winning / failing lottery is executed as a winning / failing lottery. Based on various lottery results by the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 makes a variable display of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60.

<First lottery value acquisition means 216 and second lottery value acquisition means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires random numbers for various lottery and determination by the first lottery means 211 from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the first start port 11. Specifically, the first winning / failing lottery value for winning / failing determination by the first winning / failing determination means 221, the first symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol determining means 226, and the first variation pattern. The first pattern lottery value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the determination means 231 is acquired from the corresponding random number generation means. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires random numbers for various lottery and determination by the second lottery means 212 from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the second starting port 12. Specifically, the second winning / failing lottery value for determining the winning / failing by the second winning / failing determination means 222, the second symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determining means 227, and the second variation pattern. The second pattern lottery value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the determination means 232 is acquired from the corresponding random number generation means.

The first winning / failing determination means 221 executes a winning / failing determination for determining whether or not to shift to the special game based on the first winning / failing lottery value. The second winning / failing determination means 222 executes a winning / failing determination for determining whether or not to shift to the special game based on the second winning / failing lottery value. In the hit / fail judgment, more specifically, "big hit" indicating that the game shifts to the special game, "small hit" indicating that the game shifts to the small hit game, and "small hit" indicating that the game does not shift to the special game and the small hit game. It is determined whether it corresponds to "off". The first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 hold a hit / fail determination table referred to in the hit / fail determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the hit / fail judgment executed when starting the symbol variation from the preliminary hit / fail judgment described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "hit / fail judgment as the main judgment". In the present specification, when the term "table" or "selection criterion" is used, the correspondence between the first parameter such as the lottery value and the second parameter such as the value indicating the option is strictly defined by the table structure. In addition to pointing to data, it is also broadly included to be realized by a program structure that derives the second parameter from the first parameter as such a correspondence. Including them, the concept is substantially synonymous with "table" and is appropriately referred to as "selection criteria". In addition, when a table structure is used, the selection criteria that are substantially one type may be composed of a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables, but the term "multiple types of selection criteria" is subdivided. Shows the actual number of table types, not the number of tableized tables.

The first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 hold a table corresponding to each hit / fail determination as a hit / fail determination table to be referred to in the hit / fail determination. Specifically, a hit / fail judgment table for hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means 221 (also referred to as “first hit / miss judgment table”) and a hit / fail judgment table for hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means 222 (“second hit / miss judgment table”). A table to be referred to is selected according to the success / failure judgment to be executed by holding the "win / fail judgment table"). In the plurality of winning / failing determination tables, the determination results of big hit, small hit, and miss are associated with the winning / failing lottery value, and the winning / failing probability is determined according to the range setting of the associated big hit. In addition, a plurality of types of winning / failing judgment tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings are prepared. For example, for each of the game settings from setting 1 to setting 6, the winning / failing judgment table in which the correspondence between the winning / failing lottery value and the winning / failing judgment result is different. Is prepared. If the probabilities of big hit, small hit, and loss are the same among the plurality of game settings, a win / fail determination table common to the plurality of game settings may be prepared.

FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a hit / fail determination table. This figure shows a winning / failing determination table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows a winning / failing determination table corresponding to setting 6. In the winning / failing judgment table of this figure, the judgment results of big hit, small hit, and miss are associated with the winning / failing lottery value, and the winning / failing probability of the big hit and the winning / failing probability of the small hit are associated with each associated range setting. Is decided. The first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 refer to the pass / fail determination table of the present figure in the hit / fail determination as the present determination. In both the first winning / failing lottery by the first winning / failing determination means 221 and the second winning / failing lottery by the second winning / failing determination means 222, a big hit is normally obtained only when the winning / failing lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299. At the time of probability change, the range of big hits is expanded, and the big hits are obtained not only when the winning / failing lottery value corresponds to the range of 0 to 299 but also when it corresponds to the range of 300 to 2999. In this way, the range corresponding to the jackpot changes according to the gaming state. In this figure, a single hit / fail judgment table shows the jackpot range for both normal time and probability change, but the hit / fail judgment table may be prepared separately for normal time and probability change, and the first It may be prepared separately for one winning / failing lottery and for the second winning / failing lottery.

In this embodiment, even if the winning / failing lottery value does not correspond to the big hit range, if it falls within the predetermined range, it becomes a small hit. In the example of this figure, when the winning / failing lottery value acquired by the first winning / failing determination means 221 corresponds to the range of 56500 to 65535, a small hit is obtained, and the winning / failing lottery value acquired by the second winning / failing determination means 222 is 64000 to 65535. If it falls within the range, it will be a small hit. That is, the first winning / failing lottery has a wider range of small hits than the second winning / failing lottery, and small hits are more likely to occur. In this way, if it does not correspond to the big hit, it is originally all "off", but in the example of this figure, if it does not correspond to the big hit, it does not correspond to the small hit. Is particularly expressed as "off". That is, when "hit or not" is considered from the viewpoint of "whether or not it is a big hit", "small hit" may be included in "missing" in a broad sense in the sense of "not a big hit". In addition, when "hit or not" is considered from the viewpoint of "hit or not", "small hit" may be included in "hit" in a broad sense together with "big hit". In this figure, an example is shown in which the judgment table for big hits and the judgment table for small hits are realized in the form of a single hit / fail judgment table, but even if each is realized as a separate table. Good. Further, the "small hit" may be provided only in one of the first game and the second game, or may not be provided in any of the games. In that case, the value corresponding to the small hit is not set in the corresponding hit / fail judgment table.

FIG. 6 schematically shows the range setting of the winning / failing lottery value for each set value. FIG. 3A shows the correspondence between the first winning / failing lottery value acquired by the first winning / failing determination means 221 and the winning / failing determination result. FIG. 3B shows the correspondence between the second winning / failing lottery value acquired by the second winning / failing determination means 222 and the winning / failing determination result. The range of the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value, which are big hits during normal times and probability changes, is 0 to 294 if the set value is "1", 0 to 295 if the set value is "2", and the set value " If it is "3", it is 0 to 296, if it is a set value "4", it is 0 to 297, if it is a set value "5", it is 0 to 298, and if it is a set value "6", it is 0 to 299. Therefore, as the set value becomes larger, the range of the winning / losing lottery value that becomes a big hit in the normal time increases, and the probability of becoming a big hit in the normal time increases. In addition, the range of the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value, which are big hits (that is, normally off) only at the time of probability change, should be 295 to 2949 if the set value is "1" and the set value "2". For example, 296 to 2959, for the set value "3", 297 to 2769, for the set value "4", 298 to 2979, for the set value "5", 299 to 2899, and for the set value "6", It is 300 to 2999. Therefore, as the set value becomes larger, the range of the winning / failing lottery value that becomes a big hit at the time of probability change increases, and the probability of winning a big hit at the time of probability change also increases. The range of the winning / failing lottery value is determined so that the ratio between the normal jackpot probability, which is a jackpot during normal times, and the jackpot probability, which is a jackpot during probability changes, is constant regardless of the set value. In this figure, the range of the winning / failing lottery value is defined so that the probability of the jackpot at the time of probability change is 10 times the probability of the jackpot at the normal time, and is common to all the set values "1" to "6". .. In addition, the range of the winning / failing lottery value is determined so that the probability of winning a small hit is constant regardless of the set value. In all the set values "1" to "6", a small hit occurs when the range of the first win / fail lottery value corresponds to 56500 to 65535, and a small hit when the range of the second win / fail lottery value corresponds to 64000 to 65535. It will be a hit. The range of winning / failing lottery values outside the range of big hits or small hits is "out of line". In this figure, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but the correspondence between the winning / failing lottery value and the winning / failing determination result may be determined so that the jackpot probability is the same between the different set values.

<1st symbol determining means 226 and 2nd symbol determining means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine the stopped symbol at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol based on the symbol lottery value acquired from the random number generating means 202 and the result of the winning / failing determination. .. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables referred to for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determining means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the result of the hit / fail determination by the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second symbol determining means 227 holds the hit / fail by the second hit / miss determination means 222. Holds a plurality of symbol judgment tables according to the judgment result. The first hit / miss determination means 221 holds a first symbol determination table at the time of a big hit, a first symbol determination table at the time of a small hit, and a first symbol determination table at the time of a miss, which is referred to at the time of a small hit. The second hit / miss determination means 222 holds a second symbol determination table at the time of a big hit, a second symbol determination table at the time of a small hit, and a second symbol determination table at the time of a miss, which is referred to at the time of a small hit. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 select a symbol determination table to be referred to according to the result of the hit / fail determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the symbol determination executed at the start of the symbol variation from the preliminary symbol determination described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "symbol determination as the main determination".

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table. FIG. 7 (a) is a table to be referred to when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, FIG. 7 (b) is a table to be referred to when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, and FIG. 7 (c) is. This is a table to be referred to when the hit / fail judgment result is a small hit. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 refer to the symbol determination table of the present figure in the symbol determination as the present determination. In each symbol determination table, the correspondence between the numbers "0" to "10" indicating the type of the special symbol and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value is defined. The types of special symbols are associated with the hit / miss judgment results of big hit, small hit, and miss, respectively. "0" to "4" correspond to big hit, and "5" to "9" correspond to small hit. "10" corresponds to the disconnection. Each type is assigned a plurality of special symbols, that is, a plurality of generally meaningless symbols formed by a combination of segments.

As shown in FIG. 7 (a), the types of special symbols "0" to "4" are associated with the presence or absence of the jackpot and the probability fluctuation after the jackpot. Specifically, the type "0" indicates a 10R jackpot with a probability change as a specific jackpot, is associated with "0 to 99" in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and is "0 to 99" in the case of the second symbol lottery value. 144 ”. The type "1" indicates a 4R jackpot (or "substantially 4R hit") with a probability variation as a specific jackpot, and is associated with "100 to 149" in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and in the case of the second symbol lottery value. It is associated with "145-149". The type "2" indicates a 2R jackpot accompanied by a probability change, and the type "2" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "150 to 189". The type "3" indicates a 10R jackpot that is not accompanied by a probability change as a normal jackpot, and the type "3" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "150 to 189". The type "4" indicates a 4R jackpot that is not accompanied by a probability change as a normal jackpot, and the type "4" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "230 to 255". In this way, the selection probability for each jackpot type (that is, the content of the jackpot and the presence or absence of subsequent probability fluctuations) is determined by the size of the range of the symbol lottery value.

In addition, it is possible to provide more types of special symbols, and in that case, by configuring so that one jackpot type is determined corresponding to a plurality of special symbol types, the jackpot can be increased while increasing the symbol types. You can set fewer types. Alternatively, it is possible to subdivide into more jackpot types in response to the increased number of symbol types. Further, it is possible to provide different symbol types at the time of the first lottery and at the time of the second lottery. In this case, one jackpot type is configured to correspond to each of the type of special symbol selected at the time of the first lottery and the type of special symbol selected at the time of the second lottery. However, it is desirable to set the ratio of probability fluctuations to be the same in the first lottery and the second lottery.

As shown in FIG. 7 (b), the type "10" is associated with the symbol lottery value in the entire range when the winning / failing determination result is wrong. Therefore, it is determined that the same special symbol is always stopped and displayed in the case of deviation. It is also possible to provide a plurality of special symbols to be stopped and displayed in case of disconnection.

As shown in FIG. 7 (c), the types of special symbols "5" to "9" are associated with small hits. The type "5" is associated with the range "0 to 49" of the symbol lottery value, and the type "6" is associated with the range "50 to 99" of the symbol lottery value. The type "7" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "100 to 149", the type "8" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "150 to 199", and the type "9" is the symbol lottery value range. It is associated with "200 to 255".

In this embodiment, in order to save the storage area in the main board 200, the table of FIG. 7 is also referred to as the pre-symbol determination table in the pre-symbol determination. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine that the value of "0" to "10" indicating the type of the special symbol as a result of the preliminary symbol determination is the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the indicated value and the number of holds. It should be noted that, as the pre-design judgment table, one that can be further subdivided and complicated judgment can be performed, or one in which the judgment range of the jackpot symbol that executes the same special game is summarized and simplified may be used. .. In addition, when the symbol is uniformly determined at the time of disengagement as in this embodiment, a specific symbol can be selected without referring to the acquired symbol lottery value and without preparing a symbol determination table for disengagement. You may decide.

<First variation pattern determining means 231 and second variation pattern determining means 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first variation pattern determining means 231 acquires, from the random number generating means 202, a variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the effect display device 60 is defined. It is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on one pattern lottery value. The second variation pattern determining means 232 uses the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display unit 42 and the effect display device 60 is determined as the second pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202. Based on this, it is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 respectively refer to the variation pattern table when starting the symbol variation to determine the variation pattern of the symbol variation. Further, the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 execute a preliminary pattern determination as to which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232, and the control means of the main board 200, refer to the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and the start port. The pre-pattern judgment table used for information generation for the execution judgment of the look-ahead process at the time of entering the ball is held or shared. The fluctuation pattern defines the fluctuation time from the start to the stop of the fluctuation when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and has various fluctuation times, long and short, depending on the type. That is, in each fluctuation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation is defined, the variation display time is substantially set for each pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and the special symbol is set when the variation display time elapses. Fluctuation is stopped. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern determination executed at the start of the symbol variation is also appropriately referred to as "variation pattern determination as the main determination" in order to distinguish it from the prior pattern determination. Further, in order to contribute to the selection of the variation effect pattern of the decorative pattern described later, it may be defined as a different type of variation pattern with the same variation time.

FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 refer to the table of the present figure (a) in the normal state and refer to the table of the present figure (b) in the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 8A, when the winning / failing judgment result is incorrect in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "0", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, "Super 2", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "1", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, the normal reach of the pattern range number "2" is selected "normal 1", and if the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, the normal reach of the pattern range number "3" is "normal". 2 ”is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, "out of reach" of the pattern range number "4" is selected. As "out of reach", different fluctuation patterns are selected according to the number of holds, a fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds when the number of holds is 0 to 2, a fluctuation pattern of 7 seconds when the number of holds is 3, and a number of holds. When is 4, a 4-second fluctuation pattern is selected.

In this figure, an example of mainly classifying into five types according to the fluctuation time will be described, but a plurality of fluctuation effect patterns are prepared for each of the fluctuation patterns in the sub-board 300, and dozens of types of variation effect patterns are prepared in total. Is equivalent to being associated with the lottery value range of each category.

The range of the pattern lottery values assigned to "normal 1", "normal 2", and "out of reach" also differs depending on the number of reservations. When the number of holds is 0, 1, it is as shown in this figure (a), but as the number of holds increases, the lottery value range of "normal 1" and "normal 2" becomes narrower, and the lottery value of "out of reach" The range becomes wider. The smaller the number of holds, the wider the lottery value range of the fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time, and the probability that the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time will be selected increases. Therefore, the smaller the number of holds, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the larger the number of holds, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using a fluctuation pattern table in which the correspondence between the pattern lottery value range and the fluctuation pattern is different for each number of holds, it is possible to realize control in which a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is easily selected when the number of holds is small.

In the normal state, when the winning / failing judgment result is 4R jackpot or 10R jackpot, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123, "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "5", is selected and the pattern lottery value is If it is 124 to 248, "Super 2", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "6", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 249 to 252, the normal reach of the pattern range number "7" is selected "normal 1", and if the pattern lottery value is 253 to 255, the normal reach of the pattern range number "8" is "normal". 2 ”is selected.

If the winning / failing judgment result is a 2R big hit or a small hit in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122, "Super 3", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "9", is selected and the pattern lottery value is set. If it is 123 to 255, "normal 3", which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "10", is selected.

When the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 transmit the pre-determination result to the effect determining means 303 as a so-called look-ahead result, the value (0 to 10) of the pattern range number is set to the first correctness. It is transmitted together with a value indicating whether it is a lottery or a second winning / failing lottery and the number of holds. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, it is illustrated that a table is provided for each of the winning / failing judgment results in the preliminary pattern judgment. In addition to deriving only information regarding which range the sub-board is located in, the control means side of the sub-board 300 may be controlled to determine what kind of variation is executed together with the preliminary pass / fail determination result.

In the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 8B referred to in the time saving state, the pattern lottery value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern for time saving. However, the correspondence between the range of the pattern lottery value and the fluctuation time is the same as that in FIG. 8 (a) except for the "reach-free loss shortening" selected for the loss. “Reachless loss shortening” is a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time associated with the same lottery value range and pattern range number as “reachless loss” in FIG. 8A. For "shortening without reach", different fluctuation patterns are selected according to the number of holdings, a fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds when the number of holdings is 0, 1 and a fluctuation pattern of 1 second when the number of holdings is 2-4. Are selected respectively. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or may refer to different variation pattern tables according to the gaming state. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery and the second lottery is processed with priority over the first lottery, the second lottery is the first in spite of the easy entry state due to the shortened time. The situation in which the hold of the second lottery is exhausted and the first lottery is continuously executed is not preferable for the player. Therefore, in the out-of-ball fluctuation in the first lottery in the easy-to-enter state, a fluctuation pattern table is referred to in which a fluctuation pattern for a long time (for example, 10 seconds) that does not shorten the fluctuation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of holdings. It may be that.

<Hold control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4, the hold control means 240 includes the special figure hold means 241 and the normal figure hold means 242. When the first winning / failing lottery value or the second winning / failing lottery value is newly acquired, the special figure holding means 241 changes the symbol corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery value or the second winning / failing lottery value acquired before that. When is displayed, the start of the symbol variation corresponding to the newly acquired first winning / failing lottery value or the second winning / failing lottery value is suspended, and the winning / failing lottery value is stored until the start of the variation display of the corresponding symbol. Here, for each of the first special symbols, up to four, the first winning / failing lottery value, the first symbol lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value are stored, and for the second special symbol, each of them has an upper limit of four. The second winning / failing lottery value, the second symbol lottery value, and the second pattern lottery value are stored. The normal figure holding means 242 stores the normal figure lottery value acquired by the normal figure lottery means 213 as a holding ball. The number of these holds is represented by the number of lights or the number of blinks of the first special figure hold display unit 71, the second special figure hold display unit 72, and the normal figure hold display unit 75, respectively. The number of holds by the special figure holding means 241 is also displayed on the effect display device 60.

The lottery value of the second winning / failing lottery held by the special figure holding means 241 is preferentially digested over the lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery, and the symbol variation is displayed. Therefore, even if the jackpot lottery value is held as the first win / loss lottery, as long as the lottery value is held as the second win / loss lottery, the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot lottery value of the first win / loss lottery is not displayed. Therefore, even if a big hit is held as the first winning or losing lottery, there is a possibility that a plurality of consecutive big hits can be obtained by continuing to hit until the big hit is held as the second winning or losing lottery.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special figure control means 251 and a second special figure control means 252, and a normal figure control means 254. The first special symbol control means 251 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41 according to the variation pattern determined according to the determination result of the first winning / failing lottery by the first lottery means 211. Let me. The first special symbol control means 251 sets a new symbol variation start condition that the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery performed before that has been completed. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42 according to the variation pattern determined according to the determination result of the second winning / failing lottery by the second lottery means 212. Let me. The second special symbol control means 252 also has a new symbol variation start condition that the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery performed before that has been completed.

When the special figure holding means 241 stores the winning / failing lottery value of the second winning / failing lottery, the first special figure controlling means 251 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery. On the other hand, the second special figure control means 252 starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning / failing lottery regardless of whether or not the winning / failing lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery is stored by the special figure holding means 241. As a result, when the lottery value is held in both the first winning / failing lottery and the second winning / failing lottery, the lottery value held in the second winning / failing lottery is preferentially read out and the symbol variation is displayed. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first winning / failing lottery is not read and the symbol change does not start until the number of holdings in the second winning / failing lottery becomes 0.

The first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252 are changed by the command communication means 205 described later at the timing of starting and the timing of stopping the change display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The start command and the fluctuation stop command are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 (sub-main). When the fluctuation start command is transmitted, a value indicating each of the winning / failing judgment result, the stop symbol, and the fluctuation pattern determined or determined as the final judgment and a value indicating whether the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery is performed are set. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation start command. When the variable stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the variable stop command. Further, the effect determining means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a variation stop command, and the like to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variation display of the decorative symbol by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) is synchronized, and the interlocking is maintained. The normal symbol control means 254 causes the normal symbol display unit 45 to display the determination result of the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 213 as a variable display of the normal symbol.

<Special figure adjustment means 276>
The special symbol adjusting means 276 waits for the start of the variable display of the other while the variable display of one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is displayed. The special figure adjusting means 276 has a second special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 12, regardless of the order in which the game ball has entered the first start opening 11 or the second start opening 12. The variation display of 52 is prioritized over the variation display of the first special symbol 51 based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 11. For example, when both the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value are reserved, the second winning / failing lottery value is always preferentially digested, and the second special symbol 52 is continuously changed and displayed.

The special symbol adjusting means 276 in the modified example displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 and the variation of the second special symbol 52 according to the order of entering the balls into the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. It may be selectively changed and displayed. For example, when the ball enters in the order of the first starting port 11, the first starting port 11, and the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51, the first special symbol 51, and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable order. Will be done. In this case, the special figure adjusting means 276 monitors the hold control means 240 and stores the hold order of the winning / failing lottery value. Since which special symbol should be changed is determined according to the ball entry order of the game ball, that is, the hold order of the winning / failing lottery value in the hold control means 240, the player can easily visually grasp the change order.

In another modification, the special symbol adjusting means 276 may display the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined digestion order regardless of the ball entry order. Good. For example, priority may be given to alternately displaying the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52. For example, when both the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value are reserved, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are alternately displayed in a variable manner. Since which special symbol should be changed is simply alternated regardless of the ball entry order of the game ball, the player can easily grasp the order of change.

The special symbol adjusting means 276 also waits for the start of the variation display of the other when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is stopped in the hitting mode. In this case, since the variable display of the special symbol is not started while the special game is executed, the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Preliminary determination means 235>
The pre-determination means 235 includes a first lottery pre-determination means 236 and a second lottery pre-determination means 237. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 is a random number acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 before the execution of various determinations by the first winning / failing determination means 221, the first symbol determination means 226, and the first variation pattern determination means 231. Is used to determine in advance information about the change before the start of the change of the first special symbol by the first special figure control means 251. The second lottery pre-determination means 237 is a random number acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 before the execution of various determinations by the second winning / failing determination means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232. Is used to determine in advance information about the change before the start of the change of the second special symbol by the second special figure control means 252.

The first lottery pre-determination means 236 includes a first pre-win / fail lottery value determination table, a first pre-design lottery value determination table, and a first pre-variation pattern random value determination table as determination tables for pre-determination related to the first lottery means 211. Hold the table. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-win / fail lottery value determination table to determine a random number group to which the first win / fail lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-symbol lottery value determination table to determine a random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-variation pattern determination table to determine a random number group to which the first variation pattern lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs. Then, these determination results are temporarily stored as the pre-determination results, and the information regarding the pre-determination results is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later.

FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a preliminary hit / fail determination table referred to in the preliminary hit / fail determination. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the first game) refers to the first pre-win / fail lottery value determination table of FIG. 9A when the ball enters the first start opening 11, and the win / fail lottery value. When is "0 to 299", a value of "1" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary hit / fail judgment result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value of "2" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing judgment result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "3000 to 56499", the value of "3" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "56500 to 65535", the value of "4" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. Next, the first symbol lottery value determination table (not shown) is referred to, and when the first symbol lottery value is "0 to 99", a value of "0" indicating that fact is set as the advance symbol determination result. .. When the first symbol lottery value is "100 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. Further, referring to the first pre-variation pattern random number value determination table (not shown), when the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. .. When the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value of "B" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. When the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-determination information set by the first lottery pre-determination means 236 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the first game) is the first start port 11 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing of the information indicating the entry into the ball (indicating that it is the first winning / losing lottery), the information indicating the number of holds, and the like.

The second lottery pre-determination means 237 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the second game) refers to the second pre-win / fail lottery value determination table shown in FIG. 9B when the ball enters the second start port 12, and the win / fail lottery When the value is "0 to 299", the value of "1" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary hit / fail judgment result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value of "2" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing judgment result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "3000 to 63999", the value of "3" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "64,000 to 65535", the value of "4" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. Next, the second preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown) is referred to, and when the second symbol lottery value is "0 to 144", a value of "0" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. .. When the second symbol lottery value is "145-149", a value of "1" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. Further, referring to the second pre-variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. .. When the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value of "B" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. When the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-judgment information set by the second lottery pre-determination means 237 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the second game) is the second start port 12 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. The information is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing of the information indicating the entry into the ball (indicating that it is the second winning / losing lottery), the information indicating the number of holds, and the like.

It should be noted that various information temporarily stored as the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means 235 is stored in a predetermined pre-determination result storage area up to 4 each, as in the case of the number of reserved storages. The preliminary determination result may be stored using the hold storage area stored by the hold control means 240. The information may be deleted based on the fact that the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means 235 is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. In this way, efficient use of the storage area on the main board 200 can be expected by sharing the information with other areas or erasing the information based on the completion of transmission. Further, as the judgment table for the preliminary judgment, the judgment table for the main judgment may be used without providing the table dedicated to the preliminary judgment, and the preliminary judgment regarding the first game and the preliminary judgment regarding the second game can be used. A part or all of them may share a common pre-judgment table. In this way, by sharing with other determination tables, it is expected that the data capacity of the main board 200 will be reduced. It should be noted that the content to be transmitted as the determination result of the pre-determination means 235 can be appropriately selected, for example, only the determination result of whether or not the result is transmitted. Further, the value of the random number acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 described above without being determined by the pre-determination means 235, and the sub-board It may be configured so that the content of the preliminary determination is determined by 300.

The pre-determination means 235 may refer to the pre-win / fail lottery value determination table in which the correspondence between the win / fail lottery value and the pre-win / fail determination result is different depending on the set value set by the setting change device 170. Similar to the above-mentioned winning / failing determination table, a plurality of types of advance winning / failing lottery value determination tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings may be prepared, and the advance winning / failing lottery value determination table to be referred to may be switched according to the set value of the game setting. In addition, a pre-win / fail lottery value determination table that can be commonly used among a plurality of game settings may be used. In this case, the hit / fail may be pre-determined by the combination of the set value of the game setting and the value of the pre-win / fail determination result.

FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a preliminary hit / fail determination table corresponding to the game setting. FIG. 3A is a preliminary hit / fail determination table referred to by the first lottery pre-determination means 236, and FIG. 3B is a preliminary hit / fail determination table referred to by the second lottery pre-determination means 237. When the winning / failing lottery value is "0 to 294", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "11", indicating that a big hit is obtained in all the settings 1 to 6. When the winning / failing lottery value is "295", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "12", which indicates that the setting is 2 or more in the normal state or a big hit in all the settings at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "296", the preliminary winning / failing judgment result is "13", indicating that a big hit is obtained with the setting 3 or more at the normal time or all the settings at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "297", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "14", indicating that a big hit is obtained in the setting 4 or more in the normal time or all the settings in the probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "298", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "15", indicating that the setting is 5 or more in the normal state or a big hit in all the settings at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "299", the preliminary winning / failing judgment result is "16", indicating that a big hit is obtained with the setting 6 at the normal time or all the settings at the time of probability change. Further, when the winning / failing lottery value is "300 to 2949", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "21", indicating that a big hit is obtained in all the settings at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2950 to 2959", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "22", indicating that a big hit is obtained when the setting is 2 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2960 to 2696", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "23", indicating that a big hit is obtained when the setting is 3 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2970 to 2979", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "23", indicating that a big hit is obtained at the setting of 4 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2980 to 2899", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "25", indicating that a big hit is obtained when the setting is 5 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2990 to 2999", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "26", indicating that the setting 6 at the time of probability change is a big hit. Further, when the first winning / failing lottery value shown in (a) is "3000 to 56499" and the second winning / failing lottery value shown in (b) is "3000 to 63999", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "3000-63999". It becomes "30", which indicates that it is a small hit in all settings. Further, when the first winning / failing lottery value shown in (a) is "56500 to 65535" and the second winning / failing lottery value shown in (b) is "64,000 to 65535", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is ". It becomes "40", which indicates that it is out of order in all settings. By using such a pre-win / fail determination table, it is possible to show an appropriate pre-win / fail determination result for each set value of the game setting.

<Special game control means 260>
The special game control means 260 operates the special game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode when the first winning or losing lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a shift to the special game. It is determined that the conditions have been met, and the special game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20. Similarly, when the special game control means 260 results in the second winning / failing lottery by the second lottery means 212 indicating a shift to the special game, when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode. It is determined that the special game operating condition is satisfied, and the special game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20.

The special game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 20 is continuously performed a plurality of times in succession, and is composed of a plurality of unit games. The special game includes a 10R jackpot that repeats a unit game 10 times, a 4R jackpot that repeats a unit game four times, and a 2R jackpot that repeats a unit game that has a shorter opening time than the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot only twice. The 10R jackpot is the jackpot in the second win / loss lottery, and the 4R jackpot is the jackpot in the first win / loss lottery. In the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot, in principle, the jackpot 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in one unit game. In the 2R jackpot, the jackpot 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 ends the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game is exhausted. Even in the case of a 2R jackpot, if the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the jackpot 20 may be opened in the same opening mode as the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot.

<Small hit game control means 265>
The small hit game control means 265 operates the small hit game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined small hit mode when the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a small hit. It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and the small hit game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20 to the opening / closing control means 275. Similarly, the small hit game control means 265 is small when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined small hit mode when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a small hit. It is determined that the winning game operating condition is satisfied, and the small hit game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20 to the opening / closing control means 275.

In the small hit game, the unit game is executed once, and the large winning opening 20 is opened and closed twice in one unit game. The small hit game control means 265 opens the large winning opening 20 for about 0.8 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the large winning opening 20 to end the small hit game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls a normal game in a probability variation state, a time saving state, and a ball entry easy state. When the special symbol is a specific jackpot symbol accompanied by a transition to the probability variation, the specific game control means 270 shifts the gaming state to the probability variation state, the time saving state, and the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game. The probabilistic state, the time saving state, and the easy-to-enter state are continued until the next big hit occurs. In the time saving state, the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 select the variation pattern having a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is substantially shortened. To do. However, in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern table according to the number of winning / failing lottery values held by the holding control means 240 is referred to, and as the number of holdings by the holding control means 240 decreases, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time tends to appear. In the easy-to-enter state, at least one of the three functions of probabilistic change of the normal symbol, shortening of the time of the normal symbol, and opening extension of the second starting port 12 is performed to enter the second starting port 12. Ball frequency (easiness of entering the ball) is improved. During the probability change state, the hit / fail determination result by the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 is maintained at a high probability of becoming a big hit. Further, the specific game control means 270 causes the second starting port 12 to be in the open extension state when a specific big hit occurs, and further increases the winning probability of the open lottery only when the winning / failing lottery is the second winning / failing lottery. It shifts to a probability change state higher than the normal probability state.

<Open / close control means 275>
The opening / closing control means 275 controls the opening / closing of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the large winning opening 20 of the second starting port 12. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific mode, the open / close control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 to open the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12. In the normal state, the opening / closing control means 275 opens the second starting port 12 with a short opening or long opening opening time according to the result of the open lottery, and in the easy ball entry state, the long opening opening time is the first. 2 The starting port 12 is opened. This is intended to improve the ease of entering the ball of the second starting port 12 so that the player can continue the game without reducing the number of balls held. In the special game, the open / close control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the large winning opening solenoid 92 to open the large winning opening 20.

<Main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial processing execution means 280 executes the control start processing of the main board 200 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is turned off and restored. The main power cutoff processing executing means 282 executes an abnormality response process such as a power supply cutoff process on the main board 200 when a power supply abnormality such as a power supply cutoff occurs. The main error detecting means 284 executes an abnormality detection process on the main board 200. The control start processing, the abnormality response processing, and the abnormality detection processing of the main board 200 will be described later.

<Setting change means 286, setting confirmation means 287>
The setting changing means 286 executes a "setting changing process" for changing the game setting. When the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the setting changing state, the setting changing means 286 shifts to the above-mentioned setting changing state. When the setting change means 286 shifts to the setting change state, the setting display unit 173 displays the setting value stored in the setting memory. The setting changing means 286 changes the setting values displayed on the setting display unit 173 in order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → ... In response to the pressing of the setting change button 172. , The setting value stored in the setting memory is updated to the same value as the display of the setting display unit 173. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting changing means 286 ends the setting changing state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

The setting confirmation means 287 executes a "setting confirmation process" for confirming the game setting. When the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state and the RAM clear switch is not pressed and the power switch 150 is turned on, the setting confirmation means 287 shifts to the above-mentioned setting confirmation state. The setting confirmation means 287 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting value stored in the setting memory when the setting confirmation state is entered. Unlike the above-mentioned setting changing means 286, the setting checking means 287 does not change the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 even when the setting change button 172 is pressed, and updates the setting value stored in the setting memory. do not. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting confirmation means 287 ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

The set value data managed in the setting memory may not be the numerical values of "1" to "6" but may be the numerical values of "0" to "5" instead. In this case, the setting value "0" corresponds to the setting 1, the setting value "1" corresponds to the setting 2, the setting value "2" corresponds to the setting 3, and the setting value "3" corresponds to the setting 4. , The set value "4" may correspond to the setting 5, and the set value "5" may correspond to the setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the set value data, the RAM clear process is performed when the RAM is abnormal, and when the set value data is set to the initial value "0", the abnormality is not judged. Therefore, the RAM clear process at the time of abnormality Can be simplified. In addition, when executing some kind of lottery using the set value data, for example, when selecting a different table or data for each set value in the look-ahead processing, there is an advantage that the offset processing for the selection can be simplified. .. For example, when "1" to "6" are used as the set value data, additional processing such as decrementing the start address by -1 is required when using these values as they are as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, the numerical value of the set value data can be used as it is as the offset data. When the setting changing means 286 and the setting confirming means 287 use the numerical values of "0" to "5" as the setting value data, the numerical values of the setting value data may be displayed as they are on the setting display unit 173, or the setting may be performed. A numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the value data may be displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the latter case, since the numerical data of "0" to "5" is converted into the numerical values of the settings 1 to 6 in the game setting and displayed, the display can be easily understood by the administrator of the game machine.

<Command transmission means>
The command communication means 205 transmits the payout control command communication means 206 for transmitting the control command necessary for executing the payout or the like to the payout control board 155, and the sub-control for transmitting the control command necessary for executing the effect control or the like to the sub-board 300. Includes command transmitting means 207. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command instructing the payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening based on the determination of the winning ball to each winning opening by the winning ball determining means 201, and the main board 200. Send a command indicating the status of the error that occurred in. When the sub-control command transmission means 207 starts the symbol change, the sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits the determination result of the lottery corresponding to the symbol change to the effect determination means 303 together with the control command of the symbol change.

The sub-control command transmitting means 207 fluctuates at the timing when the first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 start and stop the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The start command and the fluctuation stop command are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 (sub-main). When the fluctuation start command is transmitted, a value indicating each of the winning / failing judgment result, the stop symbol, and the fluctuation pattern determined or determined as the final judgment and a value indicating whether the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery is performed are set. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation start command. When the variable stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the variable stop command. Further, the effect determining means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a variation stop command, and the like to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variation display of the decorative symbol by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) is synchronized, and the interlocking is maintained. Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the pre-determination result by the pre-determining means 235 to the effect determining means 303. After the pre-judgment result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, the winning openings (first start port 11, second start) corresponding to the pre-judgment result are started regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display corresponding to the lottery is started immediately. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the type information of the mouth 12), the information on the number of reserved pieces, the game state, etc., and is erased from the transmission buffer or overwritten later. As a result, the so-called "look-ahead" process is realized in which the sub-board 300 can presumably recognize the hit / fail result before the order of starting the symbol variation comes around based on the received prior determination result. The processing based on the prior determination information performed by the sub-board 300 will be described later. The sub-control command transmission means 207 is set by the information on the special game by the special game control means 260, the information on the small hit game by the small hit game control means 265, the lottery result information by the general drawing lottery means 213, and the setting changing means 286. The setting value information of the game setting is transmitted to the sub-board 300. Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 is transmitted to various controls on the main board 200 or to the main board 200, such as information on initial processing and information on errors by the main initial processing executing means 280 and the main error detecting means 284. Information about various signals and the like is appropriately transmitted to the sub-board 300.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub-board 300 includes a symbol mode determining means 301, a pattern storage means 302, an effect determining means 303, an effect controlling means 304, a timekeeping means 307, an effect setting means 308, a sub initial process executing means 360, and a sub power cut processing executing means 362. It includes a sub-error detecting means 364, a command receiving means 370, and a sub-side pre-determining means 371.

The pattern storage means 302 holds a plurality of effect patterns in which the effect image contents to be displayed on the effect display device 60 and the display process thereof are defined when the decorative symbol 61 fluctuates. The effect pattern includes a plurality of variation effect patterns in which the variation process from the start to the stop of the variation in the variation display of the decorative symbol 61 and the effect process are defined, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed separately and the degree of expectation for a big hit. It includes a plurality of notice effect patterns that suggest the height of the variable display before the stop of the variable display.

The command receiving means 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the sub-side pre-determining means 371 holds the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205. The effect determining means 303 includes a normal effect determining means 373 and a look-ahead effect determining means 374. The normal effect determining means 373 displays on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 according to the information of the determination result of the first winning / failing lottery or the determination result of the second winning / failing lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the speaker. The content of the effect to be output to the 108, the decorative lamp 111, etc. is determined. The effect determining means 303 determines the effect content according to the set value of the game setting transmitted from the command communication means 205. The look-ahead effect determining means 374 displays on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 according to the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and determines the effect content to be output to the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, and the like. .. The normal effect determining means 373 is determined by the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232, and is selected from a plurality of variation effect patterns corresponding to the variation patterns of the special symbol transmitted from the command communication means 205. One of them is selected and read from the pattern storage means 302. The normal effect determining means 373 sends the read information of the variable effect pattern to the effect control means 304. The normal effect determining means 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to in order to select a variable effect pattern. It should be noted that the fluctuation effect pattern may be determined by the normal effect determination means 373 with reference to the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the variation is combined with the content of the look-ahead effect by the look-ahead effect determination means 374. The production pattern may be determined. The look-ahead effect determining means 374 more accurately identifies the result of the present determination based on the preliminary determination result from the command communication means 205, the past preliminary determination result held on the sub-board 300, the game state information, and the like, and identifies the result. Based on the result, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect before the final determination, and the execution content. Specifically, the look-ahead effect determining means 374 determines whether the current game state is in the probability-variable game, and then shifts to the normal game state based on the pre-determination result before the pre-determination result received this time. Determine whether or not to do so. Based on the judgment result, the pass / fail result of the main judgment and the selected fluctuation pattern related to the pre-judgment result received this time are specified, and based on the specific result, whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed and the execution content of the look-ahead effect are determined. .. Since there are many parts in the effect determining means 303 in which the normal effect determining means 373 and the look-ahead effect determining means 374 cooperate with each other, the effect determining means 303 will be described as a comprehensive effect determining means 303 except for a particularly necessary part.

In each variation effect pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determining means 303 selects a variation effect pattern of the effect image having the same variation time according to the variation pattern of the special symbol.

The symbol mode determining means 301 determines the combination and arrangement of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol 61 by the lottery determination result by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stop symbol of the special symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the decoration. It is decided according to the variation effect pattern of the symbol. The symbol mode determining means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of the stopped symbols to the effect control means 304. The symbol mode determining means 301 holds a symbol range table to be referred to for determining a stop symbol of a decorative symbol.

The stop symbol of the decorative symbol 61 is formed as a combination of three symbols, for example, when the hit / fail determination result by the first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 indicates a shift to a special game of 4R jackpot or 10R jackpot. Is selected as a specific combination, for example, a combination in which three symbols such as "777" and "111" are aligned. When the hit / fail judgment result is a 2R big hit or a small hit, a specific combination, for example, a predetermined combination such as "357" is selected, but the specific combination is not necessarily a combination of three symbols. It does not have to be. If the hit / fail judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, it is a combination in which the three symbols are not aligned, such as "312" and "946", and it is a specific combination selected for a 2R big hit or a small hit. The combination that does not apply is selected. If the hit / fail judgment result is not a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, and a variation pattern indicating a loss with reach is selected, a combination such as "191" or "727" in which only one symbol is not aligned. Select.

The variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol defines the variation display mode of the decorative symbol, that is, the effect process from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation. The variable effect pattern includes a pattern for displaying a normal out-of-order symbol, a pattern for displaying an out-of-order symbol through a reach state that would be a big hit if one more symbol is aligned, and a big hit symbol after the reach state. The pattern when doing is included. In particular, the pattern when going through the reach state includes a pattern having various fluctuation times, long and short. In each variation effect pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determining means 303 selects a variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol having the same variation time as the special symbol according to the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In the time saving state, when the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232 is a pattern for time saving, the effect determining means 303 is a variation in which the effect content for time saving is determined. Select a production pattern. The content of the effect for shortening the time is an effect of outputting a background image or sound that impresses the player in an advantageous state due to the shortened time or probability change.

The advance notice effect pattern is an effect pattern that temporarily displays an image, animation, video, or the like of a specific character or motif on the screen, an effect pattern that operates an accessory, or an effect pattern that outputs a specific sound. The effect of the advance notice effect pattern is executed in parallel with the symbol change, and it is suggested in advance that the symbol change is expected to stop in the jackpot mode. For example, there is a normal advance notice effect in which only one image of a character is displayed on the screen, and a group advance notice effect in which a group of a large number of characters is displayed so as to pass from one end to the other end of the screen. In addition, a step-up notice effect is further included in which the display process of the notice effect is divided into a plurality of stages, the number of stages to be displayed is variable, and the higher the number of stages, the higher the expectation for the big hit.

The notice effect pattern includes a pattern (notice after reach) in which the effect is executed at a timing after the display mode of the decorative symbol 61 is in the reach state to announce the final stop mode of the symbol, and the decorative symbol 61. There is a pattern (pre-reach notice) that simultaneously announces that the effect is executed at the timing when it is not stopped and the reach state is reached.

The effect determining means 303 should determine whether or not to display the advance notice effect on the effect display device 60 according to the determination result of the winning / failing lottery or the advance determination result by a predetermined advance notice lottery, set the advance effect, and display the effect. Determine the notice production pattern. The effect determining means 303 holds a notice determination table to be referred to for determining whether or not to display the notice effect, and a notice type table to be referred to when selecting the type of the notice effect pattern. The notice determination table is set so that different columns are referred to depending on the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery or the preliminary judgment result, and if the winning / failing lottery is successful, the advance notice effect is displayed with a higher probability than in the case of losing. Therefore, the correspondence between the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery and whether or not to display the notice effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to suggest a high degree of expectation for a big hit by displaying the notice effect itself.

The effect control means 304 variably displays the effect image including the decorative symbol 61 on the effect display device 60 according to the selected variable effect pattern data. The effect control means 304 sets the reception of the variation start command of the decorative symbol 61 as a start condition for the variation display of the new decorative symbol. When it is determined by the effect determining means 303 that the advance notice effect is to be displayed, the effect control means 304 displays the advance notice effect according to the selected advance notice effect pattern on the effect display device 60 in a form of superimposing it on the effect of the symbol variation. Let me.

When the winning / failing lottery value of the second winning / failing lottery is stored, the effect control means 304 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery, and whether the winning / failing lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery is stored. Regardless of whether or not, the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning / failing lottery is started. As a result, when the lottery value is reserved for both the first winning / failing lottery and the second winning / failing lottery, the lottery value held in the second winning / failing lottery is preferentially read and the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed. .. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first winning / failing lottery is not read and the change of the decorative symbol does not start until the number of holdings in the second winning / failing lottery becomes 0. In this way, the effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to display the symbol variation effect including the variation display of the decorative symbol 61.

The effect control means 304 further controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111 and the operation of the movable accessory 66. The effect control means 304 includes an effect display control means 305, a voice control means 306, and a lamp control means 309. The effect display control means 305 controls the display on the effect display device 60, and the sound control means 306 controls the sound output from the speaker 108. The lamp control means 309 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111.

During the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, it is necessary to display an image indicating that the symbol is changing on the effect display device 60. Normally, a normal size decorative symbol 61 having a certain size is variablely displayed, but in a manner that hinders the visibility of the variable display of the normal size decorative symbol 61, other than the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is the main production content. You may display a special effect to be performed. In this case, the player is presented with the fact that the symbol is changing by variablely displaying an alternative symbol which is a decorative symbol having a size smaller than the normal size decorative symbol. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative symbol, it means a normal size decorative symbol, but when distinguishing it from an alternative symbol, the normal size decorative symbol is also referred to as a "normal decorative symbol" or a "main decorative symbol".

The alternative symbol is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative symbol is impaired, for example, while the normal decorative symbol is hidden. The alternative symbol is a form of a decorative symbol for suggesting the result of a hit / fail judgment in a dramatic manner, has a simpler (in other words, simplified, simplified) display form than the normal decorative symbol, and is a normal decorative symbol. It is displayed in a simpler fluctuation process. The alternative symbol has an appearance display form corresponding to a portion indicating the symbol type of the ordinary decorative symbol, and has, for example, a display form representing a number, a character, or a symbol indicating the symbol type. Further, the alternative symbol is variablely displayed in a narrower area than the area where the decorative symbol is normally displayed in a variable manner, and is typically at a position where it is difficult to hinder the main effect by elements other than the symbol, for example, in the corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. It is displayed in a variable manner. The alternative symbol is usually displayed relatively smaller than the decorative symbol, but has a display form in which at least the symbol type can be visually identified. The alternative symbol may be a reduced version of the normal decorative symbol as it is, and may be the same as the normal decorative symbol except for the size.

The plurality of alternative symbols displayed in place of the plurality of normal decorative symbols suggests a high degree of expectation that the result of the winning / losing lottery will be in a state advantageous to the player depending on the combination of the stopping modes at the end of the fluctuation. For example, it is suggested that the plurality of alternative symbols have a high expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation by being in a reach state in which two symbol types out of the three alternative symbols are aligned. In addition, the left and right symbols that are in the reach state are specific types of symbols that suggest that the expectations are relatively high, such as "3" and "7", and the expectations such as "1" and "2" are high. A symbol of a type suggesting that it is relatively low may indicate a high or low degree of expectation of the reach state. It should be noted that the alternative symbol does not appear in a definite stop state in appearance, but in a temporary stop state in which minute shaking is maintained. After the temporary stop of the substitute symbol, the normal decorative symbol may be displayed instead of the substitute symbol, and the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in the fixed stop state. Further, the decorative symbol and the alternative symbol are not displayed exclusively, but the display periods may overlap. Furthermore, at the time of a predetermined effect in which the visibility of the normal decorative symbol is impaired, the variation display of the normal decorative symbol may be continued and the variation of the alternative symbol may be displayed. Unlike the alternative symbol, the special symbol is changing in an image as small as or smaller than the alternative symbol in a predetermined area of the effect display device 60 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. A simple symbol suggesting that there is may be displayed in a variable manner. The simple symbol may be composed of a variable display of three symbol combinations like a normal decorative symbol, a variable display of one symbol, or a simple symbol ("○", "×", etc.). May be configured to be sequentially switched. The simple symbol is not related to the variable display mode of the normal decorative symbol or the alternative symbol, but displays a certain fluctuation from the start to the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and is related to the stop display mode of the normal decorative symbol at the time of stop display. May be displayed. It should be noted that the simple symbol may be appropriately changed as long as it suggests that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and the result of the special symbol is at least notified, such as displaying a combination of two symbols. Further, the simple design may be referred to as a "sub-decorative design", a "sub-designation", a "mini-decorative design", a "mini-designation", or the like. Apart from the effect display device 60, a variable display of a decorative symbol called a fourth symbol, which indicates a display equivalent to a simple symbol depending on a light emitting mode such as an LED, may be used. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display during change of the special symbol, display of the result) when a problem occurs in the effect display device 60. As an example of the display mode of the fourth symbol, the LEDs light up in sequence of "white", "blue", "green", "yellow", "orange", and "red" (blinking including extinguishing is also possible). Depending on the type of special symbol, it may be displayed in a variable manner, or it may be indicated by blinking in a single color according to the type of the special symbol to indicate the variable display, and the emission color when the stop display is displayed may indicate the type of deviation or jackpot.

The timekeeping means 307 is a timekeeping circuit that outputs time information used for the game. The timekeeping means 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time from the time when the power is turned on with a counter and outputs it as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit having a built-in battery and capable of continuously measuring the date and time by the battery even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off or a power failure may occur may be used. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, there is a possibility that the time of each game console may differ slightly due to individual differences or time lag, whereas in the case of a timer circuit, the time difference between multiple game consoles as long as the power is turned on at the same time. Is unlikely to occur.

The effect determining means 303 executes a synchronized effect that starts at a predetermined timing triggered by the time information output by the time measuring means 307 indicating a predetermined time. The synchronized effect is an effect displayed on the effect display device 60 during the synchronized effect period, which is a period substantially asynchronous with the fluctuation period of the symbol variation and the game state. The synchronization effect period extends for several minutes, the length of which is longer than the symbol variation time for one time, and may include a plurality of symbol variation periods. The effect pattern of the synchronized effect is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and the effect pattern defines the reproduction of a predetermined music and video. A plurality of types of effect patterns for synchronized effects are prepared, and different types of effect patterns can be selected depending on the date and time such as month, date, day of the week, and time.

The entrainment effect is executed regardless of whether it is during a normal game or a special game. Here, "during a normal game" includes displaying a so-called standby demo screen. That is, in "normal game", (1) "normal game during variable display" in which the symbol is variablely displayed, and (2) "normal game during variable stop" in which neither the variable display of the symbol nor the standby demo screen is displayed. , (3) "Normal game while the standby demo screen is displayed", which is the display of the standby demo screen instead of the variable display of the symbol. The tuning effect can be executed during any of the periods (1) to (3), but in the cases of (2) and (3), the output mode for controlling the volume reduction and the brightness reduction in the tuning effect is (1). It can be different from the time of. In addition, while the standby demo screen is displayed, the player can input information about the mobile cooperation system described later by operating the effect button 109 or the cross key 110, and when the operation input is received, the video and audio of the synchronized effect are output. It is suppressed, and priority is given to screen display such as production customization by the mobile cooperation system.

The tuning effect is, for example, an effect of reproducing a performance or video of a predetermined song at a predetermined time (referred to as “synchronization effect start time”). The time that triggers the reproduction of the synchronized effect may be the time that is reached with a predetermined time interval from the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, or the time of every hour or half hour based on the standard time. It may be. Alternatively, a time that may vary depending on the date or day of the week may be set, and the interval may be different, such as first one hour later, then three hours later, instead of a fixed interval such as "every hour". The interval may vary depending on the date and day of the week. It may be a variable setting in which the time can be specified by the game clerk for each game store. However, it is set in advance so that the same synchronization effect is executed at least at the same time among a plurality of the same models installed in the same game store. For example, in the case of a specification that is triggered by a time that arrives at a predetermined time interval from the time when the power is turned on, a game store turns on a plurality of units at the same time. As a result, the same synchronization effect is simultaneously executed on the plurality of game consoles when the predetermined time is reached. As a result, the production is displayed at the same time as if multiple units are synchronized, and the same music and video are played at the same time, creating a synergistic and realistic feeling as if a live performance or movie was being screened on the spot. A directing effect can be obtained.

The synchronization effect function is also built into another game console of the same model, and multiple game consoles on the same game island are turned on at the same time by a game clerk every day. Then, the plurality of game consoles that are turned on at the same time all reach the synchronization production start time almost at the same time, and the synchronization production can be executed simultaneously at the same time. This is called a multiple-unit synchronous production. In that case, not only the video display is synchronized with multiple units, but also the sound effects and background music output are synchronized with multiple units, and the more units are synchronized, the more synergistic effect is obtained by executing the production all at once. Increase.

The effect setting means 308 stores the game history of the player. The game history includes a history of game results and a history of production results. The history of the game result is the result of the game that leads to the ball output that the player can obtain as a result of the game, such as the number of hit balls, the number of prize balls, the number of big hits, the number of probability changes, and the number of time reductions. The history of the production result is different from the profit in the game, and is recorded in order to obtain the profit such as the right to change the content and type of the production and the right to make it easier for a specific type of production to appear. It is information such as the score of. For example, in order to score the number of appearances of a predetermined effect, the result of a mini game, and the like and give it to the player, coded information indicating the score and the game history, for example, a two-dimensional code is displayed on the screen. When the player reads the two-dimensional code with the camera of his / her mobile terminal and decodes it, the score and game history information obtained by the decoding are stored in the player's mobile terminal. The cooperation system between the game machine and the player's mobile terminal via the two-dimensional code will be described later. The score here is necessary to expand the range of production customization described later, and the score reaches a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, every 100 points, etc.). It is a specification that the items that can be customized increase with the opportunity.

The effect setting means 308 stores the setting of which of a plurality of types of effect content options is selected as the effect customization based on the player's selection instruction and the game history. For example, as the effect patterns to be displayed during the special game, a plurality of types of effect patterns having different displayed motifs, characters, and songs are prepared in the pattern storage means 302, and the player is allowed to select which effect to display. I will do it. Alternatively, a plurality of types of motifs or character designs are prepared in the pattern storage means 302 as the design of the design included in the decorative design that changes the design, and the player is allowed to select which of the designs is to be displayed. In such a case, when the player accepts the operation of the effect button 109 or the cross key 110 while the standby demo screen is displayed and the effect pattern is selected through the operation, the effect setting means 308 selects the selected content. Remember. The effect determining means 303 selects the type of the effect pattern during the special game according to the settings stored by the effect setting means 308.

The sub-initial processing execution means 360 executes the control start processing of the sub-board 300 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is turned off and restored. The sub-power cutoff processing executing means 362 executes an abnormality response process such as a power supply cutoff process on the sub-board 300 when a power supply abnormality such as a power failure occurs. The sub-error detecting means 364 executes the abnormality detection process on the sub-board 300. When the sub-error detecting means 364 detects the power failure, the sub-power cut processing executing means 362 backs up the data in the RAM to the backup RAM as the power cut processing.

FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an outline of a mobile phone cooperation system. As a premise of the mobile cooperation system, the player registers a user by setting an account and a password in the game history server 358 provided with a dedicated site in advance on the mobile terminal 354. When the effect button 109 is pressed by the player at the start of the game, the effect display control means 305 displays the two-dimensional code 350, which encodes the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358, on the screen of the effect display device 60. The player is made to read it with the camera of the mobile terminal and access the dedicated site of the game history server 358. Character information (also called "password information") in which the player's identification information and the effect score history are encoded is transmitted from the dedicated site to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The effect display control means 305 displays the password information input screen on the effect display device 60, and causes the player to input the password information via a button operation such as a cross key 110. By decoding the input password information by the effect setting means 308 and registering it as the player's identification information and the effect score history, the player's previous game content and effect score state can be inherited. The input of the password information serves as an instruction to start recording the game history of the player and an instruction to start the effect customization for selecting various effect elements. After that, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, as the game or the production progresses, the points given by the effect setting means 308 to the player as a benefit for the effect are added as needed and accumulated as the effect score history, and the player. Can customize the effect at any time and select and set a favorite element as various effect elements. The score for the production is basically added for each symbol change, and the higher the production type with higher expectation for transition to the special game, the higher the score is given, and the higher the score is given even when the transition to the special game is performed.

As a production customization, the player uses a part of the accumulated points, and according to the number of points to be used, the color, background, shape, character, and the color, background, shape, character, which constitute the production content displayed on the production display device 60. You can change the production elements such as music to your favorite type. The effect setting means 308 receives an instruction to change the effect element via a button operation by the player, and changes various effect elements according to the instruction. As for the effect elements that can be customized, a plurality of types of items are prepared for each element, and different values are set as the number of points required for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated score reaches a predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or a chance to increase the number of customizable items is given. When the player operates a button as an instruction to end the game or the effect customization, the effect setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as a privilege on the effect and the effect score history, and controls the effect display. The means 305 displays on the effect display device 60. The player can read the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of his / her own mobile terminal and decode the read two-dimensional code 352 to acquire information and store it in the mobile terminal 354. Further, the information is transmitted from the mobile terminal 354 to the game history server 358 having a dedicated site via the network 356, and is managed in association with its own account information. In this way, information such as production benefits and production score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via a transmission means of displaying and reading the two-dimensional code 350, and is managed by the game history server 358. The contents of the game and the production can be taken over in the next game. In addition, by continuing the game for a long time, the number of symbol fluctuations and the number of productions increase, and the score can be obtained.

FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and the sub board 300. The main board 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291 and a main ROM 292. The main ROM 292 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling the overall game operation. The main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291 and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or data bus (not shown). The ball entry signal from each ball entry port, the payout signal from the payout control board 155, and the like are acquired by the main CPU 290 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as the winning port solenoid, the first special symbol display unit 41, and the second special symbol display unit 42 by various drive circuits (not shown). In addition, commands necessary for effect control are transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300 together with information such as a result of a winning / losing lottery, a result of determining a symbol, and a result of determining a variation pattern. A signal is transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 by one-way communication.

The instruction data transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 has a 2-byte configuration consisting of a combination of 1-byte instruction type data, so-called MODE data, and 1-byte instruction content data, so-called EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one command by transmitting the command type data and the command content data to the sub board 300 in association with each other. The instruction type data is a bit string indicating the instruction type, and a unique type code is assigned to each instruction type in advance at the development stage. The instruction content data is a bit string indicating the content of the instruction. The most significant bit of the instruction type data and the instruction content data is an identification bit indicating whether the instruction type data or the instruction content data is used. When the most significant bit is 1, it indicates that the instruction type data is the most significant bit. When the bit is 0, it indicates that it is instruction content data.

Since the communication from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is a specification in which 1 byte of data is transmitted for each data transmission, it is necessary to transmit 1 byte each twice in order to transmit 2 bytes of instruction data. .. In the first communication, the upper byte MODE data is transmitted, and in the second communication, the lower byte EVENT data is transmitted. Considering the possibility of communication failure due to the influence of noise or the like, the main board 200 continuously transmits the same data, and when the same data is read twice in succession by the sub board 300, the completion of transmission / reception of the data is confirmed. .. The main board 200 repeatedly transmits the same data until it is read two times in a row, and transmits the same data up to five times.

The sub-board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub CPU 310, a sub RAM 311, a sub ROM 312, and an effect control device 313. The sub ROM 312 is one of the data storage means for holding the sub control program including the effect pattern data in which the effect process is defined and the display pattern data in which the effect display process is defined. A sub control program including the effect pattern data, the display pattern data, and the voice pattern data is read from the sub ROM 312 into the sub RAM 311, and the effect control by the sub control program is executed by the sub CPU 310. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or data bus (not shown). Signals from an external device such as the effect button 109 are acquired by the sub CPU 310 via various interfaces (not shown). The sub CPU 310 drives an external device such as an effect display device 60, a speaker 108, a decorative lamp 111, and a movable accessory 66 by an effect control device 313, various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data, and displays and outputs the display. , Voice output, lamp lighting, and control of the production by the movement of the accessory. The sub CPU 310 transmits the display pattern data and the voice pattern data to the effect control device 313. In this embodiment, an example in which the sub-board 300 includes the effect control device 313 will be described, but the sub-board 300 and the effect control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a substrate and are separated and connected to each other. It may be formed as a separate substrate.

FIG. 14 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313. The effect control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, a display control circuit 326, and a voice control circuit 314. The data ROM 324 is one of data storage means for holding material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display and audio data used for audio output in a data-compressed state. The effect image data is an image used for variable display or effect display as an effect object showing the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery, for example, a sprite image of a decorative pattern used for changing a decorative pattern, a sprite image used for a notice effect, and various effects. It is a material image such as a moving image to be used. The motion data is data in which the motion is defined when the motion is added to the images used for various effects at a predetermined timing. The voice data is voice data such as music, background sounds, sound effects, and character lines that are output during the production.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect image data and motion data specified in the display pattern data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and the effect display using the effect image data and motion data. Is executed by the control CPU 320. As a result, the control CPU 320 transmits commands, effect image data, and motion data related to the effect display to the display control circuit 326, and the display control circuit 326 controls the display. Similarly, commands and voice data related to voice output are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the voice control circuit 314, and voice output control is performed by the voice control circuit 314.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332, a drawing memory 334, a drawing circuit 336, a frame buffer 338, and a display circuit 340, each of which is connected via the bus 330. For convenience, the bus 330 in this figure comprehensively shows buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus.

The effect image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334, and the compressed data among the data is decoded by the decoder 332. The drawing memory 334 is used as a work area when decoding the effect image data or motion data by the decoder 332, or as a work area when executing drawing processing or image processing by the drawing circuit 336. VRAM (VideoRAM) ).

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to execute commands sent from the control CPU 320 in order to generate a display image, and the generated display image is used as a frame of a moving image as a frame buffer. Store in 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM as a buffer memory for temporarily storing frames of moving images to be output to the effect display device 60.

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the effect display device 60 in the form of video signals in the order in which they are stored. The frame buffer 338 has, for example, a memory area for two frames, and while the display circuit 340 outputs a display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 336 generates the next display image. Store in the memory area for another frame.

The data ROM 324 holds "detailed display pattern data" in which the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326 is defined. At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310 can be referred to as "summary display pattern data" in which the outline of the effect display process is defined. For example, the outline display pattern data defines a rough flow of a series of effect display processes such as fluctuation start and fluctuation stop timings of decorative symbols, playback order of a plurality of moving images, and playback start and stop timings. .. On the other hand, the detailed display pattern data includes detailed display control such as the display order of sprite images for realizing variable display of decorative patterns and the display processing order for each frame for displaying moving images based on motion data. The process is defined.

When the effect control device 313 performs display control based on the "rough display pattern data" sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect control device 313 reads the "detailed display pattern data" required for the processing from the data ROM 324 and uses both display pattern data. And execute the display process. Therefore, it can be said that the effect control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display putter data including the "summary display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data". Therefore, in the present specification, unless explicitly mentioned, the "rough display pattern data" stored in the sub ROM 312 and the "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished, and simply "display pattern data". ". For example, when the effect control means performs a specific process based on the display pattern data held in the data storage means, the display pattern data includes "summary display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". .. In the modified example, the display pattern data is not divided into "summary display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data", and even if the display pattern data that serves as both is held in the sub ROM 312 or the data ROM 324. Good.

In this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, and a display control circuit 326. In the modification, the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, the data ROM 324, and the display control circuit 326 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the process that is supposed to be executed by the display control circuit 326 may be executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. For example, the control CPU 320 included in the effect control device 313 may execute a process that is executed by the decoder 332, the drawing circuit 336, and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326. Further, the control RAM 322 included in the effect control device 313 may also function as the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338. In addition, the effect control device 313 may have a hardware configuration in which the display control circuit 326 is not included. In this case, the process to be executed by the display control circuit 326 is executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. May be done.

Further, in this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300 includes a configuration in which the effect control device 313 is included in addition to the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 and the sub ROM 312. In the modified example, the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, the ROM 312, and the effect control device 313 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the process that is supposed to be executed by the effect control device 313 may be executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 or the sub ROM 312. For example, the sub CPU 310 may execute the processing of the control CPU 320, the sub RAM 311 may also have the function of the control RAM 322, and the sub ROM 312 may also have the function of the data ROM 324. In addition, the sub-board 300 may have a hardware configuration in which the effect control device 313 is not included. In this case, the process to be executed by the effect control device 313 is executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 or the sub ROM 312. You may.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a control start process of the main board 200 in the pachinko gaming machine. This control start processing is executed by the main initial processing execution means 280, and will be described below as being executed by the main CPU 290 that functions as the main initial processing execution means 280. When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets the stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes initial hardware-related settings such as the setting of the internal registers of the main CPU 290. (S104).

The main CPU 290 confirms the operating state of the setting key, and if the setting key is in the ON state (Y in S105), confirms the operating state of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (Y in S122), the setting change process is executed (S124). On the other hand, if the RAM clear is OFF (N in S122), the setting confirmation process is executed (S126). If the setting key is in the OFF state in S105 (N in S105), the processes of S122 to S126 are skipped.

Subsequently, the power off / return process or the initialization process of the main RAM 291 is executed according to the operation state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power off information flag, and the state of the data stored in the main RAM 291. Specifically, if the RAM clear switch is not turned on and both the value of the power off information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the process at the time of power off / recovery is executed. To do. In other cases, that is, even when the RAM clear switch is turned on or the RAM clear switch is not turned on, either the power failure information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is normal. If not, the initialization process of the main RAM 291 is executed.

The main CPU 290 confirms the operating state of the RAM clear switch, and when the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). When the RAM clear switch is not turned on (N in S106), the main CPU 290 confirms the value of the power off information flag (S108). If the value of the power off information flag does not match the power off normal data (N in S108), the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the value of the power off information flag matches the power off normal data (Y in S108), the data stored in the main RAM 291 is inspected (S110). As will be described later, if the processing is normally completed when the power is turned off last time, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291. Therefore, the main CPU 290 uses the checksum. Check the data in the main RAM 291. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal (N in S112), the data in the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y in S112), the process for returning to the state before the power is turned off is executed (S114).

In the power-off recovery process (S114), the power-on normal data indicating that the power-on was normally turned on is stored in the power-off information flag, and the initial setting of various errors and the initial setting of communication with the payout control board 155 are executed. To do. Next, the untransmitted command request before the power is turned off is cleared, and the command transmission of various information indicating the game state is requested. Subsequently, an effect command corresponding to the number of pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Subsequently, the open / closed state of the second starting port 12 and the large winning opening 20 is returned to the state before the power was cut off. Subsequently, a process for notifying the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared by 0, the initial setting of the main RAM 291 and the initialization of the effect display are executed. In the initialization process of S116, the set value stored in the setting memory of the setting change device 170 is not cleared, and the set value set in the setting change process of S124 is retained as it is.

When the power off / returning process (S114) or the RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to activate the interrupt process described later, and the operation of the interrupt timer is started (S118). As a result, after that, a timer interrupt is generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt process described later is executed. Subsequently, the main CPU 290 executes the main process for managing the game machine (S120).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process of S124 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the set value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the set memory value is not normal (N in S132), the set value is initialized to the initial value (S134). When "1" to "6" are used as the set value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the set memory value is normal (Y in S132), the process in S134 is skipped. Subsequently, the state shifts to the setting change state (S136), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S138). If there is a change operation by the setting change button 172 (Y in S140), the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is updated and the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated (S142). If there is no change operation (N in S140), the process in S142 is skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N in S144), the processes of S138 to S142 are repeated. When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the original state and turned off (Y in S144), the setting display unit 173 is hidden so that the set value cannot be visually recognized (S146), and the setting value is returned.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the set value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the set memory value is not normal (N in S152), the set value is initialized to the initial value (S154). If the set memory value is normal (Y in S152), the process in S154 is skipped. The state shifts to the setting confirmation state (S156), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N in S160), the process of S158 is repeated to continue displaying the set value, and if the setting key is turned OFF (Y in S160), the setting display unit 173 is hidden. The set value is made invisible (S162) and returned.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the main process of S120 in FIG. The main CPU 290 temporarily prohibits timer interruption (S200), starts the operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors the power failure (S204). When a drop in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158 is detected in a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown), the power supply disconnection storage is executed by inputting an unconditional interruption request signal from the power supply voltage monitoring circuit to the main CPU 290. In the process, the power off confirmation data is stored in the power off confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power-off confirmation flag (S204), and if the value of the power-off confirmation flag matches the power-off confirmation data (Y in S206), executes the process for power-off. Therefore, proceed to S212. If the value of the power off confirmation flag does not match the power off confirmation data (N in S206), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. The initial value random number update process is executed (S208), the timer interrupt is permitted (S210), and the process returns to S200. After that, S200 to S210 are repeated. When the timer interrupt occurs while the timer interrupt is prohibited (S202 to S208), the interrupt process described later is executed after the timer interrupt is permitted in S210.

When a power failure is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and confirms the content of the power failure information flag (S214). If the content of the power-off information flag does not match the power-on normal data (N in S214), it is determined that the power-on data has not been saved normally, and the power-off error data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S216), proceed to S222. If the content of the power-off information flag matches the power-on normal data (Y in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on is normally saved, and the power-off normal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S218). Subsequently, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 in order to inspect the backed up data in the main RAM 291 at the next power-on (S220). Subsequently, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and a loop is performed until the power is turned off. The above-mentioned processing when the power is turned off is executed by the main power cut processing execution means 282 realized by the main CPU 290.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the details of the interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes the interrupt process. First, the interrupt operation condition is set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Next, in order to manage the game machine, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312). , 2nd start port valid period setting process (S314), prize monitoring process (S316), prize ball control process (S318), normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), normal symbol control process (S322), normal symbol variation start Monitoring process (S324), start port monitoring control process (S326), special symbol control process (S328), special electric accessory control process (S330), large winning opening validity period setting process (S332), special symbol change start monitoring control Processing (S334), abnormality detection processing (S336), ball entry passage time abnormality detection processing (S338), game status display processing (S340), handle status signal inspection processing (S342), LED output processing (S344), launch control signal Output processing (S346), test signal output processing (S348), solenoid output processing (S350), effect control command transmission processing (S352), and external information output processing (S354) are executed in order, and the next timer interrupt is permitted. (S356) and return.

In the input process (S304), the data of the input port of the switch mounted on the game board surface, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the door / frame opening signal, the magnetic detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the touch state signal is monitored. , Data indicating the input state is created and stored in the main RAM 291. The data indicating this input state are level data (input port data at the time of this interruption) and rising data or falling data (input port data at the time of this interruption and data at the time of the previous interruption). Data indicating a switch in which switching was observed by comparing the data of the input port with an exclusive logical sum).

In the various random number update processes (S306), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291 and stored by incrementing the value when the value is less than the predetermined maximum value, and 0 is stored when the value is equal to or more than the predetermined maximum value. Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291 and the subtraction result is stored when the result of subtracting the predetermined value from the value is 0 or more, and the predetermined maximum value is stored when the result is less than 0. As a result, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated every time the timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random number per normal symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated. The value, maximum value, and initial value of each random number are read from the main RAM 291 and the value of the random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the maximum value, the random number value is set to 0. If the incremented result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291 and the initial value is updated. As a result, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated every time the timer interrupt occurs, and when the random number value returns to the initial value, that is, the range of random numbers is cycled. Then, the initial value is newly set and a random number is generated.

In the initial value random number update process (S310), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. The initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table of the main RAM 291 and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the upper limit, the value of the initial random number is set to 0. The same process is executed in the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120).

In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of the timers for various controls are read from the main RAM 291 according to the table, and when the timer values are other than 0, the values are sequentially decremented and stored. If the value of the timer is 0, the timer is not updated.

In the second starting port valid period setting process (S314), the valid period of the second starting port 12 is set. At the second starting port 12, the prize ball is paid out by entering the game ball and the lottery related to the second special symbol is executed, and the prize ball is paid out even if the game ball enters and the second special An invalid period is set in which the lottery related to the symbol is not executed. As will be described later, in the start port monitoring control process (S326), the monitoring process for winning the second start port is not executed during the invalid period of the second start port 12, so that the game ball enters the second start port 12. Even if the prize balls are paid out and the lottery related to the second special symbol is not executed. The same applies to the case where the valid period and the invalid period are set in the first starting port 11, the large winning opening 20, the first operating port 31, the second operating port 32, the general winning opening 33, and the like. When the state of the normal symbol is "normal electric accessory is in operation", data indicating that the second start port 12 is in the valid period is stored in the second start port valid period flag. If the state of the normal symbol is not "normal electric accessory is operating" and the value of the second start port effective extension timer is not 0, the second start port 12 is the valid period in the second start port valid period flag. If the value of the second start port valid extension timer is 0, the data indicating that the second start port is in the invalid period is stored in the second start port valid period flag.

In the prize monitoring process (S316), the passage of the game ball through the switch is inspected, and when the game ball passes through the switch, the switch has no invalid period or is currently in the valid period, and the prize ball is paid out. If so, update the winning counter. It also requests the creation of a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 and the transmission of commands.

In the prize ball control process (S318), monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 155, command transmission request to the payout control board 155, command transmission to the payout control board 155, and inspection of the received data from the payout control board 155. Are executed in order.

In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the first operation port 31 and the second operation port 32 of the game ball is monitored, and it is determined that the game ball has passed the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. When this is done, if the number of holdings of the normal symbol fluctuation is less than the upper limit of 4, the number of holdings of the normal symbol is updated and the random number related to the normal symbol is stored in the main RAM 291.

In the normal symbol control process (S322), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol is being controlled, the process related to the normal symbol display unit 45 or the normal electric accessory 90 is executed. When the state of the normal symbol is "normal symbol changing", the normal symbol changing processing is executed, and when "normal symbol stop symbol is being displayed", the normal symbol stop symbol display processing is executed and "normal electric" is executed. If "the accessory is in operation", the normal electric accessory operation end demo is executed, and if "the ordinary electric accessory operation end demo is in progress", the normal electric accessory operation end demo process is executed. In the normal symbol change processing, after changing the normal symbol, the fluctuation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has ended, the fluctuation stop setting of the normal symbol is executed and the state of the normal symbol is changed to ". Set to "Normal symbol stop symbol display". In the process of displaying the normal symbol stop symbol, the stop symbol display time of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the normal symbol has ended, the operation end setting of the normal symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a hit, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal electric accessory is in operation", the operating state of the normal electric accessory opening extension function at the start of operation of the normal electric accessory is saved, and the operation of the normal electric accessory is started. The operation setting of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 corresponding to the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory opening extension function at the time is executed. In the case of off, the state of the normal symbol is set to "waiting for normal symbol change". When the winning number of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the game ball is monitored in the processing during operation of the ordinary electric accessory 90, and it is determined that the number of winnings of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has reached the maximum number of winnings. Executes the operation end setting of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the setting of the effective extension time of the second start port. If it is determined that the number of winnings in the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has not reached the maximum number of winnings, the opening / closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and the ordinary electric accessory 90 is used. If it is determined that the opening / closing of the entrance of the winning opening related to the above is completed and the opening of the entrance of the normal electric accessory 90 is completed, the operation end setting of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the second starting port are valid. Execute the extension time setting. If it is determined that the opening / closing time of the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not over, the opening / closing of the entrance of the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not set. In the process during the demonstration of the end of operation of the normal electric accessory, the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and when it is determined that the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is over, the state of the normal symbol is changed to "normal symbol". Set to "Waiting for fluctuation".

In the normal symbol change start monitoring process (S324), when the state of the normal symbol is monitored and "waiting for normal symbol change" and the value of the number of balls on hold for normal symbol operation is other than 0, the change of the normal symbol To start. When it is determined to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the number of balls on hold for normal symbol operation is decremented, and the hit judgment, the determination of the stop symbol, the setting of the fluctuation pattern number of the normal symbol, and the setting of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are executed. .. After that, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal symbol changing", and the area of the main RAM 291 used for the state setting of the normal symbol, the hit determination, and the fluctuation pattern determination is cleared.

In the start port monitoring control process (S326), the first start port 11 winning and the second starting port 12 winning of the game ball are monitored. If the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is less than 4, the built-in random number is acquired, and the value obtained by adding the value of the soft random number per special symbol to the acquired built-in random number is added. It is stored in the buffer as a random number per special symbol used in the jackpot judgment. In addition, as random numbers related to special symbols, symbol random numbers and variable pattern random numbers are acquired and stored. When the hold of the second special symbol is prioritized over the hold of the first special symbol, only the update of the hold related to the prize is executed, but when the hold order of the special symbol is the winning order, the hold is executed. In addition to updating the hold related to the winning, the total number of holdings is updated and the winning order is stored. Next, in order to request a notice effect command corresponding to the random number memorized at the start opening winning, if the state of the game machine is confirmed and it is judged that the command transmission period is reached, a hit notice effect request, a hit symbol notice effect request, a pattern notice Execute the production requests in order. Here, when (1) waiting for a hit and the random number related to the first special symbol is stored while the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is not operating, (2) waiting for a hit and the normal symbol When the random number related to the second special symbol is stored while the probability fluctuation function is not operating, or (3) when the random number related to the second special symbol is stored during the big hit or the small hit. , Judge that it is the command transmission period. Next, a production command corresponding to the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol has been updated. As described above, in the look-ahead, four pieces of the pre-judgment information (pre-hit / fail judgment information, pre-symbol judgment information, pre-pattern judgment information) and the number of reserved balls are transmitted to the sub-board 300 as a set. In the above example, the main CPU 290 controls the transmission of the command for the pre-judgment process, but in another example, when there is a ball entering the start port, the command is uniformly transmitted and can be read ahead. The sub CPU 310 may perform various status determinations such as whether or not it is a period. Next, the value of the second starting port validity period flag is inspected, and if the value of the second starting port validity period flag is data indicating that the second starting port 12 is the valid period, the first starting port winning prize is awarded. As in the case, the monitoring process of the second start opening winning is executed. When the value of the second starting port valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting port 12 is in the invalid period, the monitoring process of the second starting port winning is not executed. If the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of reserved balls is 0, the number of reserved balls is once changed from 0 to 1, and then the control process related to the start of fluctuation described later is executed. ..

In the special symbol control process (S328), the hit waiting state is inspected, and when the special electric accessory is in operation, that is, during a big hit or a small hit, the special symbol control process is terminated. When the special electric accessory is not operating, the state of the special symbol is inspected, and if it is "waiting for special symbol change", the special symbol control general-purpose processing is terminated, and if it is "start of change", the special symbol change. The start process is executed, and if "special symbol is changing", the special symbol changing process is executed, and if "special symbol stop symbol is being displayed", the special symbol stop symbol displaying process is executed. In the special symbol variation start process, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is acquired based on the variation pattern random number, the variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined, and the sub-board 300 is started to display the effect. Request commands for additional symbol information, variation pattern, and character information, set the state of the special symbol to "special symbol variation in progress", and clear the variation pattern determination area used to determine the special symbol variation pattern with 0. .. In the process during special symbol change, after changing the special symbol, the fluctuation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special symbol has ended, the change stop setting of the special symbol is set and the state of the special symbol is changed to "special". Set to "Stop symbol display". In the process of displaying the special symbol stop symbol, the stop symbol display time of the special symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the special symbol has ended, the operation end setting of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a big hit, in order to end the operation of the special symbol, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for special symbol change", the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated is set, and the probability of the special symbol is set. Demonstration function, special symbol fluctuation time shortening function, normal symbol probability fluctuation function, normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function, and normal electric accessory opening extension function are disabled, and the state of the game machine is prepared to open the winning opening. Set in, set the hit start demo display time, command request for the hit start demo effect, and command request for the launch position specification effect (command request to execute an effect that suggests the recommended launch position such as "right-handed") To execute. When the result of the hit judgment is a small hit, the operation end judgment of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol and the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is performed, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated, the command request of the game state is performed, and the special symbol is performed. In order to end the operation of, set the state of the special symbol to "waiting for special symbol change", set the state of the game machine during the small hit start demo, set the hit start demo display time, and set the hit start demo effect. Executes a command request and a command request for a firing position designation effect. If the result of the hit judgment is incorrect, the operation end judgment of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol and the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is performed, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated, the command request of the game state is performed, and the special symbol is displayed. In order to end the operation, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for special symbol change", and the command request for the firing position designation effect is executed.

In the special electric accessory control process (S330), in order to execute the process related to the special electric accessory, the operating state of the condition device and the special electric accessory is inspected, and the condition device is operating or the special electric accessory is operating. If it is determined, the process related to the special electric accessory is executed. Depending on the operating state of the special electric accessory, the processing during preparation for opening the large winning opening, the processing during operation of the special electric accessory, the processing during closing of the large winning opening, the processing during the big hit end demonstration, the processing during the small hit start demonstration, the small hit special electric Execute processing during operation, processing during closing of the small hit big winning opening, and processing during demonstration of the end of small hit.

In the large winning opening valid period setting process (S332), the result of the valid period determination of the large winning opening 20 is saved. The mouth invalid period data is stored, and if it is other than 0, the big prize opening validity period data is stored in the big winning opening validity period flag.

In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334), the operating state of the special symbol is monitored, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a state where the variation can be started. When the digestion order of the reserved balls of the special symbol is the priority digestion of the second special symbol, (1) it is not in the big hit or the small hit, (2) the first special symbol is waiting for fluctuation, (3) ) When the second special symbol is waiting for change and (4) the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol is other than 0, the special symbol can start changing. Is determined. When the order of digestion of the reserved balls of the special symbol is the winning order, in addition to the above (1) to (3), (5) the total number of reserved balls of the special symbol is other than 0, (6) When all of the determinations, that is, the order of digestion, that is, the order of winning, are satisfied, it is determined that the special symbol can start to change.

When it is determined that the special symbol is in a state where it can start changing, the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is subtracted, and an effect command corresponding to the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has been updated.

Next, the hit determination of the special symbol is executed. In the hit determination, the random number per special symbol determines whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, the design is decided. In the determination of the symbol, if the hit judgment is a big hit, the big hit symbol is determined based on the special symbol hit symbol random number, if it is a small hit, the small hit symbol is determined, and if it is a miss, the miss symbol is lost. Is determined.

When the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the operation content of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is determined based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of the hit symbol determined in the symbol determination process, and the special symbol Set the game state after the big hit, such as the operation content of the fluctuation time shortening function and the easy winning state of the normal symbol. Next, the settings during the big hit, such as the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously and the contents of the opening time of the big winning opening, are executed. Subsequently, the content of the variation pattern selection state is set by selecting the variation pattern table to be referred to after the end of the big hit based on the result of the hit determination and the operating state of the probability variation function of the normal symbol. Next, the start demo time and the end demo time are set with reference to the table selected based on the value of the group determination number indicating the game state and the type of the winning symbol. Subsequently, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start".

If the result of the hit judgment is a small hit, the content of the fluctuation pattern selection state is set, the start demo time and the end demo time are set by selecting the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the small hit ends, and the hit The area of the main RAM 291 used for the determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start". If the result of the hit determination is incorrect, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start".

In the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 inspects the magnetic detection signal, the short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the opening signal of the door / frame, and the error state changes. If there is, the error state is stored, and the sub-board 300 is requested to display the error state effect of the game machine. At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the error state storage and the error state effect display request are not executed.

In the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 monitors the continuous on time of each switch level in order to detect the ball entry passage time abnormality, and continuously on time ( For example, if it is determined that the value of the counter that increments for each interrupt when the switch is on) is an abnormal value, the setting of the ball entry passage time error, the command transmission request, and the security output to the external information output terminal 160 Create output requests in order. At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the abnormality of the ball entry transit time. If it is determined that the continuous on-time is not abnormal, the security output request is not created.

In the game state display process (S340), the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated, the error state, the number of balls on hold for normal symbol operation, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol are requested to be displayed. Create data.

In the steering wheel status signal inspection process (S342), in order to monitor the touch status of the steering wheel, the steering wheel status is inspected, and if it is determined that the steering wheel status has changed as a result of the inspection, the steering wheel status monitoring timer is subtracted and the steering wheel status is changed. Update, set the steering wheel status monitoring timer, and execute the command transmission request for steering wheel status production. If it is determined as a result of the inspection that there is no change in the handle status, the handle status monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the value of the handle status monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being subtracted, and the subsequent processing is not executed.

In the LED output processing (S344), the display of the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol, the display of the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol, the display of the number of balls on hold for operation of the normal symbol, the display of the game state, and the special electric accessory are continuous. Initialize the display to display the number of times the LED is activated, the operating status of the special electric accessory when the continuous operating device is not operating, the striking display, the error display, and the prize ball ratio display. , Acquire and output display data in order.

In the launch control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal for prohibiting / permitting the launch of the game ball, the setting of the prohibition / permit for launching corresponding to the communication status with the payout control board 155 and the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality, and After acquiring the firing prohibition / permission data, the firing prohibition / permission signal is output.

In the test signal output process (S348), a signal to be output to the test apparatus is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output processing (S350), in order to output the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 and the large winning opening solenoid 92, the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 is acquired, and the output data of the large winning opening solenoid 92 Acquire and output data. The operation flag and operation timer of each solenoid are acquired, and the output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operation flag and solenoid operation timer is acquired. Then, the solenoid operation timer is updated and the output data is output to the solenoid output port.

In the effect control command transmission process (S352), the presence or absence of a transmission request for the command to be transmitted to the sub-board 300 is inspected, and if it is determined that there is a transmission request, the requested command data is acquired and the command buffer used is set to 0. Clear, acquire MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, output MODE data, retain MODE data, acquire EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, and output EVENT data in this order.

In the external information output process (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

The random numbers used in the operation process of the main board 200 described above will be described in more detail. The random numbers used in the main board 200 mainly include a random number per ordinary symbol and a random number per fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol as random numbers related to the ordinary symbol, and a random number per special symbol (hard random number) as a random number related to the special symbol. , There are soft random numbers per special symbol, symbol random numbers per special symbol, and variable pattern random numbers. In addition, as random numbers for giving initial values of normal symbol per random number, special symbol per symbol random number, and special symbol per soft random number, which are initial value update type random numbers, normal symbol per initial value random number and special symbol per symbol initial value There are random numbers and soft initial value random numbers per special symbol.

The random number per normal symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored at a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. The random number per normal symbol is the number of pending changes in the normal symbol when it is determined in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process that the game ball has passed through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. When is less than 4, which is the upper limit value, is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol random number is used for hit determination and determination of the stop symbol when it is determined in the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324) to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol.

The normal symbol variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 232, for example, is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number is reserved for normal symbol fluctuation when it is determined in the interrupt processing normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32. When the number is less than the upper limit value of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number is used to determine the normal symbol fluctuation pattern when it is determined in the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324) that the normal symbol fluctuation is to be started.

The random number per special symbol is obtained when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process. , The values of the built-in random number and the soft random number per special symbol are acquired, and both are added to generate the value, which is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The random number per special symbol is used to execute the big hit determination and the small hit determination in the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The soft random number per special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored at a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. The soft random number per special symbol is the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). It is obtained from the predetermined position of, and is used to generate a random number per special symbol as described above.

The symbol random number per special symbol takes a value of 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 7), is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is set at a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. It is stored. The symbol random number per special symbol is the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). Is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The special symbol per symbol random number is used to determine the jackpot symbol when the hit determination is a jackpot in the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 8), is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The variation pattern random number is determined by the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). Obtained from the position and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The variation pattern random number is used to determine the special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

The initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are the same range as the random number per normal symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol, respectively. It is updated in the initial value random number update process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the initial value random number update process (S310) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The initial value random number per ordinary symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are the random number per ordinary symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the special random number per initial value update type random number update process (S308). It is used as the initial value of each random number when updating the soft random number per symbol.

Since the interrupt process is executed at regular time intervals by timer interrupt, various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update processes (S308) included in the interrupt process are also executed at regular time intervals. To. That is, the normal symbol per random number, the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the special symbol per random number, the special symbol per soft random number, the special symbol per symbol random number, and the variation pattern random number are updated at regular intervals. On the other hand, in the main process (S120), the time from the end of the interrupt process to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt, that is, the time required for the interrupt process from the fixed time measured by the timer. Repeated for the reduced time. Since the time required for the interrupt process differs depending on the game state and the like, the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) includes various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update process (S308). ), It is not executed at regular intervals. As a result, the initial value random number acquired when the initial value is set in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) can be made random each time.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a control start process of the sub-board 300 in the pachinko gaming machine. This control start processing is executed by the sub-initial processing execution means 360, and will be described below as being executed by the sub CPU 310 that functions as the sub-initial processing execution means 360. When the control of the sub-board 300 is started, the sub CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), and sets registers and initializes ports of the sub CPU 310. Perform the initial settings related to the hardware (S504). The control program is read from the sub ROM 312 and placed in the sub RAM 311. Of the various variables in the control program, the initial value is set for the variable having the initial value, and the zero clear data is set for the variable without the initial value. As a result, the sub-RAM 311 is initialized (S506). The interrupt process on the sub-board 300 includes a process when the power is turned on and a reset process when various abnormalities occur when the watchdog function is enabled, as interrupt processes that are executed with the highest priority. Next, as an interrupt process of priority level 7 having a high execution priority, there is a command process received from the main board 200, and as an interrupt process of priority level 3 having the next highest priority, CPU runaway detection by the watchdog timer. There is a time reset process. The next priority interrupt process for priority level 2 includes processing related to commands sent and received to and from the control CPU 320, and the lowest priority level 1 interrupt process is communication processing with the real-time clock. There are various device control processes such as lamps, solenoids, and motors. If interrupts related to the above various processes occur at the same time, the interrupts set in advance for each interrupt type are executed with priority. The processes shown in this figure include the highest priority level interrupt, the process at power startup, the reset process when various abnormalities occur, and the priority level 3 interrupt, the reset process when CPU runaway is detected. Including.

Interrupts (priority level 7) other than commands received from the main board 200 are prohibited (S510), and various error information used in the model is set from all the error information stored in advance for all models (S512). .. All the lamps such as the decorative lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the operation of the watchdog timer is started (S516), and the main process is executed (S518). Normally, the main process of S518 does not return to the main flow, but when it returns, it shifts to sleep (low power consumption mode) (S520).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the main process of S518 in FIG. 20 in detail. In order to check in the main process of this figure whether the control program arranged in the sub RAM 311 is correctly arranged in S506 of FIG. 20, the start address for starting the check is acquired (S530), and in the subsequent processes. All interrupts are allowed (S532), and device initialization operations such as motors and solenoids are executed (S534).

If the setting is to use the watchdog timer, clear the watchdog timer (S536), update the counter of the decorative symbol so that the combination of the decorative symbols is a random combination (S540), and input the input port of the sub CPU 310. Is monitored (S542). Since S540 is a process in a method of determining the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol using a counter, in the case of a method of determining the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol using a lottery sheet incorporating all the symbol combinations that are the out-of-order symbols Does not execute the processing of S540. The process of determining the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol using the lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating a stop symbol of the special symbol is received from the main board 200 as described later in S552. The sub CPU 310, which functions as the sub-error detecting means 364, monitors the error state, notifies the error when various errors are detected (S544), and executes a process according to the input state of the effect button 109 (S546). The advance notice lottery is executed (S548). In the advance notice lottery in S548, since the command of the advance notice effect to appear immediately after the start of the symbol change is transmitted to the effect control device 313 as soon as possible, the lottery process is not processed in one loop but a plurality of times. It is divided into loops, and the notice effect that appears immediately after the start of the symbol change is drawn in the previous loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, lamp, motor, or solenoid, that operation is executed (S550), the command saved in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if immediately after the command analysis, the process proceeds to S536. Return (Y in S554), if not immediately after command analysis (N in S554), update the lottery software random number as a low-priority process that can be performed in free time (S556), and return to the process in S536. In S552, when the command to be analyzed shows the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol is determined by the process of S552, and when the command to be analyzed indicates the stop symbol of the special symbol, the lottery sheet is displayed. If it is a method of determining the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol by using it, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined by the process of S552.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a command is received from the main board 200. The main command received from the main board 200 is a priority level 7 interrupt command having the highest priority next to the reset interrupt and error interrupt. The data received from the main board 200 is read to the input port, and when the same data is read twice in a row, the data is confirmed as a new command (Y in S600), and the confirmed command is the first command. If it is (MODE data) (Y in S602), the first command is saved in the temporary storage area (S604). The hard random number is acquired for the subsequent processing (S606), and the original routine is returned. By acquiring the hard random number each time the main command is interrupted from the main board 200 in this way, the randomness of the value is enhanced without causing periodicity in the acquisition timing of the random number. If the data read in S600 does not match twice in a row (up to 5 times can be read), S602 is skipped and the original routine is returned (N in S600).

In S602, if the confirmed command is not the first command but the second command (N in S602), and if it can be confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y in S608), the command buffer (command data). The command write pointer, which is the read position in the ring buffer), is acquired (S610), and the first command and the second command are saved in the command buffer (S612). The command data stored in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. The command light pointer is updated (S614), the first command saved in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the original routine is returned. If the first command has not been received in S608, skip S610 and later (N in S608) and return to the original routine.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for transmitting a command related to the effect display from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and is generated in a cycle of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data for transmission in the buffer (Y in S622), the command data is read (S624) and transmitted to the control CPU 320 (S626). The command data is transmitted to the control CPU 320 up to three times at predetermined time intervals until the sub CPU 310 receives a command indicating that the command data has been normally received on the control CPU 320 side from the control CPU 320. After transmission, the buffer read address setting is updated (S628), and the original routine is returned. If there is no data for transmission in the buffer (N in S622), S624 and subsequent steps are skipped and the original routine is returned.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when the sub CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320. This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command received by the sub CPU 310 from the control CPU 320 is mainly a command indicating that the command transmitted from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been normally received. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), saved in the command buffer (S634), and the original routine is returned.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is for controlling a lamp such as a decorative lamp 111, controlling a solenoid or a motor for driving a movable accessory 66, and managing and controlling various timers, and is generated at a cycle of 1 ms. Since the interrupt is the lowest priority level 1, the interrupt of the priority level 2 or higher is permitted (S640), and the signal indicating the input from the effect button 109, the signal indicating the error detection, and the signal indicating the power failure , Processes the input / output of ports that input / output drive signals to controlled devices such as motors and solenoids (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating a power failure is input, the backup process is immediately started. A timer is used to update the data related to device control (S644), such as counting processing based on the control pattern of devices such as motors and solenoids, and on / off control of the buffer for writing data to the port in S642. Update (S646), update the timer for managing the input valid time of the effect button 109 (S648), and update the task control counter for lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 and runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. To create a 16 ms cycle (S650).

The minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of the image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and by setting an integral multiple thereof as the minimum unit of the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, it is possible to easily synchronize the lamp control and the image display control. Further, when counting a relatively long period such as an error notification for 30 seconds, if a count with a 10 interrupt (1 ms) cycle is used, the count value becomes longer than necessary, but 16 ms. The count value can be shortened by using the count value of the cycle.

The task control includes 16 types of tasks from processes 0 to 15, one of which is the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, and two tasks are the runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. The lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is executed once every 16 interrupts according to the count value of the task control counter to realize switching in a cycle of 16 ms. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to, for example, processes 0 and 8, and when the count values of the task control counters are 0 and 8, that is, once every 80 interrupts, the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 is monitored (S652). By doing so, monitoring is realized in a cycle of 8 ms.

It should be noted that the control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that is on / off inverted for each frame, and if this toggle signal does not change continuously at the same value for 1600 ms, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is out of control, and the sub CPU 310 Sends a reset signal to the control CPU 320, and the control CPU 320 that receives the reset signal executes the reset. Since the toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 in a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), it is monitored in a cycle of 8 ms shorter than that cycle. Finally, the timer that manages the relatively long error notification period such as the error notification for 30 seconds as described above is subtracted (S654), and the error notification ends at the time-out.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying the special symbol variation. When the second winning / failing lottery value is held (Y in S700), the second winning / failing determination means 222 reads the second winning / failing lottery value and determines whether or not the second special symbol 52 is correct (S702), and the second winning / failing is determined. The determination means 222 determines the stop symbol of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second variation pattern determining means 232 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and issues a variation start command together with the determined result. It is transmitted to the sub-board 300 to start the symbol variation of the second special symbol 52 (S716).

When the second winning / failing lottery value is not held (N in S700) and the first winning / failing lottery value is held (Y in S708), the first winning / failing determination means 221 is the first winning / losing lottery. The value is read out and the hit / fail of the first special symbol 51 is determined again (S710), the first hit / miss determination means 221 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712), and the first variation pattern determining means 231 is the first. 1 The variation pattern of the special symbol 51 is determined (S714), and the variation start command is transmitted to the sub-board 300 together with the determined result to start the symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 (S716). If the first winning / failing lottery value is not held, the processes from S710 to S722 are skipped (N in S708).

Processes the symbol variation display of the special symbol (S718), repeats S718 until the predetermined variation time elapses and reaches the symbol display stop timing (N of S720), and stops the symbol display after the predetermined variation time elapses. When the timing is reached (Y of S720), the fluctuation stop command is transmitted to the sub-board 300 to stop the symbol fluctuation being displayed at the predetermined stop symbol (S722), and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is finished. To do.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying decorative symbol variation. The effect determining means 303 of the sub-board 300 receives a command indicating the variation start and the effect display content from the main substrate 200 (S750), and stops the decorative symbol according to the received special symbol stop symbol, variation pattern, and hit / fail determination result. The mode is determined (S752), and the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is determined (S754). Here, when the precursor setting is turned on by the preliminary determination (Y in S756), the already determined variable effect pattern includes a specific effect content that should be avoided from being superimposed on the advance notice effect. If it is not (N of S758) and it is not a symbol change that is the trigger for turning on the precursor setting (N of S760), the setting for displaying the predetermined advance notice effect is executed (S764), and the precursor setting is set. If it is a symbol change that is an on-trigger (Y in S760), the precursor setting is turned off (S762). If the precursor setting is not on (N in S756), or if the variable effect pattern includes a specific effect content (Y in S758), the processes of S760 to S764 are skipped.

After that, the variation effect display of the decorative symbol is started (S766), the variation effect display process of the decorative symbol and (S768) are executed, the notice effect display process is executed (S770), and the variation stop command is received from the main board 200. When S768 and S770 are repeated (N in S772) and the fluctuation stop command is received (Y in S772), the symbol variation display is stopped by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol in the stop mode determined in S752 (S774). ), The variation effect of the decorative pattern is completed (S776).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the process of the special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts the effect process of the special game (S800), and the open / close control means 275 opens the grand prize opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not passed (N of S804) and the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 has not reached 9 or more, the game returns to S804 (N of S806), and the predetermined opening time has passed (N of S806). Although the opening time has not passed (Y of S804) (N of S804), when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 reaches 9 or more (Y of S806), the opening / closing control means 275 is the large winning opening. 20 is closed (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N in S810), 1 is added to the number of rounds to return to S802 (S812), and if the unit game has reached the final round (Y in S810), the effect display is displayed. The control means 305 ends the effect processing of the special game (S814), the special game control means 260 ends the special game (S816), and starts the execution of the specific game, that is, the probability change, the time saving, and the easy ball entry state (S818). ).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the process of the small hit game. In the small hit game, a unit game that is executed only once is started (S819), the large winning opening 20 is opened (S820), and the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time elapses (N of S822). When the time has passed (Y of S822), the large winning opening 20 is closed (S824), and if the opening and closing of the set number of times has not been completed (N of S826), 1 is added to the number of opening and closing to return to S820. (S828) If the opening and closing for the set number of times is completed (Y in S826), the small hit game is ended.

In the prerequisite technique, the number of big hits in the second game is generally larger than the number of big hits in the first game, that is, the second game has one big hit than the first game. In another example, the first game may be designed to have a higher expected value for winning a prize ball than the second game, although it was designed to have a higher expected value for winning a prize ball in. However, it may be designed so that the expected value of winning the prize ball in the first game and the second game is substantially equal. In the latter case, it may be designed so that the average number of unit games included in the special game executed in the first game and the special game executed in the second game is equal. For example, in the first game, a special game in which a unit game is executed seven times with a probability of 100% is executed, and in a second game, a special game in which a unit game is executed four times with a probability of 50% is executed. However, there may be a special game in which the unit game is executed 10 times with a probability of 50%. Further, in any case, when a specific area is provided in the large winning opening and the game ball that has entered the large winning opening enters the specific area or passes through the specific area, in the normal game after the special game is completed. It may be configured so that a specific game such as a probabilistic state is performed. In this case, the special game executed when the big hit is made in the second game is easier to enter the specific area than the special game which is executed when the big hit is made in the first game. It may be configured so that the probability that the normal game in the probabilistic state is executed is high after the end of the special game. For example, the first hit in which a special game in which it is relatively difficult to enter a specific area is executed, and the second hit in which a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area is executed. It may be provided so that the second game has a higher probability of being a second hit than the first game. Alternatively, the probability of a second hit in the first game may be less than 100%, but the probability of a second hit in the second game may be configured to be 100%.

(Example)
<Small hit rush>
In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming state in which the number of small hit games per unit time increases, that is, the frequency of small hits occurs, that is, a so-called small hit rush can be executed. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine has (1) parallel specifications in which the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 can be changed in parallel at the same time, and (2) the small hit probability in the second winning / failing lottery is It is set to be relatively high (for example, the small hit probability in the first winning / losing lottery is lower than the small winning probability in the second winning / failing lottery, or there is no possibility of a small hit), (3) a specific gaming state. It is a spec that enhances the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol 52.

The specific gaming state of (3) above is, for example, a gaming state in which the probability fluctuates and the ball is normally entered. Here, as a state related to the ease of entering the second starting port 12, a normal ball entry state (hereinafter, also referred to as a “low base state”) in which the ball entry ease is relatively low and a normal ball entry state are entered. There is a state in which the ball is easy to enter (hereinafter, also referred to as a “high base state”). As a probability state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means 221 and the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means 222 are big hits, a normal probability state in which a big hit is obtained with a predetermined probability which is a relatively low probability (hereinafter, There are two types: a "low probability state") and a probability fluctuation state (hereinafter, also referred to as a "high probability state") in which a jackpot is achieved with a higher probability than the normal probability state. In this embodiment, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol 52 is increased in the probability fluctuation state and the normal ball entry state (hereinafter, also referred to as “high probability low base state”). In addition, the "easy entry state" is a state in which the winning probability of the open lottery of the ordinary electric accessory 90 (so-called "electric tulip") is relatively high, and the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 at the time of winning the open lottery. One or more of the state in which the time is relatively long and the state in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is relatively short, and in this embodiment, the state is shifted to all three states. Point to. In the modified example, one or two of these three states may not be satisfied. On the other hand, the normal ball entry state is a state in which the high and low of the winning probability of the open lottery in the easy ball entry state, the length of the opening time of the normal electric accessory 90, and the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are reversed. That is, a state in which the winning probability of the open lottery of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is relatively low, a state in which the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 at the time of winning the open lottery is relatively short, and a fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol are set. It is one or more of the relatively long states, and in this embodiment, it refers to the state of transition to all three states. In the modified example, one or two of these three states may not be satisfied.

The pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment has a specification that the ball output rate (so-called “machine discount”) in a high-probability low-base state is set to 1 or more by frequently causing small hits in the second winning / losing lottery. For example, when 100 pieces can be fired per minute, the ball is continuously fired (1) to the second starting port 12 in the non-probability fluctuation state and the normal ball entry state (hereinafter, also referred to as "low probability low base state"). When 100 balls are fired per minute, 100 balls are launched per minute, and the expected value of the small hit game per minute (the average number of times the small hit game is executed per minute) is 0.1 times (the average number of times the small hit game is executed per minute). As an example, if a small hit is won once every 10 minutes), the expected value of the prize balls obtained in the small hit game in 1 minute is 2 (for example, the prize balls per count of the large winning opening). Since the number is 10 and the average number of winnings per small hit game is 2.0, 0.1 x 10 x 2.0 = 2), and only the prize balls won by the small hit game are considered. (That is, the winning balls obtained by winning the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the general winning port 33, etc. are not taken into consideration.) The ball output rate is 0.02. On the other hand, in the case of a probability fluctuation state and a normal ball entry state (high probability low base state), 100 balls per minute are continuously fired at the second starting port 12 (launching at a pace of 100 balls per minute). If the expected value of the small hit game in 1 minute (the average number of times the small hit game occurs in 1 minute) is 6.0 times, the prize ball obtained in the small hit game in 1 minute Expected value is 120 (for example, the number of winning balls per count of large winning openings is 10, and the average number of winnings per small hit game is 2.0, so 6 x 10 x 2.0 = 120). Therefore, only the winning balls obtained by the small hit game are considered (that is, the winning balls obtained by winning the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the general winning opening 33, etc. are not considered). It becomes .2. The small hit rush ends when the high probability low base state shifts to another gaming state triggered by the occurrence of a predetermined big hit. As a modification, the specification of the number-cut probability change (so-called "ST") is adopted, and the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol 51 and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol 52 without shifting to the special game during the high probability low base state. The small hit rush may be terminated by shifting to the low probability low base state when the total reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

In this embodiment, we propose suitable control and production in a pachinko gaming machine provided with a small hit rush. Hereinafter, the same or corresponding elements as those constituting the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the prerequisite technology will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the contents already explained in the prerequisite technology will be omitted as appropriate, and the contents different from the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the prerequisite technology will be mainly described.

FIG. 30 shows a basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the embodiment. In the flow path on the right side in the game area 81, in other words, in the flow path through which the game ball launched with relatively strong strength flows, the operating port 506, the second starting port 12, and the large winning opening 20 are arranged in order from the top. Will be done. The actuating port 506 corresponds to the second actuating port 32 in the prerequisite technology. Unlike the prerequisite technique, the operating port of this embodiment is provided only in the right flow path in the game area 81, and the first operating port 31 is not provided in the left flow path. The pass detection device 508 corresponds to the second pass detection device 37 in the prerequisite technology.

When the game ball passes through the operating port 506, a normal symbol lottery (open lottery) is executed, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded. When the ordinary electric accessory 90 is expanded, most of the game balls flowing in the right flow path of the game area 81 can easily enter the second starting port 12. On the other hand, the expanded ordinary electric accessory 90 covers and obstructs the flow path toward the large winning opening 20, and as a result, it becomes difficult for the game ball to flow downstream of the second starting opening 12, and as a result, the large winning opening 20 is entered. It becomes difficult to do. That is, the positional relationship between the second starting port 12 and the large winning opening 20 is such that when the ordinary electric accessory 90 is expanded, it is easy to enter the large winning opening 20, and the ordinary electric accessory 90 is expanded. The positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the large winning opening 20 when the ball is not entered is reduced. Therefore, in the easy-to-enter state (high base state) in which the opening frequency of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is high, the possibility of entering the large winning opening 20 is lower than in the normal entry state (low base state). When the ordinary electric accessory 90 is closed, a game nail (not shown) is provided above the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 so that it is difficult or impossible to enter the second starting port 12. By that amount, when the ordinary electric accessory 90 is closed, the game ball easily flows downstream of the second starting port 12, and the possibility of entering the large winning opening 20 is relatively increased.

FIG. 31 is a functional block diagram showing the specific game control means in FIG. 4 in detail. The specific game control means 270 includes a ball entry state setting means 510 and a probability state setting means 512. The ball entry state setting means 510 sets the game state to either the normal ball entry state or the ball entry easy state. The ball entry state setting means 510 is set to switch the game state from the normal ball entry state to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game, and when the end of the ball entry easy state is reached, the ball entry state is changed to the normal ball entry state. Set to switch the game state to the state. More specifically, if the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol 51 is a 10R probability variation jackpot symbol or a 4R probability variation jackpot symbol when the game state at the time of jackpot is a low probability low base state, it is entered after the end of the special game. Switch the game state to the easy ball state and maintain the easy ball entry state until the next big hit. If the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol 51 is a 4R normal jackpot symbol, the game state is switched to the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game, and the ball is easy to enter when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 50 times. Switch the game state from the state to the normal ball entry state. In addition, during the execution of the special game, the normal ball entry state is always set (the normal ball entry state is executed during the special game executed when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit in the normal ball entry state), and the small hit game is executed. In the middle, the game state immediately before the start of the small hit game is inherited (the normal ball entry state is performed during the small hit game executed when the result of the hit / fail judgment is the small hit in the normal ball entry state).

If the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol 52 is a 10R probability variation jackpot symbol or a 4R probability variation jackpot symbol when the game state at the time of a jackpot is a high probability high base state or a high probability low base state, it is entered after the end of the special game. Switch the game state to the easy ball state and maintain the easy ball entry state until the next big hit. If the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol 52 is a 2R normal jackpot symbol, the game state is switched to the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game, and the ball is easy to enter when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 50 times. Switch the game state from the state to the normal ball entry state. If the second special symbol 52 is a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol, the ball does not enter the easy-to-enter state. In addition, during the execution of the special game, the normal ball entry state is always set (the normal ball entry state is executed during the special game executed when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit in the easy entry state), and the small hit game is executed. The inside inherits the game state immediately before the start of the small hit game (the ball is easy to enter during the small hit game executed when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit in the easy ball entry state).

The probability state setting means 512 sets the game state to either the normal probability state or the probability fluctuation state. The probability state setting means 512 sets the game state to the probability fluctuation state after the end of the special game when a big hit accompanied by the probability change transition occurs, and when a big hit without the probability change transition occurs, the special game After the end, the game state is set to the normal probability state. It should be noted that the normal probability state is always set during the execution of the special game (the normal probability state is set during the special game executed when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit in the normal ball entry state, and the hit / fail judgment is made in the easy ball entry state. During the special game executed when the result is a big hit, it is also in the normal probability state), and during the execution of the small hit game, the game state immediately before the start of the small hit game is inherited (the result of the hit / fail judgment is the small hit in the normal probability state). It is a normal probability state during the small hit game executed in the case of, and is in the easy ball entry state during the small hit game executed when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit in the easy ball entry state).

FIG. 32 schematically shows a symbol determination table to be referred to in the case of a big hit. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 stop the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 with reference to the jackpot symbol determining table of the present figure when the result of the hit / fail determination is a jackpot. To determine. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 select a stop symbol indicating either 10R probability variation, 4R probability variation, 4R normal, 2R probability variation, or 2R normal as the jackpot symbol. The stop symbol that can be selected differs between the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The first symbol determining means 226 selects a stop symbol indicating any of 10R probability variation, 4R probability variation, and 4R normal as the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51. The second symbol determining means 227 selects a stop symbol indicating either 10R probability variation, 4R probability variation, 2R probability variation, or 2R normal as the stop symbol of the second special symbol 52.

The table of FIG. 32 is assigned a lottery value in a different range for each type of stop symbol, so that each selection probability is set. In the case of the first special symbol 51, 10R probability variation is selected when the lottery value is 0 to 24 (selection probability is about 10%), and 4R probability variation is selected when the lottery value is 25 to 204 (selection probability is about). 70%), 4R normal is selected when the lottery value is 205 to 255 (selection probability is about 20%). In the case of the second special symbol 52, 10R probability variation is selected when the lottery value is 0 to 89 (selection probability is about 35%), and 4R probability variation is selected when the lottery value is 90 to 165 (selection probability is about). 30%), 2R probability variation is selected when the lottery value is 166 to 204 (selection probability is about 15%), and 2R normal is selected when the lottery value is 205 to 255 (selection probability is about 20%). ..

FIG. 33 is a game state transition diagram schematically showing the relationship between each game state and the transition trigger. In the low probability low base state 620, the main special symbol is the first special symbol 51, and the starting port aimed at by the player is the first starting port 11. When a so-called first hit occurs in the low probability low base state 620, if the jackpot is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 4R probability variation jackpot, it transitions to the high probability high base state 624 (S900), and if the jackpot is a 4R normal jackpot, the probability is high. The transition to the base state 622 (S902). In the low-probability high-base state 622, the main special symbol is the second special symbol 52, and the starting port aimed at by the player is the second starting port 12. When a big hit occurs in the low probability high base state 622, if the big hit is a 10R probability variable big hit or a 4R probability variable big hit, it transitions to the high probability high base state 624 (S904), and if it is a 2R normal big hit, the low probability high base is again. It becomes a state 622 (S906), and if it is a 2R probability variation jackpot, it transitions to a high probability low base state 626 (S905). In the low-probability high-base state 622, when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 50 times, which is the final stage of the easy-to-enter state, the state transitions to the low-probability low-base state 620 (S908).

In the high-probability high-base state 624, the main special symbol is the second special symbol 52, and the starting port aimed at by the player is the second starting port 12. In the high-probability high-base state 624, a so-called battle effect is executed in which a video of a pattern in which predetermined characters (a ally character and a strong enemy character) compete with each other is displayed. In this effect mode, until the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit (that is, in the case of a small hit and a miss), the effect that the ally character runs and the expectation of the big hit (or the expectation of the probability variation big hit) is suggested. If the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the advance notice effect suggesting the big hit expectation (or the expectation of the probability change big hit) is executed, and then the battle effect is executed. In the battle production, the pattern of the battle between characters is displayed as a production to incite whether or not a big hit to shift to a special game with higher profit occurs, and when the ally character wins, the number of unit games is relatively large. A 10R probability variation jackpot or a 4R probability variation jackpot, which is a big hit with a large profit, occurs, and when a ally character is defeated, a 2R probability variation jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, which is a jackpot with a relatively small number of unit games and a small profit, occurs. In FIG. 33, if the jackpot is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 4R probability variation jackpot, it becomes the high probability high base state 624 again (S910), and if it is a 2R normal jackpot, it transitions to the low probability high base state 622 (S912), and the 2R probability variation. If it is a big hit, it transitions to the high probability low base state 626 (S914). The high probability high base state 624 is continued until the next jackpot occurs.

In the high-probability low-base state 626, the main special symbol is the second special symbol 52, and the starting port aimed at by the player is the second starting port 12. The high-probability low-base state 626 is a gaming state that is shifted to when the battle effect in the high-probability high-base state 624 is defeated (2R probability variation big hit), but in this embodiment, the small hit rush is executed, high. It is a more advantageous gaming state than the high probability base state 624. The production mode in the high-probability low-base state 626 is a production mode in which a production (details will be described later) in which a weak enemy character, which is an enemy character different from the strong enemy character that is opposed in the battle production described above, is repeatedly fought is executed. Will be. In this effect mode, until the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit, so that the effect of defeating weak enemy characters one after another is executed, and the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. In that case, the above-mentioned battle effect is executed after the advance notice effect that suggests the big hit expectation (or the expectation that the probability change big hit) is executed. The high-probability low-base state 626 is continued until the next big hit occurs, and the gaming state is maintained as the high-probability low-base state 626 even if the small hits occur once or continuously. When a big hit occurs in the high probability low base state 626, if the big hit is a 10R probability variable big hit or a 4R probability variable big hit, it transitions to the high probability high base state 624 (S916), and if the big hit is a 2R normal big hit, the low probability high base state It transitions to 622 (S918), and if it is a 2R probability variation jackpot, it becomes a high probability low base state 626 again (S920).

FIG. 34 is a diagram schematically showing a hit / fail determination table in this embodiment. It is referred to in place of the table of FIG. 5 in the prerequisite technique. The winning / failing determination table of this embodiment is set so that the small hit probability in the second winning / losing lottery is relatively high. That is, the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means 221 is a small hit is higher than the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means 222 is a small hit. Alternatively, the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means 221 is not a small hit, but the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means 222 may be a small hit. For example, the lottery value range corresponding to the small hit is determined so that the second win / fail lottery is wider than the first win / fail lottery (the lottery value range corresponding to the small hit of the first win / fail lottery does not have to be, that is, It may be "0".) The small hit game control means 265 determines whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination by the second hit / fail determination means 222 is a small hit, or at least one of the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222. If the result is a small hit, a small hit game is performed with the opening of the large winning opening 20.

As shown in the figure, in both the first winning / failing lottery by the first winning / failing determination means 221 and the second winning / failing lottery by the second winning / failing determining means 222, the winning / failing lottery value is 0 to 209 in the normal state (that is, in a low probability state). Only when it falls within the range of is a big hit. At the time of probability change, the range of big hits is expanded, and it becomes a big hit not only when the winning / failing lottery value corresponds to the range of 0 to 209 but also when it corresponds to the range of 210 to 1299. In this way, the range corresponding to the jackpot changes according to the gaming state. In this figure, a single hit / fail judgment table shows the jackpot range for both normal time and probability change, but the hit / fail judgment table may be prepared separately for normal time and probability change, and the first It may be prepared separately for one winning / failing lottery and for the second winning / failing lottery. If the winning / failing lottery value acquired by the second winning / failing determination means 222 falls within the range of 1300 to 50899, it is a small hit, but the winning / failing lottery value acquired by the first winning / failing determining means 221 corresponds to the range of 1300 to 50899. However, it is not a small hit, but a miss. Further, in both the first winning / failing lottery by the first winning / failing determination means 221 and the second winning / failing lottery by the second winning / failing determination means 222, if the winning / failing lottery value falls within the range of 50900 to 65535, it is excluded. As described above, since the "small hit" is associated only with the second winning / failing lottery and not with the first winning / failing lottery, it can be applied only in the second winning / failing lottery. The small hit probability of the second winning / failing lottery in the embodiment is 1 / 1.32, while the small winning probability of the first winning / failing lottery is 0. The small hit probabilities of the first win / fail lottery and the second win / fail lottery are constant regardless of the gaming state. In this figure, an example is shown in which the judgment table for big hits and the judgment table for small hits are realized in the form of a single hit / fail judgment table, but each may be realized as a separate table. Further, the "small hit" may be applicable in the first winning / failing lottery, but the range of the winning / failing lottery value in that case is the range of the winning / failing lottery value corresponding to the small hit in the second winning / failing lottery. Set narrower. For example, the small hit probability of the first winning / failing lottery may be set to a low probability of about 1/400.

There is a very high probability that the result of the hit / fail determination corresponding to the entry into the second starting port 12, that is, the fluctuation result of the second special symbol 52 will be a small hit. Therefore, a game method in which a game ball is always launched aiming at the second starting port 12 (that is, always right-handed) and a small hit is aimed at is conceivable, but this is the original game playability intended by the designer. Absent. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol 52 in the low-probability low-base state is relatively low, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol 52 in the high-probability low-base state is relatively high. The fluctuation efficiency can be said to be the number of symbol fluctuations per predetermined unit time. In the embodiment, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol 52 per unit time is increased in the high probability low base state. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 determine the variation pattern of the special symbol according to any one of a plurality of criteria. In the embodiment, the first variation pattern determining means 231 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 according to a predetermined variation pattern table for the first special symbol 51.

The second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 has a fluctuation pattern defined so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 in the low-probability low-base state is longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 in the high-probability low-base state. Determine the variation pattern based on the table. The second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 selects a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of, for example, 10 minutes when the result of the second winning / failing lottery is wrong in the low probability low base state. As a result, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol 52 becomes relatively high in the high probability low base state and relatively low in the low probability low base state.

In the high base state, the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 easily determines as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52, a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 in the low probability low base state. The variation pattern is determined based on the pattern table. The high-base state referred to here includes a high-probability high-base state and a low-probability high-base state. The high base state is a game state that is transferred after the end of the special game, and the next big hit occurs, or the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 becomes a specific number of times, for example, 50 times. It continues until it reaches (as described above, if the 10R probability variation jackpot symbol or the 4R probability variation jackpot symbol stops, it continues until the next jackpot occurs). When the total number of fluctuations reaches a specific number, the state shifts to the low base state. In this way, in the high base state, which is the period from the end of the special game to the occurrence of the next big hit or the period until the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 50, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol 52 is increased, and the normal electric motor is used. As a result of the accessory 90 being opened frequently, the ease of entering the large winning opening 20 is reduced.

When the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 reaches 50 times, which is the final stage of the high base state, the ball entry state setting means 510 sets the normal ball entry state. The end of the high base state is set to 50 times for the 4R normal jackpot and the 2R normal jackpot, and since both are low probability states, the low probability low base state is reached after the end of the high base state. When shifting to the low-probability low-base state, the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 tends to determine a fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52. The variation pattern is determined based on the selection criteria. On the other hand, only in the case of the 2R probability variation big hit, the high probability low base state is reached after the end of the special game, and the small hit rush state is reached.

In general, in the high base state, a fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time is easily selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol, and in a low base state, a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol. Easy to be done. However, in the high-probability low-base state, which is a small hit rush, the fluctuation time is relatively short as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in order to increase the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol even in the low-base state. The pattern is easier to select. The second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 determines as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 in the high probability low base state, a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 in the low probability low base state. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the special fluctuation pattern table for the easy small hit rush. The second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 selects an ultra-short fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of, for example, 1 second when the result of the second winning / failing lottery is wrong in the high probability low base state (small hit rush).

Based on the above basic configuration of the small hit rush, individual features will be described below. In addition, the differences from the basic configuration in the specifications of each embodiment will be described as appropriate.

<First Example> Termination Condition of Easy Ball Entering State According to Game State In the high base state, it is premised that the player executes a so-called right-handed hit aiming at the second starting port 12. .. On top of that, it is difficult for the ball output rate (the ratio of the number of winning prize balls to the number of hit balls per predetermined time) to exceed 1 (that is, the state where the number of winning prize balls exceeds the number of hit balls) in the high base state. Therefore, it is conceivable to end the high base state, which is an easy ball entry state, as soon as possible without prolonging it longer than necessary. For example, the occurrence of the next big hit is regarded as one of the final stages of the easy-to-enter state, but by ending the easy-to-enter state at the start of the symbol change related to the big hit, it is normal especially during reach fluctuations with a long fluctuation time. It is possible to close the electric accessory 90 to suppress the entry of the ball into the second starting port 12 while the symbol is fluctuating, and to make it easier to avoid an unnecessarily high ball ejection rate. Such a specification makes it easy for the developer of the game machine to keep the ball output rate within a suitable range.

However, when a player who is familiar with the specifications and characteristics of the game machine plays a game, it is detected that the result of the hit / fail judgment related to the symbol change is a big hit because the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not opened during the reach change. There is a possibility that it will be done. On the other hand, depending on the game state, the specification is such that the reach variation effect is executed only when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit (for example, when the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong only in the high probability high base state 624). The reach variation effect is not executed and the above-mentioned battle effect is not developed, or the reach variation effect is executed and the above-mentioned battle effect is developed only when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit only in the high probability high base state 624. Specifications) are also conceivable. Therefore, in the first embodiment, different conditions depending on the game state are set as the end conditions of the easy ball entry state.

FIG. 35 is a time chart showing the relationship between the state of symbol variation and the end condition of the easy-to-enter ball state. FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b) show that the end conditions are different in each of the two gaming states. In the first gaming state (FIG. 35A), which is one of the easy ball entry states, the ball entry state setting means 510 is the result of the hit / fail determination by the first hit / miss determination means 221 or the second hit / fail determination means 222. When is a big hit, the easy entry state is terminated on the assumption that the end condition is satisfied at the start of the symbol change related to the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first gaming state referred to here is the high probability high base state 624. The upper part of FIG. 35A shows a state such as a symbol variation, and the lower part shows an on / off state in which the ball is easy to enter. First, after the ultra-shortened symbol fluctuations 630 and 632 are displayed as the ball entry easy state is on, when the jackpot reach variation 634 is started (S930), the ball entry ease state is turned off and ended. , At least until the period of the special game 636 after that, the ball is normally entered.

In the second gaming state (FIG. 35 (b)), which is one of the easy-to-enter states and is different from the first gaming state, the first hit / fail determination means 221 or the second hit / fail determination means 222 is used. When the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the easy entry state is terminated on the assumption that the end condition is satisfied at the end of the symbol variation related to the result of the hit / miss judgment. The second gaming state referred to here is the low-probability high-base state 622. In FIG. 35 (b), similarly to (a), the upper row shows a state such as a symbol variation, and the lower row shows an on / off state in which a ball is easily entered. First, after the ultra-shortened symbol variation 640, 642 is displayed as the ball entry easy state is on, even if the jackpot reach variation 644 is started (S932), the ball entry ease state is continued to be on. After that, when the reach variation 644 is completed (S934), the easy ball entry state is turned off and the ball is ended, and the ball is normally entered during the period of the special game 646 thereafter. When the out-of-reach fluctuation is executed, the easy-to-enter state is kept on even after the reach fluctuation is completed. In the modified example, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be the same gaming state, and for example, both may be specified to have a high probability and high base state 624. In another modification, the timing at which the easy ball entry state in the first game state is turned off is the end of the reach variation 644 as shown in FIG. 35 (b), and the easy ball entry state in the second game state is The off timing may be the start of the reach variation 634 as shown in FIG. 35 (a).

In the high-probability high-base state 624, the reach variation effect can be executed and the battle effect can be developed only when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit. The hit / fail judgment referred to here mainly refers to the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means 222, but may include the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means 221. In the reach variation effect in the high-probability high-base state 624, it is suggested that the jackpot is confirmed by the fact that multiple decorative symbols are in the reach mode, and in the remaining effects, it is a battle whether the jackpot involves a transition to the probability variation state. It will be fanned by the player through the production. Since the jackpot that occurs in the high-probability high-base state 624 is the so-called consecutive-chan jackpot, and the next jackpot is already promised under the high-probability state, the player is more interested in the jackpot itself than the jackpot itself. It can be said that it depends on whether or not the next big hit is accompanied by a probability change. Therefore, even if the determination of the jackpot is known to the player at the start time (S930) of the reach variation effect (reach variation 634), it is unlikely to impair the expectation of the player. In addition, since it is suggested that the jackpot will be confirmed at the start of the reach fluctuation effect or at the time when the reach is established, the possibility of the reach occurrence and the possibility of the probability change jackpot are possible by so-called look-ahead in order to incite the occurrence of the jackpot even before the start of the symbol fluctuation. It is also possible to execute a notice effect suggesting.

On the other hand, in the low-probability high-base state 622, the reach variation effect can be executed even when the result of the hit / miss determination by the first hit / miss determination means 221 or the second hit / miss determination means 222 is not a big hit. Therefore, it is easy to enter the ball at the start of the reach variation effect (reach variation 644) (S932) or at the end of the symbol variation (S934) so that the player does not know whether or not the ball is a big hit during the symbol variation. To end. The hit / fail determination referred to here also mainly refers to the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means 222, but may include the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means 221. When the reach variation effect is executed in the low probability high base state 622, the battle effect is developed in the same manner as the high probability high base state 624, but the easy entry state is terminated at the start time of this reach variation effect or during the symbol change. There is no such thing. As a modification, when the reach variation effect is executed in the low probability high base state 622, the battle effect is not developed, and other effects (for example, if a treasure can be found, it is a success and a big hit is notified. Etc.) may be developed, and even in such a case, the easy-to-enter state is not terminated at the start of the reach variation effect or during the symbol variation.

In the first embodiment, the specification may be such that the first game is preferentially executed so that the first game and the second game are not executed at the same time at least in the high base state. That is, when the main display control means 250 waits for the fluctuation display of one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 when the fluctuation display is performed, the fluctuation start timing is reached at least in the high base state. Is executed with priority given to the digestion of the first hold, that is, the variable display of the first special symbol 51, even if the lottery value is held as the second hold. For example, if the easy entry state is terminated at the start of the jackpot symbol fluctuation of the second special symbol, the ball is hit aiming at the first starting port 11 instead of the second starting port 12 where the normal electric accessory 90 is difficult to open. It is also possible. As a result, not only the second hold but also the lottery value of the first hold may be held, but the main display control means 250 gives priority to the digestion of the first hold and gives priority to the first special figure control means 251. Displays the first special symbol 51 in a variable manner. In this case, the frequency with which the second special symbol 52 fluctuates, that is, the digestion rate of the second hold becomes slow, and the ball output rate of the second game in the high base state is less likely to exceed 1, and the ball output rate is within an appropriate range. It becomes easier to control.

The first variation pattern determining means 231 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 so that the reachless deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51 becomes relatively long in the high probability high base state 624. For example, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so that the non-reach-out deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 is longer than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52. Further, for example, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is determined so that the non-reach-out deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 in the high base state is longer than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 in the low base state. You may. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 may be determined to be relatively long when the number of the first hold reaches a predetermined number or more, or becomes longer as the number of the first hold increases. You may decide. As a result, the more the ball is hit aiming at the first starting port 11, the slower the digestion speed of the second hold, so that it becomes easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11. As a modification, the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so that the reach-free deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51 is relatively short in the high-probability high-base state 624. For example, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so that the non-reach-out deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 is shorter than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52, or, for example, a high base. The fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so that the non-reach-out deviation time of the first special symbol 51 in the state is shorter than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 in the low base state. The fluctuation time of the 1 special symbol 51 may be determined to be relatively long when the number of the first hold reaches a predetermined number or more, or to be long as the number of the first hold is large. You may. In this way, the more the ball is hit at the first starting port 11, the faster the digestion speed of the second hold is, so that the digestion speed of the second hold can be adjusted depending on how the player hits.

However, the above-mentioned determination that the non-reach-out deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 becomes relatively long is not carried out in the so-called high-probability high-base state 624 immediately after the first hit, and the high-probability high-base state during the continuous chan. It may be carried out only at 624. That is, in the high-probability high-base state 624 that shifts when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail determination means 221 or the second hit / fail determination means 222 becomes a big hit in the low-probability low-base state 620, the high that shifts thereafter. The fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is determined so as to be relatively shorter than the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 in the high probability base state 624. Immediately after the first hit, there is a good possibility that the first hold still remains, and this is to avoid the game from stagnation immediately after the first hit. Further, in the high-probability high-base state 624, the first special symbol 51 is used in the high-probability high-base state 624, which is shifted to the case where the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means 221 or the second hit / miss determination means 222 is a big hit. The fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is determined so that the deviation fluctuation time of is relatively long. As a further modification, the above-mentioned determination that the reachless out-of-reach fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 becomes relatively long is not carried out in the high probability high base state 624 during the continuous chan, and the high probability immediately after the first hit is high. It may be carried out only in the high base state 624. That is, in the high-probability high-base state 624, the low-probability low-base state is shifted to when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail determination means 221 or the second hit / fail determination means 222 is a big hit. In 620, it is relatively shorter than the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 in the high-probability high-base state 624, which is shifted when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means 221 or the second hit / miss judgment means 222 becomes a big hit. The variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so as to be. In this way, immediately after the first hit, where there is a good chance that the first hold still remains, you can congratulate the transition to the high-probability high-base state 624, or play in the high-probability high-base state 624. It is possible to secure a time for executing a special effect such as explaining the sex and the content of the effect as a variable time.

As a modification, a specification may be used in which the first game and the second game can be executed in parallel at the same time. The main display control means 250 can display the first special symbol 51 in a variable manner even when the second special symbol 52 is changing, and the second special symbol 52 can be displayed in a variable manner even when the first special symbol 51 is changing. It can be displayed in a variable manner. The second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 has a high probability and high base state 624, and when the number of the first hold is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.), the second special symbol 52 has no reach and is out of reach. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is determined so that the time becomes relatively long. For example, the second special when the number of the first hold is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) and the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 is 0. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be longer than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the symbol 52, or the reachless deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 may be determined regardless of the number of the first hold. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that is longer than the reachless deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51. Further, for example, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the larger the number of the first holdes in the high-probability high-base state 624, the longer the non-reach-out deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52. Even with these, the digestion speed of the second hold becomes slower as the ball is hit aiming at the first starting port 11, so that it becomes easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11. As a further modification, the second variation pattern determining means 232 has a second special symbol when the number of the first hold is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) in the high probability high base state 624. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the reachless deviation variation time of 52 is relatively short. For example, the second special when the number of the first hold is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) and the non-reach out-of-reach variation time of the second special symbol 52 is 0. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be shorter than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the symbol 52, or the reachless deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 may be determined regardless of the number of the first hold. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that is shorter than the reachless deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, and for example, the number of first holds is large in the high probability high base state 624. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the non-reach-out deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52 becomes shorter. In this way, the more the ball is hit at the first starting port 11, the faster the digestion speed of the second hold is, so that the digestion speed of the second hold can be adjusted depending on how the player hits.

As another modification, the main display control means 250 may be specified to preferentially execute the second game so that the first game and the second game are not executed at the same time. That is, when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is variable-displayed, the main display control means 250 waits for the other variable display, while the change start timing of the second special symbol 52 is reached. In that case, even if the lottery value is held as the first hold, the variable display of the second special symbol 52 is preferentially executed. The second variation pattern determining means 232 has a high probability high base state 624, and when the number of the first hold is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.), the deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52 is The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is determined so as to be relatively long. For example, the second special when the number of the first hold is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) and the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 is 0. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be longer than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the symbol 52, or the reachless deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 may be determined regardless of the number of the first hold. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that is longer than the reachless deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51. Further, for example, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the larger the number of the first holdes in the high-probability high-base state 624, the longer the non-reach-out deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52. Even with these, the digestion speed of the second hold becomes slower as the ball is hit aiming at the first starting port 11, so that it becomes easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11. As a further modification, the second variation pattern determining means 232 has a second special symbol when the number of the first hold is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) in the high probability high base state 624. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the deviation fluctuation time of 52 is relatively short. For example, the number of first holds is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.). ), The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is set so that the non-reach-out deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 is shorter than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 when the number of the first hold is 0. The second special symbol 52 may be determined, or the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the non-reach-out deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 is shorter than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 regardless of the number of the first hold. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined, and for example, in the high-probability high-base state 624, the larger the number of the first hold, the shorter the non-reach-out deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52. The variation pattern may be determined. In this way, the more the ball is hit at the first starting port 11, the faster the digestion speed of the second hold is, so that the digestion speed of the second hold can be adjusted depending on how the player hits.

As yet another modification, the main display control means 250 may be specified to execute the first game and the second game in the order of entering the ball so that the first game and the second game are not executed at the same time. That is, when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is variablely displayed, the main display control means 250 waits for the other variable display, while entering the ball into the first starting port 11 and the second. The order of entering the ball into the starting port 12 or the order of the first hold and the second hold is stored, and the variable display of the first special symbol 51 or the variable display of the second special symbol 52 is started according to the order. Also in this case, the second variation pattern determining means 232 has the second special symbol 52 when the number of the first hold is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) in the high probability high base state 624. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is determined so that the deviation fluctuation time of is relatively long. For example, the second special when the number of the first hold is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) and the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 is 0. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be longer than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the symbol 52, or the reachless deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 may be determined regardless of the number of the first hold. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that is longer than the reachless deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51. Further, for example, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the larger the number of the first holdes in the high-probability high-base state 624, the longer the non-reach-out deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52. Even with these, the digestion speed of the second hold becomes slower as the ball is hit aiming at the first starting port 11, so that it becomes easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11. As a further modification, the second variation pattern determining means 232 has a second special symbol when the number of the first hold is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) in the high probability high base state 624. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the deviation fluctuation time of 52 is relatively short. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is determined so that the non-reach-out deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 is shorter than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 when the number of the first hold is 0. Alternatively, the second special symbol 52 may have a non-reach-out deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 shorter than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 regardless of the number of the first hold. The fluctuation pattern may be determined. For example, in the high-probability high-base state 624, the fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 so that the larger the number of the first hold, the shorter the non-reach-out deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52. The pattern may be determined. In this way, the more the ball is hit at the first starting port 11, the faster the digestion speed of the second hold is, so that the digestion speed of the second hold can be adjusted depending on how the player hits.

In yet another modification, as the end condition of the easy ball entry state, the end condition at the start of fixing the symbol or at the end of fixing the stop symbol related to the result of the hit / fail judgment when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. The easy-to-enter state may be terminated as satisfying the above conditions. Here, "fixed stop symbol" is a period for maintaining the fixed stop mode of the special symbol. For example, when the symbol is stopped due to the symbol change, "fixed stop symbol" is started, and the hold remains. After the "stop symbol fixing" continues for a predetermined time, the "stop symbol fixing" ends, and the next symbol variation is started. In addition, when the result of the hit / miss judgment is a small hit, the easy ball entry state may be ended as if the end condition was satisfied at the start or end of the symbol variation related to the result of the hit / miss judgment, or the small hit game. At the start or end of the start effect of, the easy-to-enter state may be terminated as if the end condition was satisfied. Alternatively, when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, N seconds after the start of the symbol variation related to the result of the hit / miss judgment (N may be a fixed value or a variable value according to the big hit symbol). You may end the easy entry state as if the end condition was satisfied. Further, each example regarding the end condition of the easy ball entry state described above is not limited to the case where the first gaming state is the high probability high base state 624, and the first gaming state is the low probability low base state 620 and the low probability. Either the high base state 622 or the high probability low base state 626 may be applied. Further, not only when the second gaming state is the low probability high base state 622, but also when the second gaming state is the low probability low base state 620, the high probability high base state 624, or the high probability low base state 626. It may or may not be applied. Further, it may be applied even when the first gaming state and the second gaming state are the same gaming state.

<Second Example> Termination condition of subsequent easy ball entry state according to the jackpot symbol Since the basic configuration of the second example is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description of common points is omitted and the first embodiment is performed. The differences from the example will be mainly explained. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the end condition of the easy ball entry state is based on different end conditions depending on the type of jackpot symbol, and is based on different end conditions depending on the type of game state.

If the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means 221 or the second hit / fail judgment means 222 is a big hit, and the type of the special symbol is the first big hit symbol, the first condition is the end condition. It shifts to the first gaming state, which is an easy ball state. If the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means 221 or the second hit / fail judgment means 222 is a big hit, and the type of the special symbol is the second big hit symbol, the second condition is the end condition. It shifts to the second gaming state where the ball is easy. For example, the first jackpot symbol may be a jackpot symbol with a probability change, and the second jackpot symbol may be a jackpot symbol without a probability variation. For example, the first condition, which is one of the end conditions, is the start of the symbol change related to the result of the hit / fail judgment when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, and the second condition, which is one of the end conditions. The condition may be the end of the symbol variation related to the result of the hit / fail judgment when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. For example, the first gaming state may be a high probability high base state 624, the second gaming state may be a low probability high base state 622, or the first gaming state may be a low probability high base state 622. The second gaming state may be a high probability high base state 624. Here, as a further modification example in the above, (1) the first jackpot symbol and the second jackpot symbol may be jackpot symbols with probability variation, that is, any jackpot symbol has a high probability. It may shift to the base state 624, in which case, the high-probability high base state 624 that has shifted with the first jackpot symbol as an opportunity may be set as the first gaming state, and the transition has been made with the second jackpot symbol as an opportunity. The high-probability high-base state 624 may be set as the second gaming state, and (2) neither the first jackpot symbol nor the second jackpot symbol may be a jackpot symbol without probability change, that is, any jackpot symbol. Even so, it may shift to the low-probability high-base state 622, and in that case, the low-probability high-base state 622 that has shifted with the first jackpot symbol as an opportunity may be set as the first gaming state, and the second The low-probability high-base state 622 that has shifted with the jackpot symbol as an opportunity may be set as the second gaming state. It should be added that this modification is applicable to the examples described below.

FIG. 35A shows a jackpot symbol in which the first jackpot symbol is accompanied by a probability change, and after the end of the special game, the first condition, that is, the start of the jackpot symbol variation is the end condition, and the high probability high base state 624 Move to. Similar to the first embodiment, after the ultra-shortened symbol variation 630,632 is displayed as the ball entry easy state is on, when the jackpot reach variation 634 is started (S930), the ball entry ease state is off. It will be in the normal ball entry state at least until the period of the special game 636 after that.

FIG. 35B shows a jackpot symbol in which the second jackpot symbol does not accompany a probability change, and after the end of the special game, the second condition, that is, the end of the jackpot symbol variation is the end condition, and the low probability and high base state. Move to 622. Similar to the first embodiment, after the ultra-shortened symbol fluctuations 640 and 642 are displayed as the ball entry easy state is on, even if the jackpot reach variation 644 is started (S932), the ball entry ease state remains on. Will be continued. After that, when the reach variation 644 is completed (S934), the easy ball entry state is turned off and the ball is ended, and the ball is normally entered during the period of the special game 646 thereafter.

As described above, also in the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the normal electric accessory 90 is closed during the reach fluctuation with a particularly long fluctuation time to suppress the entry of the ball into the second starting port 12. It is possible to easily avoid an increase in the ball output rate more than necessary. Such a specification makes it easy for the developer of the game machine to keep the ball output rate within a suitable range.

As a modification, as described above, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be the same gaming state, and in that case, for example, the specifications may be such that both have a high probability and a high base state 624. As a result, even if the game state of the transition destination is the same, different end conditions can be set depending on the type of the jackpot symbol.

In another modification, for example, the first condition of the end condition is that the number of symbol fluctuations after the transition to the easy-to-enter state reaches a predetermined number, and the second condition of the end condition is the hit / fail determination. It may be a case where the result is a small hit, or a case where the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) (the second condition is the latter). In that case, the predetermined number of times to be set may be different depending on the jackpot symbol). In this case, if the first big hit symbol is a big hit, the ball is easily entered from the end of the special game until the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, and if the second big hit symbol is a big hit, the special game It shifts to the easy-to-enter state from the end of the process until a small hit occurs. Only one of the first condition and the second condition may be adopted, that is, the end condition of the easy ball entry state may adopt only the first condition regardless of the jackpot symbol. However, only the second condition may be adopted. Moreover, as a more preferable example, the first condition and the second condition may be combined. For example, either (1) the number of symbol fluctuations after the transition to the easy entry state reaches 100 times, or the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit after the transition to the easy entry state is satisfied. When the ball is easily entered, the ball entry easy state is terminated, or (2) the number of symbol fluctuations after the transition to the ball entry easy state reaches 100 times, or the hit / fail judgment is made after the transition to the ball entry easy state. The number of times that the result is a small hit may be 50 times, or the easy-to-enter state may be terminated when either of them is satisfied.

Other configurations and modified examples are the same as those in the first embodiment. For example, a specification may be made in which the first game is preferentially executed so that the first game and the second game are not executed at the same time at least in a high base state. That is, when the main display control means 250 waits for the fluctuation display of one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 when the fluctuation display is performed, the fluctuation start timing is reached at least in the high base state. Is executed with priority given to the digestion of the first hold, that is, the variable display of the first special symbol 51, even if the lottery value is held as the second hold. In this case, the frequency with which the second special symbol 52 fluctuates, that is, the digestion rate of the second hold becomes slow, and the ball output rate of the second game in the high base state is less likely to exceed 1, and the ball output rate is within an appropriate range. It becomes easier to control.

For example, in the first gaming state (for example, high probability high base state 624), the first variation pattern determining means 231 has a relative reachless deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51 as in the first embodiment. The variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so as to be longer. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so as to be relatively long when the number of the first hold reaches a predetermined number or more, and becomes longer as the number of the first hold increases. You may decide as follows. As a result, the more the ball is hit aiming at the first starting port 11, the slower the digestion speed of the second hold, so that it becomes easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11. However, as in the first embodiment, the determination that the reachless out-of-reach fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 becomes relatively long is not carried out in the so-called high-probability high-base state 624 immediately after the first hit, and is carried out during continuous chan. It may be carried out only in the high probability high base state 624. That is, in the high-probability high-base state 624 that shifts when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail determination means 221 or the second hit / fail determination means 222 becomes a big hit in the low-probability low-base state 620, the high that shifts thereafter. The fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is determined so as to be relatively shorter than the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 in the high probability base state 624. Further, in the high-probability high-base state 624, the first special symbol 51 is used in the high-probability high-base state 624, which is shifted to the case where the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means 221 or the second hit / miss determination means 222 is a big hit. The fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is determined so that the deviation fluctuation time of is relatively long. As a modification, the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so that the reach-free deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51 is relatively short in the high-probability high-base state 624. For example, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so that the non-reach-out deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 is shorter than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52, or, for example, a high base. The fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so that the non-reach-out deviation time of the first special symbol 51 in the state is shorter than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 in the low base state. The fluctuation time of the 1 special symbol 51 may be determined to be relatively long when the number of the first hold reaches a predetermined number or more, or to be long as the number of the first hold is large. You may. In this way, the more the ball is hit at the first starting port 11, the faster the digestion speed of the second hold is, so that the digestion speed of the second hold can be adjusted depending on how the player hits. As a further modification, the above-mentioned determination that the reachless out-of-reach fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 becomes relatively long is not carried out in the high probability high base state 624 during the continuous chan, and the high probability immediately after the first hit is high. It may be carried out only in the high base state 624. That is, in the high-probability high-base state 624, the low-probability low-base state is shifted to when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail determination means 221 or the second hit / fail determination means 222 is a big hit. In 620, it is relatively shorter than the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 in the high-probability high-base state 624, which is shifted when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means 221 or the second hit / miss judgment means 222 becomes a big hit. The variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so as to be. In this way, immediately after the first hit, where there is a good chance that the first hold still remains, you can congratulate the transition to the high-probability high-base state 624, or play in the high-probability high-base state 624. It is possible to secure a time for executing a special effect such as explaining the sex and the content of the effect as a variable time.

Further, for example, the specifications may be such that the first game and the second game can be executed in parallel at the same time. The main display control means 250 can display the first special symbol 51 in a variable manner even when the second special symbol 52 is changing, and the second special symbol 52 can be displayed in a variable manner even when the first special symbol 51 is changing. It can be displayed in a variable manner. The second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 has a high probability and high base state 624, and when the number of the first hold is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.), the second special symbol 52 has no reach and is out of reach. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is determined so that the time becomes relatively long. For example, the second special when the number of the first hold is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) and the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 is 0. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be longer than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the symbol 52, or the reachless deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 may be determined regardless of the number of the first hold. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that is longer than the reachless deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51. Further, for example, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the larger the number of the first holdes in the high-probability high-base state 624, the longer the non-reach-out deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52. Even with these, the digestion speed of the second hold becomes slower as the ball is hit aiming at the first starting port 11, so that it becomes easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11. As a further modification, the second variation pattern determining means 232 has a second special symbol when the number of the first hold is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) in the high probability high base state 624. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the reachless deviation variation time of 52 is relatively short. For example, the second special when the number of the first hold is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) and the non-reach out-of-reach variation time of the second special symbol 52 is 0. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be shorter than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the symbol 52, or the reachless deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 may be determined regardless of the number of the first hold. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that is shorter than the reachless deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, and for example, the number of first holds is large in the high probability high base state 624. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the non-reach-out deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52 becomes shorter. In this way, the more the ball is hit at the first starting port 11, the faster the digestion speed of the second hold is, so that the digestion speed of the second hold can be adjusted depending on how the player hits.

Further, for example, the main display control means 250 may be specified to preferentially execute the second game so that the first game and the second game are not executed at the same time. That is, when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is variable-displayed, the main display control means 250 waits for the other variable display, while the change start timing of the second special symbol 52 is reached. In that case, even if the lottery value is held as the first hold, the variable display of the second special symbol 52 is preferentially executed. The second variation pattern determining means 232 has a high probability high base state 624, and when the number of the first hold is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.), the deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52 is The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is determined so as to be relatively long. For example, the second special when the number of the first hold is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) and the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 is 0. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be longer than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the symbol 52, or the reachless deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 may be determined regardless of the number of the first hold. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that is longer than the reachless deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51. Further, for example, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the larger the number of the first holdes in the high-probability high-base state 624, the longer the non-reach-out deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52. Even with these, the digestion speed of the second hold becomes slower as the ball is hit aiming at the first starting port 11, so that it becomes easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11. As a further modification, the second variation pattern determining means 232 has a second special symbol when the number of the first hold is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) in the high probability high base state 624. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the deviation fluctuation time of 52 is relatively short. For example, the number of first holds is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.). ), The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is set so that the non-reach-out deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 is shorter than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 when the number of the first hold is 0. The second special symbol 52 may be determined, or the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the non-reach-out deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 is shorter than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 regardless of the number of the first hold. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined, and for example, in the high-probability high-base state 624, the larger the number of the first hold, the shorter the non-reach-out deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52. The variation pattern may be determined. In this way, the more the ball is hit at the first starting port 11, the faster the digestion speed of the second hold is, so that the digestion speed of the second hold can be adjusted depending on how the player hits.

<Third Example> Left-handed warning in small hit rush Since the basic configuration of the third example is the same as that of the first and second examples, the description of common points is omitted and the same as the first and second examples. The differences will be mainly explained.

In a high-probability low-base state, a high-probability high-base state, a low-probability high-base state, etc. in which a small hit rush is executed, the player hits the ball with the aim of entering the second starting port 12. .. On the other hand, even in the low-probability low-base state where the small hit rush, the high-probability high-base state, and the low-probability high-base state are not executed, if the ball is hit right and entered the second starting port 12, the high-probability low-base state or The deviation fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the high-probability high-base state and the deviation fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the case of left-handed (low-probability low-base state) are extremely long compared to the deviation fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. A pattern is selected, and the game efficiency drops more than necessary. In order to avoid such a disadvantageous situation for the player, a visual or auditory warning is issued to the player to urge the player to hit the left side aiming at the first starting port 11. In addition, recognizing that left-handed hitting is strongly recommended, a player who dares to take the risk of a decrease in game efficiency and hits right-handed with the aim of generating a small hit by entering the second starting port 12. Considering the disadvantage of the game store due to such a way of hitting, a strong warning to encourage left-handed hitting when the ball enters the second starting port 12 (hereinafter, "left-handed hitting") Also called "warning", it is a guidance display that is displayed when it is detected that you are hitting right even though you should hit left, and strongly urges the player to return to hitting left. Guidance display) is issued. The left-handed warning is a high-base state (note that when it is simply referred to as a "high-base state" in this way, it is at least either a "low-probability high-base state" or a "high-probability high-base state"). The degree of emphasis of the notification to the player is higher than the right-handed guidance displayed in the situation where right-handed is recommended such as a small hit rush, and the degree of emphasis is close to the warning of cheating or error. You may. It should be noted that the left-handed warning may be issued when passing through the operating port arranged on the right side of the board instead of the second starting port 12.

In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, a warning prompting the player to hit the ball aiming at the first start port 11 is output by a predetermined output means for at least a predetermined time when the ball enters the second start port 12. To do. The predetermined output means referred to here is, for example, blinking of the decorative lamp 111 or output of a loud warning sound from the speaker 108, which may be controlled by the sub CPU 310 or the effect control means 304, or may be connected to the amusement shop side computer. The external information output terminal 160 may be controlled by the main CPU 290. The predetermined time, which is the warning output period, may differ depending on the type of output means. For example, the blinking period of the decorative lamp 111 may be 30 seconds, and the output period of the warning sound may be 10 seconds. If the ball enters the second starting port 12 again during the output of such a warning, the measurement timer of the output period of the warning being output is reset, and the output of the warning over a predetermined time is restarted. As a result, it is possible to issue a warning regarding appropriate striking according to the game state and the launch status of the game ball, and it is possible to design the ball to be easily kept within a suitable range without impairing the originally intended game performance. it can. Further, the state in which such a left-handed warning is executed is referred to as an output normal state.

If the second hold reaches the upper limit during the output of the left-handed warning, the left-handed warning is switched from the output normal state to the output restricted state. When the second hold is full, even if the ball is entered into the second starting port 12, the chances of hit / fail judgment do not increase and there is no merit to continue right-handed, so it is considered that the player will stop right-handed. is there. It is also because even if the second hold is full and the right-handed hit is continued, the chances of winning or failing judgment do not increase, so that there is little disadvantage for the game store. The output restriction state referred to here may be, for example, a stop of the left-handed warning, or a process of lowering the level of the left-handed warning such as the emission intensity of the decorative lamp 111 and the volume of the warning sound from a strong level to a weak level. (For example, the emission intensity may be weakened from the output normal state, or the volume of the warning sound may be reduced from the output normal state). If a ball entering the second starting port 12 is detected again in a state where a part of the second hold is digested and the ball is less than the upper limit in the output restricted state, the output restricted state is immediately released and left. The hit warning is resumed.

If a ball enters the first starting port 11 while the left-handed warning is being output, it is considered that the right-handed player has stopped and the left-handed player has started, and the left-handed warning is terminated. In addition, when the game state changes to a situation where the ball should be entered into the second starting port 12 while the left-handed warning is being output, that is, when the game shifts to a high base state or a small hit rush (high probability low base state) Also when shifting to a special game, the left-handed warning is forcibly terminated.

From the situation where the ball should be hit to the right, that is, the situation where the ball should be hit into the second starting port 12, to the situation where the ball should be hit to the left, that is, the situation where the ball should be hit into the first starting port 11, until a predetermined period elapses. Limits the output of the left-handed warning even in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. The change to the situation that should be left-handed is, for example, the end of the high base state (when the high probability high base state whose period is limited by the upper limit of the number of symbol fluctuations ends and shifts to the low probability low base state, or the symbol change. Small hit rush due to the end of the low-probability high-base state whose period is limited by the upper limit of the number of times and transition to the low-probability low-base state) or the end of the probability fluctuation state whose period is limited by the upper limit of the number of symbol fluctuations Is the end of. Even if the situation changes to left-handed due to such a high base state or the end of the small hit rush, even if the player is delayed in switching to left-handed immediately after the end of the right-handed situation, for a while. Is to allow this. The limitation of the output of the left-handed warning here may be, for example, lowering the intensity level of the warning, or may not output the left-handed warning itself. The predetermined period for limiting the output of the left-handed warning may be until a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the high base state or the small hit rush, or from the end of the high base state or the small hit rush. It may be until a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) of symbol variation display and entry into the second starting port 12 are performed. Further, even immediately after the end of the high base state or the small hit rush, the output of the left-handed warning may be restricted by considering that the disadvantage is small even if the right-handed hit is made while the second hold is full. .. Further, the output of the left-handed warning may be limited even during the execution of the special game.

Even while limiting the output of the left-handed warning, left-handed guidance for guiding the player to hit the ball aimed at the first starting port 11 (from the situation where the player should hit the right to the situation where the player should hit the left). This is a guidance display that is displayed as a trigger, and the display of the guidance display that urges the player to return to left-handed is not restricted. For example, immediately after changing from a situation that should be hit to the right to a situation that should be hit to the left (for example, the end of the high base state, the high probability high base state whose period is limited by the upper limit of the number of symbol fluctuations ends, and the low probability low base The degree of emphasis for a predetermined period (such as when the state shifts to the state, or when the low-probability high-base state whose period is limited by the upper limit of the number of symbol fluctuations ends and shifts to the low-probability low-base state) is the degree of emphasis as described above. Although the output of the left-handed warning is limited, the guidance display for prompting the player to left-handed is displayed without limitation on the screen of the effect display device 60 or the dedicated decorative lamp.

If there are more than a predetermined number of balls entering the second starting port 12 while limiting the output of the left-handed warning, the restriction is released. The predetermined number here exceeds the number that can be entered if the right-handed ball is continued by inertia immediately after the end of the situation where the right-handed ball should be hit, and it can be inferred that the right-handed ball is intentionally continued. Number, for example, 10 balls.

As a modification, in the high base state or the high probability low base state (small hit rush), the player is aimed at the second start port 12 for at least a predetermined time when the ball enters the first start port 11. A right-handed warning prompting the player to hit the ball may be output. When the ball enters the second starting port 12 or changes to the situation where the ball should be entered into the first starting port 11 during the output of the right-handed warning (the period is limited by the upper limit of the number of symbol fluctuations). When the high-probability high-base state ends and shifts to the low-probability low-base state, or when the low-probability high-base state whose period is limited by the upper limit of the number of symbol fluctuations ends and shifts to the low-probability low-base state) Ends the right-handed warning during output.

FIG. 36 is a time chart showing the relationship between the change in the gaming state and the timing of the left-handed warning. In this figure, the relationship between (a) game state, (b) left-handed, (c) right-handed, (d) warning light emission, and (e) warning sound timing is illustrated. In (a), the period 650 is a small hit rush (high probability low base state) or a high base state, and the period 652 is a low probability low base state. In the period 650, even if the ball entering the second starting port 12 by right-handed hit is detected at the timing of S940 in (c), the left-handed warning of (d) and (e) is not output. When the period 950 ends in S942 and the period is switched to the period 652 in the low probability low base state, the output of the left-handed warning is limited for the immediately following 20 seconds, and even if the right-handed warning is detected in S944 in that period, the left-handed warning is issued. Not output. When the restriction on the left-handed warning is lifted at the timing of S946 20 seconds after S942, when the right-handed hit is detected at the timing of S948, the left-handed warning is started to emit light as shown in (d), and (e). ), A left-handed warning sound starts to be output. The warning sound of (e) ends at S950 10 seconds after the start, but the warning light emission of (d) continues for 30 seconds, and if a right-handed hit is detected again in S952 during that period, the warning light emission period is measured. The timer is reset and the light emission for 30 seconds is started again, and the output of the warning sound is also restarted. The warning sound of (e) ends at S954 10 seconds after the start, and the warning light emission of (d) ends at S956 30 seconds after reset. After that, when the right-handed hit is detected again in S958, the left-handed warnings of (d) and (e) are restarted, but when the right-handed hit of (b) is detected, the left-handed hits of (d) and (e) are restarted. The warning ends. As a modification, when the right-handed hit is detected again in S958, the left-handed warnings of (d) and (e) are restarted, and even if the right-handed hit of (b) is detected, (d) and (e) The left-handed warning may be configured to continue until the specified time.

<Fourth Example> Relationship between the type of special game and the small hit rush Since the basic configuration of the fourth embodiment is the same as that of the first to third embodiments, the description of common points is omitted and the first to third embodiments are performed. The differences from the example will be mainly explained.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the basic game in the embodiment, a ball is obtained by a continuous chan in which a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 4R probability variation jackpot, in which the profit given during the execution of the special game is relatively large, is continuous. It is a game to go. On the other hand, even if a 2R jackpot with a relatively small profit is generated during the execution of the special game in the process of continuous chan, if the jackpot is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the special game is being executed. In addition to the profit given, a derivative game is provided in which the profit given during the execution of the small hit rush is generated. As a result, the small hit rush occurs only from the situation where the player suffers a defeat in a production such as a battle production that incites whether or not a big hit with a relatively large profit is generated during the execution of a special game. It is possible to realize a novel playability of getting. In addition, the profit is larger when the profit of the 2R probability variation jackpot and the profit of the small hit rush are totaled than the jackpot in which the profit given during the execution of the special game such as the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 4R probability variation jackpot is relatively large. It is possible to realize a novel playability of becoming, and it is possible to pay attention to a big hit with a relatively small big hit profit. That is, if only the expected value of the number of prize balls won during the special game is simply compared, the expected value of the 10R probability variation jackpot and the 4R probability variation jackpot is larger than that of the 2R probability variation jackpot, but the 10R probability variation jackpot and the 4R probability variation jackpot and the 2R probability variation jackpot are higher. From the difference between the expected value of the number of winning prize balls and the number of winning prize balls in the small hit rush (from the occurrence of the small hit rush to the occurrence of the next big hit and the end of the small hit rush Since the expected value (the number of game balls that can be obtained by the game) is larger, the total of the profit of the 2R probability variation jackpot and the profit of the small hit rush is larger than the profit of the 10R probability variation jackpot and the 4R probability variation jackpot. In addition, since it is not necessary to give more profit than necessary in the high base state because a relatively large profit is given to the player by the small hit rush in the high probability low base state, the ball output rate is within a suitable range. It can be designed to be easy to fit in.

First, the result of the hit / fail judgment in the second special symbol 52, which becomes the main player of the game in the high probability high base state (corresponding to the second starting port 12 in which the player aims to enter the ball in the high probability high base state), is a big hit. As the types of special games executed in the case of, the first special game in which the profit given during the execution of the special game is relatively large and the profit given during the execution of the special game are relatively small. There is a second special game. The first special game referred to here is, for example, a 10R probability variation jackpot and a 4R probability variation jackpot, and the second special game is, for example, a 2R probability variation jackpot and a 2R normal jackpot. After the end of the first special game, the probability becomes high base state 624. On the other hand, after the end of the second special game, the high probability low base state 626 or the low probability high base state 622 is reached. Specifically, if it is a 2R probability variation jackpot, it becomes a high probability low base state 626, and if it is a 2R normal jackpot, it becomes a low probability high base state 622.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the relationship between the type of special game, the effect of the transition destination, and the game state. If the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit in the high probability high base state 624 or the high probability low base state 626, "Battle start !!" is displayed as shown in the battle production screen 670, and the special game to be executed after that is displayed. A battle effect is executed in which a ally character and an enemy character fight to incite whether or not it is a special game (big hit) with a relatively large profit. When the type of the special game is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 4R probability variation jackpot, a "victory" scene indicating that the result is advantageous to the player is displayed as a result of the battle effect. The probability that the type of special game is a 10R probability variation jackpot is about 35%, and in that case, it is displayed as "HYPER BONUS !!" as shown in the first bonus screen 671 and high after the 10R special game is executed. It shifts to the high probability base state 624. The probability that the type of special game is a 4R probability variation jackpot is about 30%, and in that case, after the 4R special game is executed with "BONUS !!" displayed as shown in the second bonus screen 672, the probability is high. It shifts to the high base state 624. In total, there is a 65% chance that the battle production will be "victory."

When the type of the special game is 2R probability variation jackpot or 2R normal jackpot, as a result of the battle effect, a scene of "defeat" indicating that the result is disadvantageous to the player is displayed. However, whether or not to give a chance to reverse from the "defeat", that is, whether or not the 2R jackpot is accompanied by a probability change, or whether or not it is accompanied by a transition to a high probability low base state 626 or a low probability high base state 622. The branching effect, which is an effect that incites the game, is executed as the start effect of the special game of the 2R jackpot. In the branch effect, after displaying "Challenge start !!" as shown in the branch effect screen 673, "Press the button!" Is displayed together with the button image as shown in the button screen 674, and the player is asked to press the effect button 109. prompt. The probability of proceeding from the battle production to the branch production, that is, the probability of being "defeated" in the battle production is about 35%. Of the 35%, there is a 15% probability that the 2R probability variation jackpot will result in a "success" branching effect, and a 20% probability that the 2R normal jackpot will result in a "failure" branching effect. When the branch effect is "success", "success !!" is displayed on the challenge success screen 675, and after executing the special game of 2R, the process shifts to the high probability low base state 626. When the branch effect is "failure", "failure !!" is displayed on the challenge failure screen 676, and after executing the special game of 2R, the process shifts to the low probability high base state 622. It should be noted that this branching effect may be executed before the execution of the special game of 2R, that is, during the fluctuation, or during the start demonstration in the special game of 2R.

In the high-probability high-base state 624, the ball output rate is designed to be contained in 1, whereas in the high-probability low-base state 626, there is a small hit rush, so the high-probability low-base is higher than the high-probability high-base state 624. It can be said that the state 626 is a more advantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, the expected value of the total number of prize balls, which is the sum of the number of prize balls in the special game of 2R probability variation jackpot and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the small hit rush, is the number of prize balls and high probability in the special game of 10R jackpot and 4R jackpot. It is larger than the expected value of the total number of prize balls including the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the high base state 624. That is, if only the expected value of the number of prize balls won during the special game is simply compared, the expected value of the 10R probability variation jackpot and the 4R probability variation jackpot is larger than that of the 2R probability variation jackpot, but the 10R probability variation jackpot and the 4R probability variation jackpot and the 2R probability variation jackpot are higher. From the difference between the expected value of the number of winning prize balls and the number of winning prize balls in the small hit rush (from the occurrence of the small hit rush to the occurrence of the next big hit and the end of the small hit rush Since the expected value of (the number of game balls that can be obtained by the game) is larger, the total of the profit of the 2R probability variation jackpot and the profit of the small hit rush is the profit of the 10R probability variation jackpot and the 4R probability variation jackpot and the high probability high base state 624. Greater than the sum of the profits of. Therefore, when considering the profit after the special game, the 10R probability variation jackpot and the 4R probability variation jackpot that shift to the high probability high base state 624 after the special game ends, and the 2R that shifts to the low probability high base state 622 after the special game ends. It can be said that the probability change jackpot is more advantageous to the player.

<Fifth Example> Alternative symbol and simplified symbol Since the basic configuration of the fifth embodiment is the same as that of the first to fourth embodiments, the description of common points is omitted and the differences from the first to fourth embodiments. Will be mainly explained.

FIG. 38 shows the arrangement of the decorative symbol, the alternative symbol, and the simple symbol. (A) shows the basic arrangement relationship of the main decorative symbol 600, the alternative symbol 601 and the simple symbol 602, (b) exemplifies the display mode in the low probability low base state, and (c) is the high probability high base state. And a display mode in a high-probability low-base state will be illustrated.

In FIG. 38 (a), the three main decorative symbols 600 are decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52, and the three symbols are variablely displayed using a large area near the center of the screen. Will be done. The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment has parallel specifications in which the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 can be changed in parallel at the same time, but the main decorative symbol 600 is the first special symbol 51 and the second. It does not correspond to both of the special symbols 52 at the same time, but corresponds to one of the special symbols according to the gaming state. For example, in the first game in which the variation display of the first special symbol 51 is mainly performed by left-handing aiming at the first starting port 11 as in the low probability low base state, the decoration corresponding to the first special symbol 51 The main decorative symbol 600 is displayed in a variable manner as the symbol. On the other hand, in the second game in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol 52 is mainly performed by aiming at the second starting port 12 and hitting right as in the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state, the second special symbol The main decorative symbol 600 is variablely displayed as the decorative symbol corresponding to 52.

As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the alternative symbol 601 and the simplified symbol 602 are variably displayed in a small area smaller than the display area of the main decorative symbol 600 and provided at the corner of the screen. The alternative symbol 601 is a symbol that is displayed in a complementary manner in addition to the display of the main decorative symbol 600 to ensure that the decorative symbol is always displayed at any position on the screen of the effect display device 60. .. For example, even if the main decorative symbol is hidden during the execution of the battle effect, the alternative symbol 601 can be continuously displayed (and displayed in front of the battle effect). The display of decorative patterns is guaranteed. The alternative symbol 601 includes an alternative symbol 601a corresponding to the first special symbol 51 and an alternative symbol 601b corresponding to the second special symbol 52. The alternative symbol 601 is a set of three small symbols corresponding to the main decorative symbol 600 composed of three symbols, and two sets of symbols corresponding to the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. It is a so-called mini decorative pattern that is composed. Just as the main decorative symbol 600 shows a big hit when all three have the same symbol like "444" and "777", the alternative symbol 601 is also the same as all three like "444" and "777". It shows a big hit when it stops in a mode that is aligned with the symbols, and shows a miss when it stops in a mode that is not aligned with the same symbol.

The simplified symbol 602 is a symbol for suggesting whether or not at least one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is being displayed in a variable manner, and for showing the result of the hit / fail determination. The simple symbol 602 includes a simple symbol 602a corresponding to the first special symbol 51 and a simple symbol 602b corresponding to the second special symbol 52, and is variablely displayed in the vicinity of the alternative symbols 601a and 601b, respectively. Further, the simple symbol 602 further includes a simple symbol 602c corresponding to the first special symbol 51 and a simple symbol 602d corresponding to the second special symbol 52, and is variablely displayed at positions away from the alternative symbols 601a and 601b, respectively. To By displaying the simple symbol 602 at a plurality of distant locations, it is possible to guarantee the display of which of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is being displayed in a variable manner. That is, also for this alternative symbol, for example, even if the main decorative symbol is hidden during the execution of a battle effect or the like, the variable display that alternately switches and displays "○" and "×" described later is displayed. By continuing (and displaying it in front of the battle effect), it is guaranteed whether the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 is being displayed in a variable manner. The simple symbol 602 is a symbol that indicates the result of the hit / fail determination related to the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 with simple symbols or figures such as “◯” and “×”. The simple symbol 602 indicates a big hit when it stops at "○", and indicates a miss when it stops at "x". In FIG. 38 (a), for convenience, both the alternative symbol 601a and the alternative symbol 601b are stopped in a mode showing a big hit, but only one is stopped in a mode showing a big hit and the other shows a miss. It is preferable to stop in the mode. Similarly, in FIG. 38 (a), for convenience, both the simple symbol 602a and the simple symbol 602b are stopped in a mode showing a big hit, but only one is stopped in a mode showing a big hit and the other shows a miss. It is preferable to stop in a mode, and further, both the simple symbol 602c and the simple symbol 602d are stopped in a mode showing a big hit, but only one stops in a mode showing a big hit and the other is disengaged. It is preferable to stop in the manner shown.

In the low-probability low-base state of FIG. 38 (b), the main decorative symbol 600a corresponding to the first special symbol 51 is displayed in a variable manner near the center of the screen, and an alternative symbol is displayed in a manner corresponding to the main decorative symbol 600a. 601a is also displayed in a variable manner. The simple symbols 602a and 602c are also displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the first special symbol 51. At this time, the main decorative symbol 600b corresponding to the second special symbol 52 is not displayed, and when the second special symbol 52 is displayed in a variable manner, the simple symbols 602b, 602d and the alternative symbols 601b corresponding to the second special symbol 52 are displayed. It is displayed in a variable manner. The simple symbols 602b and 602d and the alternative symbols 601b in which the fluctuation is stopped are displayed in a mode indicating that they are out of alignment.

In the low-probability high-base state, the high-probability high-base state, and the high-probability low-base state of FIG. The alternative symbol 601b is also variablely displayed in a manner corresponding to the main decorative symbol 600b. The simple symbols 602b and 602d are also displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the second special symbol 52. At this time, the main decorative symbol 600a corresponding to the first special symbol 51 is not displayed, and when the first special symbol 51 is variablely displayed, the simple symbols 602a, 602c and the alternative symbols 601a corresponding to the first special symbol 51 are displayed. It is displayed in a variable manner. The simple symbols 602a and 602c and the alternative symbols 601a in which the fluctuation is stopped are displayed in a mode indicating that they are out of alignment.

Here, in the first hit, that is, in the high base state after the end of the special game related to the big hit of the first special symbol 51 that occurred in the low probability low base state, the fluctuation is stopped at least immediately after shifting to the high base state. When the simple symbols 602a and 602c are displayed in the stopped state in correspondence with the first special symbol 51, they are displayed in the stopped symbol mode of "x" indicating the disconnection (see FIG. 38 (c)). Immediately after the transition to the high base state, the first special symbol 51 remains stopped at the jackpot symbol unless the first winning / losing lottery value is held or the ball enters the first starting port 11, so that it is originally a simple symbol. 602a and 602c should also remain stopped at "○" indicating a big hit. However, after that, when the first special symbol 51 returns to the low-probability low-base state again after a long period of time without being changed (for example, in the low-probability low-base state, the first winning / failing lottery value is not held. The first special symbol 51 stops at the jackpot symbol, the special game is executed, and even in the low-probability high-base state that shifts after that, the hold of the first win / fail lottery value does not occur, and the second special symbol 52 fluctuates 50 times. If the simple symbols 602a and 602c start to fluctuate from "○" when the low-probability high-base state ends and shifts to the low-probability low-base state), from the previous jackpot of the first special symbol 51 Since a long time has already passed, it is difficult to know which jackpot the "○" indicates, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, when the state shifts from the first hit to the high base state, the simple symbols 602a and 602c are forcibly displayed as "x". By starting the first symbol variation of the simplified symbols 602a and 602c (which normally occurs after returning to the low probability low base state again) from the "x" indicating the deviation, the player's confusion is avoided. To do.

Further, after returning from the high-probability low-base state or the high-probability low-base state to the low-probability low-base state, that is, after a long period of time elapses without changing the first special symbol 51 as described above, the low-probability low-base state is restored again. When returning (for example, in the low probability low base state, the first special symbol 51 stops at the jackpot symbol and the special game is executed in the state where the first win / fail lottery value is not held, and then the low probability high base is transferred. Even in the state, the hold of the first winning / failing lottery value does not occur, and the second special symbol 52 fluctuates 50 times to end the low probability high base state and shift to the low probability low base state). The variation display of the main decorative symbol 600 and the alternative symbol 601a corresponding to the symbol variation of the special symbol 51 starts to vary from an irregular deviation mode such as “357”. Normally, a long time has passed since the previous jackpot of the first special symbol 51, and it is decided to start from the jackpot mode with a probability change such as "777" corresponding to the jackpot of the first first special symbol 51 last time. This is because the player may misunderstand that the jackpot immediately before is accompanied by a certain change. Alternatively, even if the player starts with a jackpot mode that does not involve a probability change such as "444" corresponding to the jackpot of the second special symbol 52 immediately before, the player says that the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol 52 has started to fluctuate. This is because there is a risk of misunderstanding.

In addition, even if a big hit of the first special symbol 51 accidentally occurs in a game state other than the low probability low base state, the fluctuation is stopped with the first special symbol 51 in the high base state after the end of the special game. Correspondingly, when the simplified symbols 602a and 602c are displayed in the stopped state, they are displayed as the simplified symbols 602a and 602c in the stopped symbol mode of "x" indicating the disconnection (see FIG. 38 (c)).

Further, when the state shifts from the high-probability low-base state or the high-probability low-base state to the low-probability low-base state, the simple symbol 602b corresponds to the second special symbol 52 whose fluctuation is stopped immediately after the transition to the low-probability low-base state. When 602d is displayed in the stopped state, it is displayed in the stop symbol mode of "x" indicating the disconnection (see FIG. 38 (b)). When the second special symbol 52 at the time of transition to the low probability low base state is a jackpot symbol, the state of being stopped at the jackpot symbol unless the second winning / failing lottery value is held or the ball enters the second starting port 12. Therefore, originally, the simple symbols 602b and 602d should also remain stopped at "○" indicating a big hit. However, after that, when a long time elapses without changing the second special symbol 52 and the state shifts to the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state again (for example, in the low probability high base state, the second win / fail lottery value is set. The second special symbol 52 stops at the jackpot symbol and the special game is executed in the state where there is no hold, and even in the low probability high base state that has been transferred after that, the hold of the second win / fail lottery value does not occur, and the first special symbol When 51 fluctuates 50 times, the low-probability high-base state ends and shifts to the low-probability low-base state. After that, the first special symbol 51 in the low-probability low-base state without the second winning / failing lottery value being held. When the simple symbols 602b and 602d start to fluctuate from "○" when the special game is executed at the jackpot symbol and then shifts to the low probability high base state), the second special symbol 52 Since a long time has already passed since the last big hit, it is difficult to understand which big hit the "○" indicates, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, when the state shifts from the high base state or the high probability low base state to the low probability low base state, the simple symbols 602b and 602d are forcibly displayed as "x". By starting the first symbol variation of the simplified symbols 602b and 602d (usually occurring after shifting to the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state again) from the "x" indicating the deviation. Avoid confusion for players.

In addition, after shifting from the low-probability low-base state to the low-probability high-base state or the high-probability high-base state again, that is, after a long period of time has passed without changing the second special symbol 52, the low-probability high-base state or high again. When shifting to the high-probability high-base state (for example, in the low-probability high-base state, the second special symbol 52 stops at the jackpot symbol and the special game is executed without holding the second winning / failing lottery value, and then the transition occurs. Even in the low-probability high-base state, the second winning / failing lottery value is not held, and the first special symbol 51 fluctuates 50 times to end the low-probability high-base state and shift to the low-probability low-base state. , When the first special symbol 51 stops at the jackpot symbol in the low-probability low-base state without the second winning / failing lottery value being held, the special game is executed, and then the game shifts to the low-probability high-base state) The variation display of the main decorative symbol 600 and the alternative symbol 601b corresponding to the symbol variation of the second special symbol 52 of No. 2 starts to fluctuate from an irregular deviation mode such as "357". Normally, a long time has passed since the previous big hit of the second special symbol 52, and the game starts from a big hit mode without a probability change such as "444" corresponding to the previous big hit of the second special symbol 52. This is because the player may misunderstand that the jackpot immediately before is not accompanied by a certain change. Alternatively, even if the player starts with a jackpot mode accompanied by a probability change such as "777" corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol 51 immediately before, the player is told that the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol 51 has started to change. This is because there is a risk of misunderstanding.

On the other hand, if a big hit with a probability change occurs from the high base state or the high probability low base state and the high base state or the high probability low base state is restored again after the end of the special game, the next first second special symbol 52 The main decorative symbol 600 and the alternative symbol 601b corresponding to the symbol variation may start the variation from the jackpot mode of the immediately preceding main decorative symbol 600 and the alternative symbol 601b such as "777".

In the low-probability low-base state of FIG. 38 (b), the simple symbols 602b and 602d corresponding to the second special symbol 52, which is not the main player of the game, are always displayed on the screen as long as a certain degree of visibility is secured. There is an idea that there is little need to let them do it. Therefore, the simple symbol 602b and the simple symbol 602d corresponding to the second special symbol 52 are hidden after a predetermined first time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol 52, and are predetermined from the scheduled fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol 52. The simple symbol 602b and the simple symbol 602d are undisplayed and put into the display state before the second time. For example, the simple symbol 602b and the simple symbol 602d are hidden 1 second after the start of the fluctuation of the 2nd special symbol 52, and the simple symbol 602b and the simple symbol 602d are displayed 1 second before the scheduled stop timing of the fluctuation of the 2nd special symbol 52. Make it a state.

However, for the first symbol fluctuation after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the effect control means 304 may not be able to recognize the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation stop timing. Therefore, 1 second from the first fluctuation start after the power is turned on. Even after the lapse of time, the simple symbol 602b and the simple symbol 602d are not hidden. Immediately after shifting from the high-probability high-base state or the high-probability low-base state to the low-probability low-base state, there is a high possibility that the hold of the first winning / failing lottery value is zero, but the second winning / failing lottery value is Since there is a high possibility that the hold is 1 or more, it is highly possible that the first symbol change immediately after the transition to the low-probability low-base state is not the first special symbol 51 but the second special symbol 52. In such a situation, if the simple symbol 602b and the simple symbol 602d are hidden, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize which of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is being displayed in a variable manner. The simple symbol 602b and the simple symbol 602d are not hidden even after 1 second has passed from the first symbol change immediately after the transition to the state (during the initial symbol change immediately after the transition to the low probability low base state, the simple symbol b and The simple symbol 602d is not hidden, or during the first symbol change immediately after the transition to the low probability low base state, the simple symbol b and the simple symbol 602d are displayed until 10 seconds, which is 1 second or more from the start of the fluctuation, elapses. Do not hide).

If the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restarted due to some trouble or operation during the symbol fluctuation (when the power is restored after the power is turned off), the main decorative symbol 600 is restarted with the display in the high-speed fluctuation state. This is because there is a high possibility that the effect control means 304 cannot recognize which of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 should be displayed as the main decorative symbol 600 immediately after the power is turned on. Further, when the main decorative symbol 600 is restarted in the fluctuation stop state, if the fluctuation time is a long fluctuation pattern such as 3 minutes or more, nothing is variablely displayed for a long time, which is not preferable as a return screen. .. The display of the high-speed fluctuation state is always a fluctuation at a constant speed (high speed), and the speed is not decelerated until the timing of the fluctuation stop, and from the high-speed fluctuation state at the timing of the fluctuation stop. It switches to the stopped state.

<Sixth Example>
Since the basic configuration of the sixth embodiment is common to the first to fifth embodiments, the description of the common points is omitted, and the differences from the first to fifth embodiments, particularly the fifth embodiment having a strong relevance The differences will be mainly explained.

In this embodiment, a logo movable accessory that operates in front of the screen is provided so as to cover and overlap at least a part of the screen along the screen of the effect display device 60. Further, a light guide plate, which has the same area as the screen of the effect display device 60 and is a plate-shaped effect object having transparency and light emitting function, is provided so as to cover the entire screen of the effect display device 60. These operate or emit light as part of the production. Here, the display priority of the simple symbol 602 is set higher than other effect displays (for example, a notice effect, a background effect, and a variable effect of the main decorative symbol 600). Therefore, the following adjustments are made so as to reduce the possibility that the movement of the logo movable accessory and the light emission of the light guide plate interfere with the display of the simple symbol 602 and do not interfere with the display of the result of the hit / fail judgment by the simple symbol 602. ..

FIG. 39 shows the arrangement of the logo movable accessory and the light guide plate. (A) exemplifies the arrangement and operation position of the logo movable accessory 680, and (b) exemplifies the arrangement of the light guide plate pattern 681. The logo movable accessory 680 is a decorative movable accessory in which a logo such as a model name of a pachinko gaming machine 100, a theme as a motif, or a character name is imitated, and is formed of a transparent member such as acrylic. A light emitting member such as an LED is built in the movable object. In the normal state, the logo movable accessory 680 is in a stationary state at an initial position where the screen is not covered at all or at least slightly covered above the screen of the effect display device 60 (in FIG. 39 (a), the solid line is shown. The drawn logo movable accessory 680). In this stationary state, not only the main decorative symbol 600, but also all the alternative symbols 601 and the simple symbols 602 are easily visible to the player.

The logo movable accessory 680 operates under the control of the effect control means 304 according to the effect pattern. For example, the logo movable accessory 680 descends while emitting light at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect, that is, slides downward, thereby notifying the player that the jackpot expectation is high. When the lowering motion of the logo movable accessory 680 is completed, the logo is stationary for a predetermined time at the operation completion position covering the substantially central area of the screen of the effect display device 60 (the logo movable shown by the broken line in FIG. 39A). Character 680). When the operation of the logo movable accessory 680 is completed, the support mechanism for supporting the logo movable accessory 680 or the logo movable accessory 680 from the left and right is at a position where it can overlap with the simple symbols 602c and 602d, and these symbols are displayed from the player. It can be difficult to see.

In the low-probability low-base state, the second is when the ball accidentally enters the second starting port 12 or when the second hold stored before the transition to the low-probability low-base state remains after the transition. 2 The special symbol 52 can be displayed in a variable manner, but in the low probability low base state, the second game is not the main game, so the variable time of the second special symbol 52 is set to an extremely long time (for example, 10 minutes). There are times. In the low-probability low-base state, the main decorative symbol 600 is variablely displayed as a symbol corresponding to the first special symbol 51 and does not correspond to the second special symbol 52. Therefore, the simple symbol 602b is a symbol corresponding to the second special symbol 52. , 602d should be clearly indicated. However, in particular, the visibility of the simple symbol 602d may be interfered with by the operation completion state of the logo movable accessory 680, and the player knows at what timing the fluctuation stops within an extremely long fluctuation time. Since it is difficult, it may be difficult for the player to clearly display the fluctuation stop.

Therefore, when the second special symbol 52 starts to fluctuate in the low-probability low-base state, the timing is set to a predetermined first time before the scheduled fluctuation stop timing (timing when the fluctuation stop state starts) of the second special symbol 52. , The operation of the logo movable accessory 680 corresponding to the first special symbol 51 is restricted over a predetermined second time longer than the first time. The first time is, for example, 5 seconds, and the second time is, for example, 7.5 seconds. The first time is the time required to secure the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol 52 in the operation time required for the reciprocating operation of the logo movable accessory 680 (the operation of returning to the initial position from the initial position through the operation completion position). It may be the time obtained by adding (the time allowed as an error with respect to the actual fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol 52). For example, the operation time of the logo movable accessory 680 (the time required for the reciprocating operation, the time required for the operation from the initial position to the operation completion position, or the time required for the operation from the operation completion position to the initial position may be 4 seconds). The first time is a total of 5 seconds when the fluctuation stop guarantee time of the second special symbol 52 (the time before the stop for recognizing that the simplified symbols 602c and 602d change and then stop) is 1 second. It becomes. The second time is the stop time of the second special symbol 52 in the first time (the time for actually maintaining the stop display, and the time may differ between the case of a miss and the case of a small hit). And the time for guaranteeing the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 (the time after the stop for recognizing that the fluctuation starts from the state where the simple symbols 602c and 602d are stopped, and the actual time of the second special symbol 52. It may be the time obtained by adding the time allowed as an error to the fluctuation start timing of. For example, the first time is 5 seconds, the stop time of the second special symbol 52 is 1.5 seconds (0.5 seconds in the case of a miss, 1.5 seconds in the case of a small hit), and the second special. When the fluctuation start guaranty time of the symbol 52 is 1 second, the total of 7.5 seconds (6.5 seconds in the case of a miss and 7.5 seconds in the case of a small hit) is the second time.

As described above, in the low-probability low-base state, the player can clearly display and visually recognize the change stop and change start of the simple symbol 602 corresponding to the second special symbol 52. It should be noted that the operation limitation of the logo movable accessory 680 is only an exceptional control, and it is preferable in design that such control is minimal. Therefore, for example, the variation of the second special symbol 52 in a low probability low base state. There are no restrictions on extremely infrequent events such as the movement of the logo movable accessory 680 corresponding to the display. However, as a modification, the specifications may be such that the operation restriction of the logo movable accessory 680 corresponding to the second special symbol 52 is similarly provided before and after the stop timing of the simple symbol 602 corresponding to the first special symbol 51. Alternatively, the specification may be such that the logo movable accessory 680 is not operated in correspondence with the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in the low probability low base state. On the other hand, in the gaming states other than the low-probability low-base state, that is, the high-probability high-base state, the high-probability low-base state, and the low-probability high-base state, which are mainly right-handed, the logo movable accessory There is no operation limit of 680. However, as a modification, even in the high-probability high-base state, the high-probability low-base state, and the low-probability high-base state, which are mainly right-handed gaming states, the simple symbol 602 corresponding to the second special symbol 52 Before and after the stop timing, the operation restriction of the logo movable accessory 680 corresponding to the first special symbol 51 (the operation restriction described above) may be provided, or before and after the stop timing of the simple symbol 602 corresponding to the first special symbol 51. The operation restriction of the logo movable accessory 680 corresponding to the second special symbol 52 (the operation restriction described above) may be provided. The number of types of effects that can be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 60 is more when the logo movable accessory 680 is in the operation completion position than when it is in the initial position. For example, when it is in the initial position, the ally character, the enemy character, and the advance notice effect are displayed, while when it is in the operation completion position, only the ally character is displayed. Further, the number of light emitting decorative objects such as the decorative lamp 111 blinking on the board surface of the game board 80 is larger when the logo movable accessory 680 is in the operation completion position than when it is in the initial position. For example, when it is in the initial position, only one out of ten light emitting decorations blinks, while when it is in the operation completion position, nine out of ten light emitting decorations blink. Further, the button effect for prompting the pressing of the effect button 109 is less likely to occur or does not occur when the logo movable accessory 680 is in the operation completion position than when it is in the initial position. Further, when the power is restored from the power failure, the logo movable accessory 680 can perform the initial operation, and the time required for the initial operation is, for example, 10 seconds. Further, the fluctuation pattern in which the logo movable accessory 680 does not operate is selected within 10 seconds from the start of the symbol fluctuation, rather than the probability that the fluctuation pattern in which the logo movable accessory 680 can operate is selected within 10 seconds from the start of the symbol fluctuation. The probability is higher, or the logo movable accessory 680 does not have a fluctuation pattern in which the logo movable accessory 680 can operate within 10 seconds from the start of symbol fluctuation.

In FIG. 39 (b), the light guide plate pattern 681 is a pattern drawn on a light guide plate which is a transparent member such as acrylic superimposed on the front surface of the screen of the effect display device 60. The light guide plate has a pattern drawn by surface processing, and is a directing mechanism in which the pattern shines faintly and appears to stand out due to the light of the LED emitted from the side. The light guide plate pattern 681a shown in the figure is a pattern that imitates the face of an ally character (the same character as the ally character in the battle production) used as a motif in the pachinko gaming machine 100, and the light guide plate patterns 681b and 681c are lightning bolts. It seems that When at least one of the light guide plate patterns 681a to 681 overlaps with the simple symbol 602, the visibility of the simple symbol 602 may be deteriorated.

In the low-probability low-base state, the second is when the ball accidentally enters the second starting port 12 or when the second hold stored before the transition to the low-probability low-base state remains after the transition. 2 The special symbol 52 can be displayed in a variable manner, but in the low probability low base state, the second game is not the main game, so the variable time of the second special symbol 52 is set to an extremely long time (for example, 10 minutes). There are times. In the low-probability low-base state, the main decorative symbol 600 is variablely displayed as a symbol corresponding to the first special symbol 51 and does not correspond to the second special symbol 52. Therefore, the simple symbol 602b is a symbol corresponding to the second special symbol 52. , 602d should be clearly indicated. However, in particular, the visibility of the simple symbol 602d may be interfered with by the light emission of the light guide plate, and it is difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the fluctuation stops within an extremely long fluctuation time. It can be difficult to clearly display the fluctuation stop.

Therefore, the light guide plate corresponding to the first special symbol 51 is used for a predetermined fourth time longer than the third time from a timing three times earlier than the scheduled fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol 52. Limit light emission. The third time is, for example, 1 second, and the fourth time is, for example, 3.5 seconds. The third time is a time for ensuring the light emission control of the light guide plate. The reason why the third time is shorter than the first time described above is that unlike the logo movable accessory 680, which requires a certain amount of time to operate, the light emission control of the light guide plate, which is a non-movable member, is instantaneous (logo movable accessory). If it is 680, it takes time to operate, but for the light guide plate, it is only necessary to interrupt the light emission, so that it is an instant), and the execution immediately before the stop timing of the second special symbol 52 is sufficient. The fourth time is the time for guaranteeing the stop time of the second special symbol 52 and the fluctuation start of the second special symbol 52 in the third time (as an error with respect to the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol 52). It may be the time obtained by adding the permissible time). For example, the third time is 1 second (the time before the stop for recognizing that the simple symbols 602c and 602d are stopped after fluctuating), and the stop time of the second special symbol 52 is 1.5 seconds (in the case of deviation). Is 0.5 seconds, in the case of a small hit, it may be 1.5 seconds), and the fluctuation start guaranty time of the second special symbol 52 (simple symbols 602c, 602d are recognized to start fluctuating from the stopped state). This is the time after the stop for the purpose, and when the time allowed as an error with respect to the actual fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol 52 is 1 second, the total is 3.5 seconds (2.5 seconds in the case of deviation). In the case of a small hit, 3.5 seconds may be set) is the fourth time.

As described above, in the low-probability low-base state, the player can clearly display and visually recognize the change stop and change start of the simple symbol 602 corresponding to the second special symbol 52. Further, the same light emission restriction may be implemented in a gaming state other than the low probability low base state. However, in a gaming state other than the low-probability low-base state (the above-mentioned gaming state mainly in right-handed striking), the symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 is extremely infrequent, so the light emission restriction of the light guide plate is minimized. Therefore, the light emission limit timing of the light guide plate may be the same as the stop timing of the simple symbol 602d corresponding to the second special symbol 52, or the light emission limit time may be shorter than the light emission limit time in the low probability low base state (for example, 2). Seconds). As a further modification, in a gaming state other than the low-probability low-base state (the above-mentioned gaming state mainly composed of right-handed hitting), the same light emission restriction may not be performed.

In this embodiment, the operation of the logo movable accessory 680 and the configuration of limiting the light emission of the light guide plate have been described in order to ensure the visibility of the simple symbol 602, but in the modified example, the effect displayed on the effect display device 60 is described. The display may be restricted before or after the stop timing of the simple symbol 602 for the display. Further, as shown in FIG. 39A, an intermediate sensor 682 for detecting the presence of the logo movable accessory 680 is provided at an intermediate position between the initial position and the operation completion position of the logo movable accessory 680, and the above-mentioned restriction execution is performed. The logo movable accessory 680 may be restricted from exceeding the position of the intermediate sensor 682 when the condition is satisfied. Even if the logo movable accessory 680 descends to the position of the intermediate sensor 682, the visibility of the simple symbol 602 is not hindered, so that the operation halfway is permitted. For example, if the logo movable accessory 680 has an effect of lowering by 3 steps and an effect of lowering by 2 steps, it is possible to set whether or not there is a restriction such that the effect of lowering by 3 steps is limited but the effect of lowering by 2 steps is not limited. is there. In another modification, the stop timing of the alternative symbol 601 is to ensure not only the visibility of the simple symbol 602 but also the visibility of the alternative symbol 601 or mainly to ensure the visibility of the alternative symbol 601. The operation of the logo movable accessory 680 and the light emission of the light guide plate may be restricted before and after.

<7th Example> Pseudo-small hit game production Since the basic configuration of the 7th Example is the same as that of the 1st to 6th Examples, the description of the common points is omitted and the same as the 1st to 6th Examples. The differences, especially the differences from the fourth embodiment, which is strongly related, will be mainly described.

As described in the fourth embodiment, the basic game is a game in which the profit from the big hit is relatively large, and the 10R probable big hit or the 4R probable big hit is continuously played to obtain the payout. On the other hand, even if a 2R jackpot with a relatively small jackpot profit occurs in the process of Ren Chan, if the jackpot is a 2R probability variation jackpot, a profit from the small hit rush is generated in addition to the profit from the jackpot. There is a derivative game of letting you do it.

On the other hand, even if it corresponds to the 2R probability variation jackpot where a small hit rush occurs, if the next jackpot occurs in the first symbol change because the game state that shifts after that is the probability variation state. , There is a possibility that the player will shift to the next game state without letting the player experience the continuous small hit game by the small hit rush. Therefore, during the special game related to the 2R probability variation big hit, a game is realized in which the same operation as the small hit rush and the same effect can be experienced ahead of schedule, and the next big hit is avoided in advance without experiencing the small hit rush. ..

FIG. 40 is a time chart showing the relationship between the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the production timing in the special game of the 2R probability variation jackpot. (A) shows the effect content and the effect timing, and (b) shows the opening timing of the big winning opening. The period 660 is the start production period in the special game of the 2R probability variation jackpot, the period 661 is the unit game period of the first round, the period 662 is the unit game period of the second round, and the period 663 is the end of the special game. This is the production period (end demo period).

If the high probability low base state is planned after the end of the special game related to the 2R big hit (2R probability variation big hit), the high probability low base state, that is, the effect executed in the small hit rush is the period of the special game related to the 2R big hit In addition to executing the above, in one or more of the plurality of unit games included in the special game, the relatively short opening of the large winning opening is executed a plurality of times for each unit game. That is, during the special game of the 2R probability variation big hit, the production mode shifts to the same or similar production mode as the small hit rush, and the same or similar production as the small hit rush is executed. The small hit rush effect in this embodiment is an effect in which the display of a pattern in which a ally character defeats weak enemy characters one after another is repeated for each small hit game. The opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening also reproduces the opening / closing pattern similar to the small hit game in the small hit rush. In addition, the effect executed during the special game period is seamlessly continued as a small hit rush effect even in the high probability low base state after the end of the special game.

Explaining along the figure, in the period 660, which is the start demo time of the special game, the first pseudo small hit variation effect that imitates the symbol variation effect in which the small hit occurs is executed (period 700, about 1.4). Seconds), the first pseudo small hit start effect imitating the start demo effect of the small hit game is executed (period 701, about 0.1 seconds). In the pseudo small hit start effect, a pattern is displayed in which a weak enemy character appears on the screen. Here, the period 660, which is the actual start demo time of the special game, ends, and the period 661, which is the first unit game period of the special game, is reached. The pseudo-small hit variation effect is the same as the effect during change in the high-probability low-base state. For example, it is an effect of walking while being wary of a ally character being attacked by a weak enemy character. Since it is medium (during a unit game), the decorative symbol is hidden, the alternative symbol is also hidden, and the simple symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a big hit (a mode of "○"). (In the high-probability, low-base state, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the alternative symbol and the simple symbol are also displayed in a variable manner). This also applies to the pseudo small hit variation effect described later. In addition, as described above, the decorative symbol is hidden and the alternative symbol is also hidden while the effect during the special game other than the pseudo small hit fluctuation effect is being executed, and the simple symbol is displayed. Is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a big hit (a mode of "○"). In addition, a background effect corresponding to a high-probability low-base state is displayed over a period of 660 to 663.

In the period 661, the large winning opening is opened in S1000, and the first pseudo small hit unit game production that imitates the unit game production of the small hit game is executed (period 702, about 3 seconds). In the pseudo small hit unit game production, a pattern is displayed in which a weak enemy character is attacked each time the ball enters the large winning opening. At S1001, the big prize opening is closed, and the first pseudo small hit end effect that imitates the end demo effect of the small hit game is executed (period 703, about 0.5 seconds). In the pseudo small hit end production, at the same time as closing the big winning opening, a pattern that explodes a weak enemy character that has already been attacked is displayed, and the number of balls entered or the prize at the opening of the first big winning opening The number of balls is displayed. The above period 700 to period 703 is defined as one pseudo small hit generation and small hit game production, and this is repeated up to 6 times during the special game of 2 rounds.

As the second pseudo small hit generation and the small hit game, the second pseudo small hit fluctuation effect is first executed (period 704), and the second pseudo small hit start effect is executed (period 705). The large winning opening is opened in S1002, the second pseudo small hit unit game production is executed (period 706), the large winning opening is closed in S1003, and the second pseudo small hit ending production is performed. It is executed (period 707).

As the third pseudo small hit generation and small hit game, first, the third pseudo small hit fluctuation effect is executed (period 708), and the third pseudo small hit start effect is executed (period 709). The big winning opening is opened in S1004, the third pseudo small hit unit game production is executed (period 710), the big winning opening is closed in S1005, and the third pseudo small hit ending production is performed. It is executed (period 711).

As the fourth pseudo small hit generation and small hit game, first, the fourth pseudo small hit fluctuation effect is executed (period 712), and the fourth pseudo small hit start effect is executed (period 713). Here, the period 661, which is the unit game period of the first round of the actual special game, ends, and the period 662, which is the second unit game period of the special game, is reached. The big winning opening is opened in S1006, the fourth pseudo small hit unit game production is executed (period 714), the big winning opening is closed in S1007, and the fourth pseudo small hit ending production is performed. It is executed (period 715).

As the fifth pseudo small hit generation and small hit game, first, the fifth pseudo small hit fluctuation effect is executed (period 716), and the fifth pseudo small hit start effect is executed (period 717). The large winning opening is opened in S1008, the fifth pseudo small hit unit game production is executed (period 718), the large winning opening is closed in S1009, and the fifth pseudo small hit end production is performed. It is executed (period 719).

As the sixth pseudo small hit generation and small hit game, the sixth pseudo small hit fluctuation effect is first executed (period 720), and the sixth pseudo small hit start effect is executed (period 721). The large winning opening is opened in S1010, the sixth pseudo small hit unit game production is executed (period 722), the large winning opening is closed in S1011 and the sixth pseudo small hit ending production is performed. It is executed (period 723). After that, the period 662, which is the unit game period of the second round of the actual special game, ends, and the period 663, which is the end demonstration time of the special game, is reached.

As described above, in one or more unit games out of a plurality of unit games included in the special game of 2R probability variation big hit, multiple short releases are made during the one unit game, and the production content is also a small hit. By making them the same or similar during the rush, it can be made to look like a small hit and a small hit game that occurs a plurality of times in a row similar to the small hit rush as a whole. For jackpots other than the 2R probability variation jackpot, only one opening is performed during one unit game, and the production during the special game is different from that at the time of the 2R probability variation jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, as described above, the same or similar production contents are used over the final round (2R), the end demo that shifts after that, and the high-probability low-base state that shifts after that. For example, in the case of a 10R probability change jackpot, the final round (10R) executes the introduction effect of the ally character, and in the end demo that shifts after that, the effect of notifying the transition to the high probability high base state such as "probability change rush!" Is executed, and in the high-probability and high-base state that shifts after that, the effect that the ally character runs is executed, and the effect content at each timing is configured to be different.

Here, the production and opening and closing of the big winning opening are executed based on the same production and opening / closing pattern as the small hit rush, but since it is actually a special game of 2R probability variation big hit, the big winning opening per round is executed. There is an upper limit (for example, 10 balls) for the number of balls that can be entered. Therefore, it is possible that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening reaches the upper limit while repeating the pseudo small hit game three times in one round. For example, if 5 balls are entered in the first opening of the first round and 5 balls are entered in the second opening, the second round is started without waiting for the third opening. In such a case, the third pseudo small hit occurrence and the small hit game are omitted, and the pseudo small hit variation effect corresponding to the fourth time in the period 712 immediately before the start timing (S1006) of the second round is omitted. Is executed, the pseudo small hit start effect corresponding to the fourth time is executed in the period 713, and then the opening of the large winning opening corresponding to the fourth time from S1006 and the pseudo small hit unit game effect are executed. The opening time (about 3 seconds) of the big winning opening 20 in the special game of the 2R probability variation big hit is longer than the opening time (about 1 second) of the big winning opening 20 in the small hit game.

At the timings of S1000 to S1011 shown in FIG. 40 (b), the opening command and the closing command of the big winning opening are sent from the main board 200 to the sub board 300. The effect control means 304 produces a pseudo small hit game effect by executing the effect according to a command from the main board 200 or according to a command from the sub CPU 310 (corresponding to the effect determination means 303) of the sub board 300. When executing and including. For example, an effect executed when the large winning opening is opened, such as a pseudo small hit unit game effect, is executed based on an opening command of the large winning opening. In addition, the effect executed when the big prize opening is closed, such as the pseudo small hit end effect and the effect effect that explodes the enemy character, is executed based on the closing command of the big winning opening. Other pseudo-small hit effects, such as a pseudo-small hit start effect, a pseudo-small hit variation effect, a pseudo-small hit end effect, and a display effect of the number of acquired balls displayed during that period, are timer-managed by the sub CPU 310 of the sub-board 300. It is executed at the timing based on the command based on.

If a low-probability low-base state is planned after the end of the special game related to the 2R jackpot (2R normal jackpot), the relative prize opening per unit game in the multiple unit games included in the special game. Perform a short release only once. This is not an opening / closing pattern that imitates a small hit game, and an effect that imitates a small hit game effect is not executed. Also, in the case of 2R probability variation big hit, the time of the end effect of the special game (end demo time) is relatively shortened, so that the effect during the special game and the effect of the small hit rush are seamlessly integrated. In the case of a 2R normal big hit, the end effect time (end demo time) of the special game becomes relatively long, and it is not integrated with the small hit rush as described above. For example, in the case of a 2R normal jackpot, in the final round (2R), an effect that the ally character collapses is executed, and in the end demo that shifts after that, a production that notifies that the player will shift to a low-probability high-base state such as "Chance time has entered!" Is executed, and in the low-probability and high-base state that shifts after that, the effect that the ally character tries to stand up is executed, and the effect content at each timing is configured to be different.

<8th Example> Special variation effect Since the basic configuration of the 8th Example is the same as that of the 1st to 7th Examples, the description of the common points is omitted and the differences from the 1st to 7th Examples are mainly focused. Explain to.

The special variation effect described in this embodiment is one of the variation effects and is a kind of pseudo continuous variation effect. There is known a so-called pseudo continuous variation effect in which a plurality of symbols are displayed as if they are paused in one symbol variation to make it appear as if a plurality of symbol variations are executed in a pseudo manner. The special variation effect of this embodiment is one of the effects similar to this pseudo continuous variation effect, but there are some differences from the normal pseudo continuous variation effect. In a normal pseudo continuous fluctuation effect, the symbol is displayed as if it is paused to make it look like a plurality of symbol fluctuations. On the other hand, the special variation effect of this embodiment is a re-variation effect (first notice effect) or a high expectation effect (first notice effect) after the execution of a specific effect that suspends the effect at a predetermined timing in one variation effect period. 2 Notice production) can be generated. The high expectation production is a production with a higher expectation of big hit than the re-variation production. When the re-variation effect is executed, the re-variation effect or the high expectation degree effect can be further generated after the execution of the specific effect of suspending the effect again at a predetermined timing after the re-execution of the variation effect. This makes it appear as if pseudo multiple symbol fluctuations have been executed. The special variation effect includes a first special variation effect and a second special variation effect, which are divided according to the difference in the specific effect.

FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an effect process of the first special variation effect. When the effect is started from the fluctuation start 730, the specific effect can be executed at any timing of 2 seconds, 6 seconds, 10 seconds, 14 seconds, and 18 seconds. That is, a specific effect 731 that pauses after 2 seconds, a specific effect 732 that pauses after 6 seconds, a specific effect 733 that pauses after 10 seconds, a specific effect 734 that pauses after 14 seconds, and a specific effect that pauses after 18 seconds. There are 5 ways of 735. The specific effect 731 to 735 is, for example, an effect of pausing the reproduction of the entire image displayed on the screen and displaying a state in which the color of the entire screen is inverted. As a pattern in which none of the specific effects 731 to 735 is executed, when the fluctuation stop 745 occurs 2 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation stop 746 occurs 6 seconds later, the fluctuation stop 747 occurs 10 seconds later, and the fluctuation stops 14 seconds later. When the stop is 748, the variable stop 749 may occur after 18 seconds.

There are three types of development after the execution of the specific effect. The first development is a development in which the revariation effect 736 is executed and returns to the variation start 730 in order to re-execute the variation effect. The second development is a development in which the high expectation effect is executed after the button effect is executed. The third development is a development in which a high-expectation effect is executed without going through a button effect.

As a first development, the revariation effect 736 can be executed after the specific effect 731,732,733,734,735. The re-variation effect 736 is an effect of showing an image that rewinds the effect displayed up to that point in order to re-execute the variation effect from the beginning. Since the re-variation effect 736 can be executed after any of the specific effects 731, 732, 733, 734, 735, the re-execution of the variation effect can occur even if the execution timing of the specific effect is early or late.

As a second development, after the specific effect 732, 733, 734, 735, either the revariation effect 736 or the button effect 737, 738, 739, 740 can be executed. No button effect is executed after the specific effect 731. The button effects 737, 738, 739, and 740 are effects that prompt the player to input an operation to the effect button 109 and generate a high-expectation effect or a revariation effect triggered by the operation input by the player. In the button effect, characters such as "press the button!" That prompts the press of the effect button 109 and a button image are displayed on the screen. In the button effect, the revariable effect 736 or the high expectation effect is displayed depending on whether or not the player's effect button 109 is pressed. However, when the button effect occurs, or when the effect button 109 is pressed, the possibility that the high expectation effect will occur is higher than the possibility that the revariation effect 736 will occur after the button effect occurs. Is set. When a high expectation effect occurs, after the button effect 737, the high expectation effect 741, after the button effect 738, the high expectation effect 741, after the button effect 739, after the high expectation effect 741, and after the button effect 740. High expectation effect 741 is executed respectively. High-expectation effects 741 to 744 are variable effects such as super reach effects with high big hit expectations, and are high depending on whether the specific effect is displayed at 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 14 seconds, or 18 seconds. Candidates for expectation production are also different. The later the display timing of the specific effect is, the higher the expectation is, and the higher the expectation is.

As a third development, the high expectation effect 741,742,743,744 can be executed after the specific effect 732,733,734,735 without going through the button effect. The high expectation effect is not executed after the specific effect 731. As described above, various types of high expectation effects 741, 742, 734, 744 are prepared as super reach effects, and the high expectation of big hits differs depending on the types, and in particular, the later the display timing of the specific effect is expected. It is configured so that it can easily develop into a high-expectation production with a high degree.

When the variation effect is re-executed from the variation start 730 after the re-variation effect 736, any of the first to third developments is repeated again, or the variation is stopped 745 to 749. However, the re-execution of the re-variation effect or the re-execution of the variation effect may be limited to two times or the like for one symbol variation of the special symbol.

There are five types of time from the start of fluctuation 730 to the specific effect or stop of fluctuation, which are 2 seconds, 6 seconds, 10 seconds, 14 seconds, and 18 seconds, and there are various combinations depending on whether or not the fluctuation effect is re-executed and the deployment destination is different. It is conceivable that variable effect patterns are prepared for the types of development, and one of them can be selected by the effect determining means 303.

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing an effect process of the second special variation effect. The second special variation effect is a modified variation effect pattern of the first special variation effect, and the development after the specific effect is displayed is different. When the effect is started from the fluctuation start 750, the specific effect can be executed at the timing of 2 seconds or 6 seconds. That is, there are two types, a specific effect 751 that pauses after 2 seconds and a specific effect 755 that pauses after 6 seconds. Unlike the specific effects 731 to 735 of FIG. 41, the specific effects 751 and 755 are effects in which the pause time of the variable effect exceeds a predetermined time, and the longer the duration of the pause, the higher the possibility of occurrence of the high expectation effect. Is set to be high. For example, it is an effect of pausing the reproduction of the entire image displayed on the screen and sustaining the stopped state (so-called freeze state) for several seconds to several seconds with the color of the entire screen inverted. The stop time of the specific effect 751 is 4 seconds, 8 seconds, and 12 seconds, and the stop time of the specific effect 755 is 4 seconds, 8 seconds, and 16 seconds. If the specific effects 751 and 755 are not displayed, the fluctuation stop is 759.

When the specific effect 751 is displayed, if the freeze state develops to the high expectation effect 752 after continuing for 4 seconds, or if the freeze state develops to the high expectation effect 753 after continuing for 8 seconds, the freeze state is 16 After a second, it may develop into a high expectation effect 754. Various types of high-expectation effects 752, 753, and 754 are prepared as super reach effects, and the high expectation of big hits differs depending on the type. Especially, the longer the freeze state, the higher the expectation of high-expectation effects. It is configured to be easy to do. Further, when the specific effect 755 is displayed, if the freeze state develops into the high expectation effect 756 after continuing for 4 seconds, or if the freeze state develops into the high expectation effect 757 after continuing for 8 seconds, the freeze state occurs. May develop into a high expectation production 758 after 16 seconds. Various types of high-expectation productions 756,757,758 are prepared as super reach productions, and the high expectation of big hits differs depending on the type. Especially, the longer the freeze state, the higher the expectation of high-expectation productions. It is configured to be easy to do. Further, the high expectation effect 725 to 754, 756 to 758 includes a high expectation effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the high expectation effect 756 to 758 of FIG. It is set so that the jackpot expectation is more likely to be higher in the high-expectation production that develops through the freeze state than in the high-expectation production that develops through. As a modification, when the high-expectation effect that develops through the freeze state is a specific high-expectation effect (for example, only when the super-reach effect A to E is the super-reach effect E), the jackpot is confirmed. It may be configured to do so.

Here, the end timing of the pause (freeze state) of the specific effects 751 and 755 is synchronized with the occurrence timing of any of the specific effects 731 to 735 of FIG. That is, the specific effect 751 that occurs 2 seconds after the start of fluctuation 750 is synchronized with the specific effect 732 that occurs 6 seconds after the start of fluctuation 730 if the freeze is continued for 4 seconds, and if the freeze is continued for 8 seconds. It will be synchronized with the specific effect 733 that occurs 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation 730, and if the freeze is continued for 16 seconds, it will be synchronized with the specific effect 735 that occurs 18 seconds after the start of fluctuation 730. Further, the specific effect 755 generated 6 seconds after the start of fluctuation is synchronized with the specific effect 733 generated 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation 730 when the freeze is continued for 4 seconds, and when the freeze is continued for 8 seconds. It will be synchronized with the specific effect 734 that occurs 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation 730, and if the freeze is continued for 12 seconds, it will be synchronized with the specific effect 735 that occurs 18 seconds after the start of fluctuation 730. As described above, since at least the effect patterns in which the display end timings of the specific effects are synchronized have the same variation time, they may be associated with the same pattern as the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this way, various combinations can be considered due to the difference in the time from the fluctuation start 750 to the specific effect and the difference in the duration of the frozen state, and the variation effect pattern is prepared for each type of development, and one of them is determined. It can be selected by means 303.

From the above, the earlier the occurrence timing of the specific effect, the lower the possibility that the button effect or the high expectation effect will occur, but the higher the possibility that the re-variation effect will occur. More specifically, if the time from the start or re-execution of the variation effect to the pause of the variation effect is relatively short, there is a possibility of a button effect (a high expectation effect or a re-variation effect occurs after the generation). Or, it is set so that the possibility of occurrence of high expectation effect is low, but the possibility of occurrence of revariation effect is high. On the contrary, the later the occurrence timing of the specific effect, the lower the possibility that the button effect or the re-variation effect will occur, but the higher the possibility that the high expectation effect will occur. More specifically, when the time from the fluctuation start or effect re-execution to the pause is relatively long, the button effect is compared with the case where the time from the fluctuation start or effect re-execution to the pause is relatively short. Is set so that the possibility of generating the re-variation effect or the high expectation effect or the possibility of the re-variation effect is low but the possibility of the high expectation effect is high (for example, the button effect or Comparing the rate at which the re-variation effect occurs and the rate at which the high-expectation effect occurs, (1) If the time from the start or re-execution of the effect to the pause is relatively long, it is set to 3: 7 and fluctuates. 8: 2 if the time from the start or re-execution of the effect to the pause is relatively short, (2) 6: 4 if the time from the start or re-execution of the effect to the pause is relatively long. , 9: 1 when the time from the start of fluctuation or the re-execution of the effect to the pause is relatively short). In this way, the jackpot expectation differs depending on the occurrence timing of the specific effect and the duration of the pause, and it is possible to realize a novel effect in which the player pays particular attention to the delay of the occurrence timing of the specific effect and the length of the duration. However, as shown in FIG. 41, the specific effect 731 that occurs 2 seconds after the start of fluctuation 730 does not develop into a button effect or a high expectation effect, while as shown in FIG. 42, from the start of fluctuation 750. There are exceptions such as developing from the specific effect 751 that occurs after 2 seconds, which is the shortest, to a high-expectation effect, and even if the specific effect occurs at a short timing, it can develop into a higher-expectation effect. , The production is surprising. It should be noted that even from the specific effect 731 that occurs 2 seconds after the start of fluctuation 730, which is the shortest, it may be configured so that it can develop into a button effect or a high expectation effect with a low probability. Further, as a modification of the pause (freeze state) in the specific effect, the decorative symbol may be paused or hidden at the time of freezing, while the alternative symbol or the simplified symbol may be configured to continue to fluctuate. As another modification, the hold ball image may be hidden at the time of freezing, while the hold number image may be continuously displayed. In that case, even if there is a new ball in the first start port 11 (or the second start port 12) in the situation where the number of hold of the first win / fail lottery (or the number of hold of the second win / fail lottery) is less than four. , The reserved ball image (or the reserved ball image of the 2nd winning / failing lottery held) corresponding to the 1st winning / failing lottery held as a result of the entry is not newly displayed, but the 1st winning / failing lottery The corresponding hold number image (or the hold number image corresponding to the second winning / failing lottery) is updated and displayed (for example, the display of "3" is updated to the display of "4"). The reserved sphere image shows the number of the first winning / failing lottery (or the second winning / failing lottery) held by the number of graphic icons (0 to 4) such as a star shape or a round shape, for example, on the screen. It is displayed at the bottom. The hold number image shows the number of the first winning / failing lottery (or the second winning / failing lottery) by a single number (any number of "0", "1", "2", "3", "4"). It is a thing, for example, it is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.

For example, the combination of 10 seconds and 14 seconds, the combination of 6 seconds and 18 seconds, the combination of 14 seconds and 10 seconds, and the combination of 18 seconds and 6 seconds all have a total time of 24 seconds, and the corresponding special symbol The variation pattern is associated with the same 24-second variation pattern, and the effect determining means 303 determines which combination to use.

<9th Example> Special Fluctuation Production Since the basic configuration of the 9th Example is the same as that of the 1st to 8th Examples, the description of common points is omitted, and the 1st to 8th Examples are particularly relevant. The differences from the eighth embodiment will be mainly described.

When designing a plurality of types of fluctuation effect patterns having different jackpot expectations and deviation effect pattern to correspond to a common variation pattern as in the special variation effect described in the eighth embodiment, the number of types of variation patterns is suppressed. On the other hand, it is not easy to design a method for selecting each of a plurality of types of variable effect patterns so as to have different jackpot expectations. Therefore, in this embodiment, by constructing a fluctuation pattern by combining a plurality of types of basic fluctuation patterns and a plurality of types of fluctuation addition patterns, various fluctuation times are configured by the combination while suppressing the number of patterns themselves, and for each combination. By separating the selection of the effect pattern and the selection probability, even the fluctuation pattern of the same fluctuation time can be selected with different probabilities. That is, even if the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation addition pattern having the same fluctuation time is used, the selection probability is made different depending on which table the fluctuation addition pattern is selected based on. As a result, it is possible to make the jackpot expectation different depending on the effect pattern selected even with the same fluctuation pattern (variation time). The variation pattern corresponding to the special variation effect described in the eighth embodiment is a combination in which the variation addition time of one of the plurality of types of variation addition patterns is added to the variation time of any of the plurality of types of basic variation patterns. It is composed.

FIG. 43 is a diagram of a table schematically exemplifying the correspondence between the types of the basic variation pattern and the types of the variation addition pattern table. The basic variation pattern shown in this figure is an example for explaining the variation pattern corresponding to the special variation effect pattern in particular. The plurality of types of basic variation patterns include a plurality of patterns in which the variation effect content and the variation time are common to each other. The fluctuation pattern number "0" is the basic fluctuation pattern of "ultra-shortening fluctuation", the fluctuation pattern number "1" is the basic fluctuation pattern of "shortening fluctuation", and the fluctuation pattern number "2" is the basic fluctuation of "normal fluctuation". It is a fluctuation pattern. These basic fluctuation patterns are selected when they are out of alignment, and "0" is associated with the fluctuation addition pattern table number. As a result of referring to the fluctuation addition pattern table of "0", the fluctuation addition pattern is added. It is a fluctuation pattern that is not performed (details of the fluctuation addition pattern table will be described later). As the basic fluctuation pattern, one of these "ultra-shortening fluctuation", "shortening fluctuation", and "normal fluctuation" is selected according to the number of reserved balls. For example, when the number of reserved balls decreases from 4 to 3, "ultra-shortening fluctuation" is selected, when the number of reserved balls decreases from 3 to 2, "shortening fluctuation" is selected, and the number of reserved balls decreases from 2 to 1. When and when it decreases from 1 to 0, "normal variation" is selected. For example, even if the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern have the same predetermined value, different basic fluctuation patterns (one of "ultra-shortening fluctuation", "shortening fluctuation", and "normal fluctuation") depending on the number of reserved balls at that time. Can be selected.

On the other hand, the basic fluctuation patterns "A" to "K" of the fluctuation pattern numbers "3" to "13" are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the special fluctuation effect pattern. The selection probabilities of the basic fluctuation patterns "A" to "K" do not differ depending on the number of reserved balls, and one of the basic fluctuation patterns is selected according to the lottery value for determining the fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls. Will be done. The basic fluctuation patterns "A" and "B" correspond to the same production type, and the fluctuation time as the basic fluctuation pattern is different. The same "1" number variable addition pattern table is associated with these, and one of a plurality of types of variable addition patterns is selected based on the same table. As a result, even if the same effect type is used, a plurality of fluctuation times are selected depending on the combination of the basic fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation addition pattern, and the same fluctuation addition pattern is added to the basic fluctuation patterns "A" and "B". However, since the basic fluctuation patterns "A" and "B" have different fluctuation times and different selection probabilities, it is possible to suggest different jackpot expectations.

The basic fluctuation patterns "C" and "D" correspond to the production content with the character A as the motif, and the fluctuation patterns "E" and "F" correspond to the production content with the character B as the motif, and the fluctuation as the basic fluctuation pattern. The times are different from each other. The basic variation patterns "C" and "D" are associated with the variation addition pattern table of "2", and the basic variation patterns "E" and "F" are associated with the variation addition pattern table of "3". There is. Although the basic fluctuation patterns "C", "D", "E", and "F" have different fluctuation times, there are a plurality of combinations in which the total fluctuation time is the same depending on the fluctuation addition pattern to be added. However, since the selection probability is different for each basic fluctuation pattern and the selection probability of each fluctuation addition pattern is different depending on the reference fluctuation addition pattern table, different jackpot expectations are obtained depending on the combination of these even if the fluctuation time is the same. Can be suggested.

The basic fluctuation patterns "G", "H", "I", and "J" correspond to the production contents with the character C as a motif, and the fluctuation times as the basic fluctuation patterns are different from each other. Further, the basic variation patterns "G" and "H" are associated with the variation addition pattern table of "4", and the basic variation patterns "I" and "J" are associated with the variation addition pattern table of "5". Has been done. Although the basic fluctuation patterns "G", "H", "I", and "J" have different fluctuation times, there are a plurality of combinations in which the total fluctuation time is the same depending on the fluctuation addition pattern to be added. However, since the selection probability is different for each basic fluctuation pattern and the selection probability of each fluctuation addition pattern is different depending on the reference fluctuation addition pattern table, different jackpot expectations are obtained depending on the combination of these even if the fluctuation time is the same. Can be suggested.

The basic variation pattern "K" corresponds to the effect content with the character D as a motif, and the variation addition pattern table of No. "6" is associated with it. The basic fluctuation pattern "K" may have the same total fluctuation time as the combination of the basic fluctuation patterns "A" to "J" and the fluctuation addition pattern, depending on the fluctuation addition pattern to be added. However, since the selection probability is different for each basic fluctuation pattern and the selection probability of each fluctuation addition pattern is different depending on the reference fluctuation addition pattern table, different jackpot expectations are obtained depending on the combination of these even if the fluctuation time is the same. Can be suggested.

FIG. 44 is a diagram of a table schematically exemplifying the correspondence between the types of variable addition patterns and the types of variable addition pattern tables. In this figure, 30 types from "0" to "29" are illustrated in each line as variation addition patterns. Each column from "Table 0" to "Table 6" corresponds to the variable addition pattern table from "0" to "6", and the size of the lottery value range assigned to each variable addition pattern in each table. The value (number of values) is shown in each column. Of the 30 types of variable addition patterns, the variable addition patterns "6" to "29" are patterns indicating the number, timing, and type of the re-variable effect or the button effect, respectively.

When "ultra-shortening variation", "shortening variation", and "normal variation" corresponding to the variation addition pattern table of "0" are selected in the variation pattern table of FIG. 43, the variation addition pattern table of "0" in FIG. 44 is selected. With reference to, a variable addition pattern having a variable addition number “0” (here, a variable addition pattern with zero fluctuation time, as shown by “none”) is selected with a 100% selection probability. That is, the variable addition pattern is not added.

When "variation A" and "variation B" corresponding to the variation addition pattern table of "1" are selected in the variation pattern table of FIG. 43, the variation is varied with reference to the variation addition pattern table of "1" of FIG. Variable addition patterns of addition numbers "0" to "5" are selected with each selection probability. The variable addition patterns of the variable addition numbers "1" to "5" correspond to "effect A" to "effect E", and the selection probability differs depending on the lottery value range associated with each. For example, the selection probability of "effect A" is 30/256, while the selection probability of "effect C" is 70/256. "Production A" to "Production E" are variable addition patterns corresponding to the production leading to high expectation production or fluctuation stop without going through the re-variation production or the button production in the special fluctuation production pattern, and the production time to be added respectively. Is different.

When "Variation C" and "Variation D" corresponding to the variation addition pattern table of No. "2" are selected in the variation pattern table of FIG. 43, the variation is varied with reference to the variation addition pattern table of No. "2" of FIG. The variable addition patterns of the addition numbers "6" to "9" are selected with the respective selection probabilities. The variable addition patterns of the variable addition numbers "6" to "9" correspond to "specific 1 time A" to "specific 1 time D", and the selection probability differs depending on the lottery value range associated with each. For example, the selection probability of "specific 1 time A" is 12/256, while the selection probability of "specific 1 time C" is 110/256. "Specific 1st time A" to "Specific 1st time D" are variation addition patterns corresponding to the production leading to the high expectation effect or the variation stop via the re-variation effect and the button effect once in the special variation effect pattern. , The timing and type of the re-variation effect or the button effect are different, and the additional effect time is also different.

When "Variation E" and "Variation F" corresponding to the variation addition pattern table of No. "3" are selected in the variation pattern table of FIG. 43, the variation is varied with reference to the variation addition pattern table of No. "3" of FIG. Variable addition patterns of addition numbers "6" to "15" are selected with each selection probability. The variable addition patterns of the variable addition numbers "6" to "15" correspond to "specific 1 time A" to "specific 1 time J", and the selection probability differs depending on the lottery value range associated with each. For example, the selection probability of "specific 1 time A" is 7/256, while the selection probability of "specific 1 time C" is 64/256, and the selection probability of "specific 1 time J" is 7/256. is there. "Specific 1st time A" to "Specific 1st time J" are variation addition patterns corresponding to the production leading to high expectation effect or variation stop via the re-variation effect and the button effect once in the special variation effect pattern. , The timing and type of the re-variation effect or the button effect are different, and the additional effect time is also different.

When "Variation G" and "Variation H" corresponding to the variation addition pattern table of No. 4 are selected in the variation pattern table of FIG. 43, the variation is varied with reference to the variation addition pattern table of No. 4 of FIG. The variable addition patterns of the addition numbers "16" to "22" are selected with the respective selection probabilities. The variable addition patterns of the variable addition numbers "16" to "22" correspond to "specific 2 times A" to "specific 2 times G", and the selection probability differs depending on the lottery value range associated with each. For example, the selection probability of "specific 2 times A" is 12/256, while the selection probability of "specific 2 times E" is 55/256, and the selection probability of "specific 2 times G" is 85/256. is there. "Specific 2 times A" to "Specific 2 times G" are variation addition patterns corresponding to the effects leading to high expectation effect or change stop via the re-variation effect and the button effect twice in the special variation effect pattern. , The timing and type of the re-variation effect or the button effect are different, and the additional effect time is also different.

When "Variation I" and "Variation J" corresponding to the variation addition pattern table of No. 5 are selected in the variation pattern table of FIG. 43, the variation is varied with reference to the variation addition pattern table of No. 5 of FIG. The variable addition patterns of the addition numbers "24" to "29" are selected with the respective selection probabilities. The variable addition patterns of the variable addition numbers "24" to "29" correspond to "specific 3 times A" to "specific 3 times G", and the selection probability differs depending on the lottery value range associated with each. For example, the selection probability of "specific 3 times A" is 12/256, while the selection probability of "specific 3 times E" is 60/256, and the selection probability of "specific 3 times G" is 79/256. is there. "Specific 3 times A" to "Specific 3 times G" are variation addition patterns corresponding to the effects leading to high expectation effect or change stop via the re-variation effect and the button effect 3 times in the special variation effect pattern. , The timing and type of the re-variation effect or the button effect are different, and the additional effect time is also different.

When "variation K" corresponding to the variation addition pattern table of "6" is selected in the variation pattern table of FIG. 43, the variation addition number "0" is referred to with reference to the variation addition pattern table of "6" of FIG. The total variation addition pattern of "29" is selected with each selection probability. The selection probabilities of these total variation addition patterns differ depending on the lottery value range associated with each. For example, the selection probability of "Direction A" is 7/256, while the selection probability of "Specific 1 time J" is 20/256. This "6" number variation addition pattern table is prepared in order to adjust the selection probabilities of all variation effects and to realize an appropriate jackpot expectation suggestion according to the result of the hit / fail judgment for each variation effect. Since it is a table and all the variation addition patterns of FIG. 44 are associated with the variation addition pattern table of No. 6 as options, all these variation addition patterns are always duplicated in a plurality of variation addition pattern tables. It will be associated with. Further, for example, the variation addition pattern of "15" No. "specific one-time J" has a selection probability of 3/256 in the variation addition pattern table of "3", whereas the variation addition pattern of "6" is added. In the pattern table, different selection probabilities are set, such as 20/256 selection probabilities. Therefore, it is possible to suggest different jackpot expectations even with the same variation addition pattern, and it is possible to appropriately set a difference in jackpot expectations for each effect. The combination of the basic variation pattern and the variation addition pattern selected based on the tables illustrated in FIGS. 43 and 44 is an example of selection as the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 in the low probability low base state. It is an exception that the symbol variation of the second special symbol 52, which is not the main body, is executed in the low probability low base state, and since the small hit occurs with a high probability in the second game, the small hit occurs. It is also conceivable that an act of illegally trying to obtain a prize ball is performed by intentionally generating. Therefore, after setting the fluctuation time of the basic fluctuation pattern corresponding to the small hit to, for example, 8 minutes, one of the fluctuation addition patterns is determined and added by referring to the variation addition pattern table of No. 6. The variable addition patterns of the variable addition numbers "0" to "29" corresponding to the variable addition pattern table of the "6" have different time values, and 30 types of variable time can be set in the form of 8 minutes + α as the variable time. .. As a result, the randomness of the fluctuation time can be guaranteed, the fluctuation time can be appropriately dispersed so that the fluctuation time when a small hit is hit is not always constant, and when the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 stops. Since it is possible to make it difficult to discern, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate player operation such as aiming at entering the second starting port 12 at a fixed timing.

A combination of the basic variation pattern and the variation addition pattern is selected based on the variation pattern table of FIG. 43 and the variation addition pattern table of FIG. 44. Specifically, the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232 is a lottery based on the basic variation pattern table corresponding to the result of the winning / failing determination, and a plurality of types of basic variations corresponding to the result of the winning / failing determination are performed. Select one of the patterns. The first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232 is one of a plurality of types of variation addition patterns corresponding to the basic variation pattern by lottery based on the variation addition pattern table corresponding to the selected basic variation pattern. Select. At least one of a plurality of types of basic fluctuation patterns is defined in the basic fluctuation pattern table so that the selection probabilities differ depending on the result of the hit / fail judgment. At least one of the plurality of types of variable addition patterns is defined in the plurality of variable addition pattern tables so as to have different selection probabilities depending on which of the plurality of variable addition pattern tables is used.

Here, when "variation K" is selected as the basic variation pattern, the effect content is based on the character D as described above. The "fluctuation K" is configured such that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a big hit to the probability of being selected at the time of a miss is 30:70. As the variation addition pattern, any variation addition pattern is selected with a selection probability as shown in the variation addition pattern table of No. 6 in FIG. 44 regardless of whether the pattern is correct or not. Regardless of which variation addition pattern is selected, in other words, whichever effect of "Direction A" to "Direction E" or "Specific 1 time A" to "Specific 3 times G" is selected ("Specific 1 time G") Even if "Time A" is selected or "Specific 3 times G" is selected), the jackpot expectation does not differ. The "probability of being selected at the time of a big hit" here is (probability of a big hit x probability of "variation K" being selected at the time of a big hit), and refers to the appearance rate of "variation K" corresponding to the big hit. Further, the "probability of being selected at the time of deviation" is (probability of deviation x probability of "variation K" being selected at the time of deviation), and refers to the appearance rate of "variation K" corresponding to the deviation. For example, the jackpot probability is 1/100, the selection rate of "variation K" at the time of jackpot is 297/1000, the probability of deviation is 99/100, and the selection rate of "variation K" at the time of deviation is 7/1000. In some cases, the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a big hit to the probability of being selected at the time of a miss is 30:70. It should be added that the "probability of being selected at the time of a big hit" and the "probability of being selected at the time of a miss" have the same meaning in the following (although the basic fluctuation pattern to be selected is different).

On the other hand, when "variation C" or "variation D" is selected as the basic variation pattern, the effect content is based on the character A as described above. "Variation C" is configured so that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of big hit to the probability of being selected at the time of loss is 10:90, while "variation D" is selected at the time of big hit and at the time of loss. The ratio of probabilities is 20:80. It should be noted that "variation D" may or may not be longer than "variation C". Then, in either case, one of the variable addition patterns is selected with the selection probability as shown in the variation addition pattern table of No. 2 in FIG. 44. Therefore, it is better to use "variation D" as the basic variation pattern. The jackpot expectation is higher than using "fluctuation C" as the basic fluctuation pattern, but no matter which fluctuation addition pattern is selected, in other words, "directing A" to "directing E" or "specific one time A" to Regardless of which of the "specific 3 times G" effects is selected (whether "specific 1 time A" is selected or "specific 3 times G" is selected), the relationship does not change. That is, the reliability differs depending on the effect based on the basic variation pattern (for example, "variation C" corresponds to the effect in which the character A wears a blue aura, while "variation D" corresponds to the effect in which the character A is blue. Corresponds to the production of changing the color of the aura to red over time after wearing the aura).

Further, when "variation G" or "variation I" is selected as the basic variation pattern, the effect content is based on the character C as described above. "Variation G" is configured so that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of big hit to the probability of being selected at the time of loss is 30:70, while "variation I" is selected at the time of big hit and the probability of being selected at the time of loss. The ratio of probabilities is 60:40. It should be noted that "variation I" may or may not be longer than "variation G". Then, if it is "variation G", one of the variation addition patterns is selected with the selection probability as shown in the variation addition pattern table of No. 4 in FIG. 44, while if it is "variation I", FIG. 44 One of the variable addition patterns is selected with the selection probability as shown in the variable addition pattern table of No. "5". That is, while using the same character C as a motif, the number of occurrences of the specific effect (re-variation effect, button effect, etc.) can be increased in the "variation I". If you want to design so that the higher the number of occurrences of a specific effect, the higher the expectation of a big hit, by adopting the relationship between such a basic fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation addition pattern, even if the same character C is used as a motif. , Among the effects executed based on the variation addition pattern, the effect with high expectation of big hit (the effect mode in which many specific effects are executed here) can be associated with the basic variation pattern with high expectation of big hit, and such a combination. By increasing the selection probability of, it is possible to link the production content of the advance notice production (specific production) with the actual jackpot expectation. In this embodiment, the variation addition pattern table corresponding to each of "variation G" and "variation I" is such that the same variation addition number (same variation addition pattern) is not selected (the same variation addition pattern). For example, for the specific 2 times A, since it can be selected only in the fluctuation addition pattern table of No. 4, it is not selected when "variation I" is the basic fluctuation pattern), but "variation G" and "variation I". The same variable addition number (same variable addition pattern) may be selectable in the variable addition pattern table corresponding to each. For example, in any of the fluctuation addition pattern tables corresponding to "variation G" and "variation I", when any one of "specific 2 times A" to "specific 2 times G" can be selected, "specific 2 times A" to "specific 2 times G" can be selected. In "Variation G", it is easy to select a variation addition pattern such as "Specific 2 times A" or "Specific 2 times B", and in "Variation G", variation addition such as "Specific 2 times G" or "Specific 2 times G" The pattern may be easy to select. In that case, the closer the alphabetical part such as "specific 2 times A" or "specific 2 times G" is to "G" (the later in alphabetical order, that is, the larger in ascending order), the later the occurrence timing of the specific effect, that is, It is desirable that the production has high expectations for big hits.

In the modified example, when "variation G", "variation I", and "variation K" are selected as the basic variation patterns, the effect content is based on the character X, which is a common character. "Variation G" is configured so that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a big hit to the probability of being selected at the time of a miss is 70:30, and "variation I" is the probability of being selected at the time of a big hit and the probability of being selected at the time of a loss. The ratio of is 90:10, and the "variation K" is such that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a big hit to the probability of being selected at the time of a miss is 50:50. In the case of "variation G", one of the variation addition patterns is selected with the selection probability shown in the variation addition pattern table of "4", and in the case of "variation I", the selection shown in the variation addition pattern table of "5". Any variation addition pattern is selected by the probability, and in the case of "variation G", any variation addition pattern is selected by the selection probability shown in the variation addition pattern table of No. 6.

Here, in the variable addition pattern from "specific 2 times A" to "specific 2 times G" in which the variable addition numbers are "16" to "22", the timing of occurrence of the specific effect becomes later in the alphabetical order. However, the jackpot expectation differs depending on which basic fluctuation pattern is added. In the case of "specific 2 times A", the probability of being selected by referring to the variation addition pattern table of "4" in correspondence with "variation G" is 12/256 as shown in the figure, whereas it is "variation". The probability of being selected by referring to the variation addition pattern table of No. 6 in correspondence with "K" is 7/256 as shown in the figure. Further, in the case of "specific 2 times G", the probability of being selected by referring to the variation addition pattern table of "4" in correspondence with "variation G" is 85/256 as shown in the figure, whereas it is 85/256. The probability of being selected by referring to the variation addition pattern table of No. 6 in correspondence with "variation K" is 7/256 as shown in the figure. Here, as described above, the "variation G" is configured so that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a big hit to the probability of being selected at the time of a miss is 70:30, and the "variation K" is the probability of being selected at the time of a big hit. Since the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of deviation is 50:50, even if the same fluctuation addition pattern is selected, the case where it is added to "variation G" becomes "variation K". It can be configured so that the probability of being selected at the time of a big hit is higher than the case of being added, and the degree of expectation of a big hit is high. Furthermore, when the jackpot expectation is higher when "specific 2 times G" is added than when "specific 2 times A" is added ("specific 2 times A" or "specific 2 times G" is added. The closer the alphabetic part such as "G" is to "G" (later in alphabetical order), that is, the larger it is in ascending order, the later the occurrence timing of the specific effect, that is, when the effect is configured so that the jackpot expectation is high). , "Variation G" and "Variation K", which are the production contents with the same character X as the motif, but "Specification 2" which is a variation addition pattern in which the difference in selectivity between "Variation G" and "Variation K" is small. "Specific 2 times G" is a variation addition pattern in which the difference in selection rate between "variation G" and "variation K" is larger than when "time A" is selected (it is very easy to select in "variation G"). ] Is selected, the jackpot expectation as a variation pattern (basic variation pattern + variation addition pattern) for executing the effect content with the character X as a motif can be increased. This is because the probability that the variation addition pattern is selected and the variation pattern is constructed in "Variation G" where the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of big hit and the probability of being selected at the time of loss is 70:30 is the probability of being selected at the time of big hit. It is clear that the jackpot expectation is higher than when the fluctuation addition pattern is selected and the fluctuation pattern is constructed in "Variation K" where the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of deviation is 50:50 (the former is a jackpot). The expectation is 70%, and the latter is the jackpot expectation of 50%), and the jackpot expectation is 70 even if "specific 2 times A" is added to "variation G" or "specific 2 times G" is added. Even if "specific 2 times A" is added to "variation K" or "specific 2 times G" is added, the jackpot expectation is 50%, but as a player, the jackpot expectation is 70%. Since it is not known whether "Fluctuating G" is selected or "Fluctuating K" with a jackpot probability of 50% is selected (because the production content is the same in any case), the jackpot expectation that the player experiences. As for the production with the character X that executes the specific effect corresponding to "Specific 2 times A" as a motif, the variation addition pattern of "Specific 2 times A" is selected with "Variation G" with a jackpot expectation of 70%. Since the ratio of the probability of being performed to the probability that the variation addition pattern of "specific 2 times A" is selected with "variation K" with a jackpot expectation of 50% is 12: 7, it is about 63%, and "specific 2 times G". For the production with the character X that executes the specific effect corresponding to the above, the probability that the variation addition pattern of "specific 2 times G" is selected in the "variation G" with the jackpot expectation of 70% and the jackpot expectation of 50 Since the ratio of the probability that the variation addition pattern of "specific 2 times G" is selected by "variation K" of% is 85: 7, it is about 68%.

In addition, the variation addition pattern from "specific 3 times A" to "specific 3 times G" whose variable addition numbers are "23" to "29" also has a later occurrence timing of the specific effect in the alphabetical order. However, the jackpot expectation differs depending on which basic fluctuation pattern is added. In the case of "specific 3 times A", the probability of being selected by referring to the variation addition pattern table of "5" in correspondence with "variation I" is 12/256 as shown in the figure, whereas it is "variation". The probability of being selected by referring to the variation addition pattern table of No. 6 in correspondence with "K" is 7/256 as shown in the figure. Further, in the case of "specific 3 times G", the probability of being selected by referring to the variation addition pattern table of "5" in correspondence with "variation I" is 79/256 as shown in the figure, whereas it is 79/256. The probability of being selected by referring to the variation addition pattern table of No. 6 in correspondence with "variation K" is 7/256 as shown in the figure. Here, as described above, "variation I" is configured so that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a big hit to the probability of being selected at the time of a miss is 90:10, and "variation K" is the probability of being selected at the time of a big hit. Since the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of deviation is 50:50, even if the same fluctuation addition pattern is selected, the case where it is added to "variation I" becomes "variation K". It can be configured so that the probability of being selected at the time of big hit is higher than the case of being added, and the degree of expectation of big hit is high. Furthermore, when the jackpot expectation is higher when "specific 3 times G" is added than when "specific 3 times A" is added ("specific 3 times A" or "specific 3 times G" is added. The closer the alphabet part such as "G" is to "G" (later in alphabetical order), that is, the larger it is in ascending order, the later the occurrence timing of the specific effect, that is, when the effect is configured so that the jackpot expectation is high). , "Variation I" and "Variation K", which are the production contents with the same character X as the motif, but "Specific 3" which is a variation addition pattern in which the difference in selectivity between "Variation I" and "Variation K" is small. "Specific 3 times G" is a variation addition pattern in which the difference in selection rate between "variation I" and "variation K" is larger than when "time A" is selected (it is very easy to select in "variation I"). ] Is selected, the jackpot expectation as a variation pattern (basic variation pattern + variation addition pattern) for executing the effect content with the character X as a motif can be increased. This is because the probability that the variation addition pattern is selected and the variation pattern is constructed in "Variation I" where the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of big hit and the probability of being selected at the time of loss is 90:10 is the probability of being selected at the time of big hit. It is clear that the jackpot expectation is higher than when the fluctuation addition pattern is selected and the fluctuation pattern is constructed in "Variation K" where the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of deviation is 50:50 (the former is a jackpot). The expectation is 90%, and the latter is the jackpot expectation of 50%), and the jackpot expectation is 90 even if "specific 3 times A" is added to "variation I" or "specific 3 times G" is added. The probability of a big hit is 50% regardless of whether "specific 3 times A" is added to "variation K" or "specific 3 times G" is added, but as a player, the big hit expectation is 90%. Since it is not known whether "Variation I" is selected or "Variation K" with a jackpot probability of 50% is selected (because the production content is the same in any case), the jackpot expectation that the player experiences. As for the production with the character X that executes the specific effect corresponding to "Specific 3 times A" as a motif, the variation addition pattern of "Specific 3 times A" is selected with "Variation I" with a jackpot expectation of 90%. Since the ratio of the probability of being performed to the probability that the variation addition pattern of "specific 3 times A" is selected with "variation K" with a jackpot expectation of 50% is 12: 7, it is about 75%, and "specific 3 times G". For the production with the character X that executes the specific effect corresponding to "", the probability that the variation addition pattern of "specific 3 times G" is selected with "variation I" with the jackpot expectation of 90% and the jackpot expectation of 50 Since the ratio of the probability that the variation addition pattern of "specific 3 times G" is selected by "variation K" of% is 79: 7, it is about 87%.

In the low-probability low-base state, if the result of the hit / fail judgment corresponds to a big hit or a small hit, the fluctuation of any of the multiple types of fluctuation addition patterns with respect to the fluctuation time of any of the multiple types of basic fluctuation patterns. An additional time may be added, and a predetermined addition time (a time different from the variable addition time) may be added. The addition time is, for example, 3 minutes, and in the case of a big hit, it functions as an addition time for securing the time to execute the effect of congratulating the big hit, and in the case of a small hit, the addition for further extending the fluctuation time. Act as time. Regarding this addition time, not only one type of 3 minutes but also the time value is made different according to the basic fluctuation pattern (for example, if the basic fluctuation pattern in the case of a big hit is fluctuation A or B, it is set to 2 minutes. If the basic fluctuation pattern for a big hit is fluctuation K, it is set to 3 minutes), or the selection rate of multiple types of time values is different depending on the basic fluctuation pattern (for example, the basic fluctuation pattern for a big hit is If fluctuations A and B, 2 minutes is selected at 30%, 3 minutes is selected at 70%, and if the basic fluctuation pattern for a big hit is fluctuation K, 2 minutes is selected at 60% and 3 minutes is selected. It may be configured to be selected at 40%, etc.). If it is off, the additional time is not added. In addition, the plurality of types of basic fluctuation patterns include fluctuation patterns that can be selected regardless of whether the result of the hit / fail judgment corresponds to a big hit or a miss. As for the fluctuation patterns that can be selected, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the fluctuation addition time of one of the multiple types of fluctuation addition patterns is added to the fluctuation time, and if the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect, the fluctuation of the fluctuation addition pattern The addition time may not be added to the fluctuation time. Of the multiple types of variation patterns, only one predetermined type of variation addition pattern is associated with the variation pattern corresponding to the effect of reaching the jackpot through the re-variation effect, whereas the re-variation effect is not performed. A plurality of types of variation addition patterns are associated with the variation pattern corresponding to the effect leading to the big hit as the variation addition pattern that can be added.

<10th Example> Special Fluctuation Production Since the basic configuration of the 10th Example is the same as that of the 1st to 9th Examples, the description of the common points is omitted, and the 1st to 9th Examples, especially the strongly related first 7 Differences from the examples will be mainly described.

In the high base state, there is no reach. By continuously repeating short-term symbol fluctuations due to ultra-shortening fluctuations or shortening fluctuations, the deviation fluctuations continue in the form of a constant tempo. However, in the high base state, a small hit may occur (or the first game) because the second game aiming at entering the second starting port 12 by so-called right-handed hit is the main body. The probability of small hits is higher than that of the other), and if small hits occur unexpectedly in between, the tempo or rhythm of continuous deviation fluctuations will be disturbed, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, by aligning the time required for the small hit fluctuation and the small hit game in the high base state with the time of the deviation fluctuation, it is possible to prevent the tempo or rhythm from being disturbed. In the symbol variation in the high base state of this embodiment, the time from the stop of the variation of the second special symbol to the start of the next variation regardless of whether the result of the hit / fail determination by the second hit / fail determination means 222 corresponds to a small hit or a miss. (Hereinafter, the time for fixing the stop symbol is also simply referred to as the "fixed symbol time") is constant (provided that the next fluctuation is held).

FIG. 45 is a time chart comparing the time of the small hit fluctuation stop and the small hit game with the time of the deviation fluctuation. (A) shows the time of the small hit fluctuation stop and the small hit game in the high base state, and (b) shows the time of the normal deviation fluctuation stop in the high base state. (C) shows the time of the small hit fluctuation stop and the small hit game in the low base state, and (d) shows the time of the normal out-of-normal fluctuation stop in the low base state. Although not shown, the period of the small hit fluctuation in FIG. 45 (a) and the period of the normal deviation fluctuation in FIG. 45 (b) are the same time.

The decorative symbol related to the second special symbol 52 has a high base when the symbol fixed time displayed as a stop in the symbol mode indicating the small hit, that is, the stop duration from the symbol stop to the start of the small hit game is set as the first hour. The fixed time of the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the symbol mode indicating other than the small hit (for example, normal deviation without reach effect) in the state is the same time as the first time plus the time of the small hit game. 2 hours. First, in FIG. 45 (a), the period 770 is the symbol fixing time (first time) of the small hit in the high base state, for example, 0.02 seconds. The total period of the periods 772, 774, and 776 is the time for the small hit game, for example, 1.084 seconds. In FIG. 45 (b), the period 778 is the out-of-normal symbol fixed time (second time) without reach effect in the high base state, and the second time is the first time (for example, 0.02 seconds) and the small hit game. It is equal to the total time (eg 1.104 seconds) of the time (the combined period of periods 772,774,776, eg 1.084 seconds).

Here, the time of the small hit game in the high base state of FIG. 45 (a) is the period 772 (fourth hour, for example 0.04 seconds) which is the start demo time of the small hit game, and the end demo of the small hit game. It is the sum of the period 776 (fifth hour, for example 0.04 seconds) which is the time and the period 774 (sixth hour, for example 1.004 seconds) which is the execution time of the small hit game. The period 774, which is the execution time of the small hit game, is, for example, the total of the opening time (time for maintaining the opening) of 1.000 seconds and the closing time (time required for closing) of 0.004 seconds for the large winning opening.

As a result, even when small hits and normal misses are alternately mixed and continuous in a high base state, the variable effect is carved at the same tempo, which does not give the player an unnecessary discomfort, and the small hits and normal misses are not distinguished naturally. It can be a great production.

In FIG. 45 (c), the period 780 is the small hit symbol fixing time in the low base state, which is the same time as the period 770 (small hit symbol fixing time in the high base state) (for example, 0.02 seconds). .. The total period of the periods 782,784,786 is the time of the small hit game in the low base state, which is longer than the time of the small hit in the high base state, for example, 1.5 seconds. In FIG. 45 (d), the period 788 is the out-of-normal symbol fixing time without reach effect in the low base state, which is shorter than the out-of-normal symbol fixing time (second time) without reach effect in the high base state. (Third hour, eg 0.5 seconds). The time of the small hit game in the low base state is the period 782 (7th time different from the 4th time, for example 0.1 seconds) which is the start demo time of the small hit game, and the period which is the end demo time of the small hit game. It is the sum of 786 (8th time different from the 5th time, for example 0.396 seconds) and the period 784 (6th time, for example 1.004 seconds) which is the execution time of the small hit game. As described above, the time for the small hit fluctuation stop and the small hit game in the low base state (FIG. 45 (c)) is longer than the time for the small hit fluctuation stop and the small hit game in the high base state (FIG. 45 (a)). .. Further, the time of the out-of-normal fluctuation stop in the low base state (FIG. 45 (d)) is shorter than the time of the out-of-normal fluctuation stop in the high base state (FIG. 45 (b)). Therefore, the time of the small hit fluctuation stop and the small hit game in the low base state (FIG. 45 (c)) and the time of the normal deviation fluctuation stop in the low base state (FIG. 45 (d)) do not match.

As a modification, if the result of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol 52 corresponds to a small hit in the high base state, the reach effect or the battle effect is not executed, while the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol 52 in the high base state. If the result of is out of the question, the reach effect or the battle effect may be executed. In this case, the symbol fixing time in the deviation variation of the second special symbol 52 for executing the detachment reach effect or the battle effect in the high base state and the symbol fixing time of the small hit variation of the second special symbol 52 in the high base state. Is preferably the same time (for example, 0.1 second), and in the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol 52 that executes the out-of-reach effect or the battle effect in the high base state. It is preferable that the temporary stop time before the fixed stop is longer than the temporary stop time before the fixed stop in the decorative symbol corresponding to the small hit variation of the second special symbol 52 in the high base state. Here, the total value of the temporary stop time and the symbol fixed time when executing the reach effect or the battle effect (the time from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the next fluctuation when the fluctuation is an out-of-bounds fluctuation) is the reach effect. The total value of the temporary stop time, the fixed symbol time, and the execution time of the small hit game when the battle effect is not executed (the time from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the next fluctuation when the fluctuation is a small hit fluctuation) It is more preferable to set the same or substantially the same time value, and by configuring it as such, in the variable display in which the reach effect and the battle effect are not executed, even if the small hit game time is included, "from the variable stop to the next". The "time until the fluctuation starts" can be the same as or almost the same as the deviation fluctuation, and if the small hit fluctuation is continuous, the temporary stop time is short, so the tempo can be carved, and further reach production and battle production In the variable display, which has a long production time such as, there is no sense of discomfort even if the temporary stop time is lengthened (because the tempo collapses once in the reach production and battle production).

<11th Example> Update of background display Since the basic configuration of the 11th Example is the same as that of the 1st to 10th Examples, the description of the common points is omitted, and the differences from the 1st to 10th Examples are described. I will explain mainly.

In the low-probability low-base state 620 of FIG. 33, the first game based on the symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 by left-handed is mainly played, while the high-base state (low-probability high-base state 622 and high-probability high-base state). In 624) and the high-probability low-base state 626, the second game based on the symbol variation of the second special symbol 52 by right-handed is mainly used. Therefore, in the low-probability low-base state 620, the background display on the screen of the effect display device 60 is updated triggered by at least one of the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop of the first special symbol 51, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol 52. In principle, the background display should not be updated when the start and fluctuation stop. On the other hand, in the high base state (low probability high base state 622 and high probability high base state 624) and the high probability low base state 626, the background is triggered by at least one of the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop of the second special symbol 52. In principle, the display is updated, and the background display is not updated when the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop of the first special symbol 51 are triggered.

The background display is one of the elements constituting the production mode or production stage, and the background image is determined for each of a plurality of types of production modes or production stages. It indicates which production mode or production stage state is set depending on which of the plurality of types of background images is displayed. Multiple types of background images have different elements such as the scenery displayed as an image, the type of character, the color, and the pattern, and if you look at the characteristics of the background image, you can see which production mode or stage state you are in. It is structured so that it can be associated. The update of the background display and the display of the background image in each production stage are also referred to as "stage drawing".

FIG. 46 shows the relationship between the gaming state and the production stage. In this embodiment, the game and the effect are advanced by switching between a plurality of effect stages for each game state. For example, in the low probability low base state 620, at least two stages are included, and from the production stage A that displays the background image A with the character A as the motif, the production stage B that displays the background image B with the character B as the motif. Can be switched to. Even in the low-probability high-base state 622, at least two stages are included, and the production stage C for displaying the background image C can be switched to the production stage D for displaying the background image D. Even in the high probability high base state 624, at least two stages are included, and the production stage E for displaying the background image E can be switched to the production stage F for displaying the background image F. Even in the high probability low base state 626, at least two stages are included, and the effect stage G for displaying the background image G can be switched to the effect stage H for displaying the background image H.

In the low-probability low-base state 620, since the first game is the main game, when the first special symbol 51 reaches a predetermined number of times, the background image A is switched to the background image B when the symbol change starts or stops. .. In the high-probability high-base state 624, since the second game is the main game, when the second special symbol 52 reaches a predetermined number of times, the background image E is switched to the background image F with the start or stop of the symbol variation as a trigger. .. The high-probability low-base state 626 also switches from the background image G to the background image H when the second special symbol 52 reaches a predetermined number of times and the symbol variation starts or stops because the second game is the main component. Be done.

The low-probability high-base state 622 also mainly consists of the second game, except that one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 has reached a predetermined number of times (first special symbol 51 and second). When the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol 52 reaches a predetermined number of times), the background image C is switched to the background image D when the symbol variation starts or stops. That is, in the final symbol fluctuation during the duration of the low-probability high-base state 622, the background display can be updated at least one of the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop of the second special symbol 52, and the first special symbol can be updated. The background display can be updated even when at least one of the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop of 51 is triggered. The final symbol variation in the duration of the low-probability high-base state 622 refers to the 50th symbol variation in the high-base state whose final stage is, for example, the number of symbol variation reaches 50. Background image C (for example, the background corresponding to the low-probability high-base state 622 and the background inspiring the ally character to stand up) in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation of the low-probability high-base state 622 (the fluctuation up to the 49th time). Is displayed, and in the final fluctuation (50th fluctuation) in the low-probability high-base state 622, the background image D (for example, the low-probability high-base state 622 reaches the end and the winning prize ball in the low-probability high-base state 622) is displayed. Background) for displaying the result of the number is displayed. In this case, the number of symbol fluctuations is the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol 51 and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol 52. Therefore, the symbol variation reaching the 50th time, which is the final stage, is the symbol variation of the first special symbol 51. There is a mixture of a certain case and a case where the second special symbol 52 is a symbol variation. Therefore, even if the symbol variation of either the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 reaches the final stage, the update process such as changing the background image is performed when the symbol variation starts or stops. Make it possible.

As described above, in principle, the stage drawing in each production stage is executed when the fluctuation start or stop of the main symbol in the current gaming state of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is executed. .. However, when a reset occurs due to a predetermined error on at least one of the main board 200 and the sub board 300, the information on which production stage the reset occurred is not backed up, so that when the power is restored from the power failure. It is not possible to return to the production stage immediately (that is, the background image cannot be drawn immediately). However, in order to return to the production stage as soon as possible, not only the main symbol in the current gaming state, but also the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are exceptionally changed regardless of the gaming state. The stage drawing is configured to be executed even when the stop is triggered.

Based on the above, in principle, the background display can be updated appropriately according to the special symbol of the main game, while the background display can be updated corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol of the non-main game in special situations. By doing so, it is possible to display an appropriate background even in exceptional situations.

As a modification, after the end of the duration of the low-probability high-base state 622, the next symbol variation is started after the final symbol variation in the duration ends (the fluctuation stop command is transmitted). Therefore, or until the next symbol change is started, the hold of the first special symbol 51 is 0 in the predetermined time (the time that is the display condition of the standby demo screen, and the low probability low base state 620). To immediately switch from background D (special background for displaying game results in low-probability high-base state 622) to background A (normal background in low-probability low-base state 620) after the lapse of time). The normal background immediate switching specification command may be sent. Here, it is assumed that the first hold of the first special symbol 51 is 0 immediately after the end of the low probability high base state 622, and if there is a ball entering the first starting port 11 in that situation, that The background display can be switched instantly by sending the normal background immediate switching specification command for switching to the normal background when the ball enters. Further, even if the ball does not enter the first starting port 11 after the end of the duration of the low probability high base state 622, it is a predetermined time (a time that is a display condition of the standby demo screen, and is the first in the low probability low base state. The background display can be switched instantly by sending this normal background immediate switching specification command together with the command to switch to the standby demo screen after the elapse of (time measured in the situation where the hold of the special symbol 51 is 0). In this case, since the standby demo screen is displayed with priority, the display content that the player can actually see is the standby demo screen, and when the display of the standby demo screen ends, the normal background is displayed.) ..

<12th Example> Special variation effect Since the basic configuration of the 12th Example is the same as that of the 1st to 11th Examples, the description of the common points is omitted and the differences from the 1st to 11th Examples are mainly focused. Explain to.

In this embodiment, the count-up display is used as the display of the number of winning prize balls on the screen, and the winning prize is obtained every time the increment of the winning prize balls in the high probability low base state and / or the high base state reaches a predetermined number of balls. Perform a display that enlarges and emphasizes the number of balls. In this embodiment, the enlarged highlighting is executed every time the increment of the winning prize balls reaches "2500". At this time, since the enlarged highlighting of the number of prize balls is executed according to the cumulative number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry into the large winning opening, immediately after entering the large winning opening (game). Immediately after ball detection), the number of prize balls is added and displayed. However, since the count-up display of the number of prize balls is a format in which the numerical value is dynamically increased in units of one ball or several balls, the prize balls scheduled to be paid out based on the entry into the large winning opening. Even if the cumulative number of balls (real value) has already reached a multiple of "2500", it is only a numerical value on the display that is less than the real value until the count-up display of the number of prize balls catches up with the display of the multiple of "2500". .. Therefore, this numerical difference is processed as follows so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable.

The effect determining means 303 (sub CPU 310) manages the total number of prize balls to be paid out. The effect control means 304 (control CPU 320) counts up and displays the total number of prize balls on the screen of the effect display device 60, and the total number of prize balls managed by the effect determination means 303 (sub CPU 310) becomes a specific number. When it reaches, the number of prize balls is highlighted when the total is reached, even before the number of prize balls on the display displayed in the count-up reaches a specific number.

FIG. 47 shows an example of a screen displaying the number of winning prize balls during the small hit rush. (A) mainly shows the state during the count-up display before the enlarged highlighting, (b) mainly shows the enlarged highlighting, and (c) mainly shows the state of the count-up display after the enlarged highlighting.

In FIG. 47 (a), the character 616 is displayed in the substantially center of the screen together with the background image of the small hit rush mode. At the edge of the screen, the alternative symbols 601a, 601b and the simplified symbols 602a, 602b, 602c, 602d are displayed in a variable manner. The launch direction indicator 606 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. At the left end of the screen, the number of big hits 614, the total number of winning prize balls count display 607, the winning count lamp 618, and the number of small hits 615 are displayed. Here, the jackpot count 614 is the number of occurrences of special games in the high-probability low-base state and / or the high-probability low-base state (shifts to the high-probability low-base state and / or the high-base state, and then shifts to the low-probability low-base state. The number of big hits before the game is played), but it is the number of special games (first hit) in the high-probability low-base state and / or the low-probability low-base state that triggered the transition to the high-probability low-base state. May be added, and the total number of prize balls won count display 607 is the total number of prize balls won in the special game or the small hit game in the high probability low base state and / or the high base state (high probability low base). The total number of prize balls obtained between the transition to the state and / or the high base state and the transition to the low probability low base state (however, the prize obtained in the small hit game in the high base state). The number of balls is not added), but even if the number of prize balls acquired in the special game (first hit) in the low probability low base state that triggered the transition to the high probability low base state and / or the high base state is added. Often, the winning count lamp 618 lights up images that imitate the lamps one by one by entering the large winning opening opened during the special game and / or the small hit game, and the number of small hits 615 is , The number of small hit games in the high-probability low-base state (the number of small hits in the high-probability low-base state that was won between the transition to the high-probability low-base state and the transition to the low-probability low-base state) ). As described above, the numerical value of the total winning prize ball count display 607 is the total of the winning prize balls in the special game and the winning prize balls in the small hit game, and in the example of the figure, from "02180" to "02181". Indicates the moment when the count is increased.

In FIG. 47 (b), when the number of winning prize balls managed by the effect determining means 303 reaches "2500", the enlarged prize ball number display 619 in which "2500 GET" is largely written is displayed in the center of the screen. .. At this time, "02350", which is the display content of the total number of winning prize balls count display 607, is in the middle of counting up and is only a numerical value on the display, and is in a state of not catching up with the actual value of the total number of winning prize balls. Is shown. In addition, the count-up is interrupted in the total prize ball count display 607 triggered by the display of the expanded prize ball number display 619, and the numerical value of the total prize ball count display 607 is the real value shown in the enlarged prize ball number display 619. By updating, the unfinished count-up will be counted up. In the example of this figure, a part of the total prize ball count display 607 overlaps with the enlarged prize ball display 619 and is difficult to see. Under such a difficult-to-see state, the total number of prize balls won. The numerical value of the count display 607 is updated with a real value. As a modification, the enlarged prize ball number display 619 is displayed so as to completely cover all the total prize ball count display 607, and the total prize ball count display 607 is hidden during that time. You may. Further, as another modification, even if the expanded prize ball number display 619 is displayed, the total acquisition amount is not updated to the real value shown in the expanded prize ball number display 619. The count-up of the prize ball count display 607 may be configured not to be interrupted (continued).

In FIG. 47 (c), after the enlarged prize ball number display 619 is deleted, the total prize ball number count display 607 after being updated with a real value is displayed, and the count-up display is restarted from that value. ..

As a modification, even when a specific effect display other than the enlarged prize ball number display 619, for example, an effect of displaying an image having a size that covers most of the screen occurs, the total prize ball count display 607 is displayed. After hiding the display of the number of prize balls that was being counted up, if the display of the number of prize balls is resumed at the end of a specific effect display, the incomplete count-up is counted up. The display may be resumed with. Specifically, a background change notice that covers most or all of the screen is provided, and when this background change notice is generated, the total number of prize balls that were being counted up in the total prize ball count display 607 is displayed. It is hidden (at this time, the unfinished count-up is not counted up at the timing immediately before it is hidden), and the total number of prize balls won after the background change notice is displayed for 10 seconds and hidden. The count display 607 is restarted, and at the timing of the restart of the display, the display is restarted in a state where the unfinished count-up has been counted up. Even if the time required to count up the incomplete portion is 10 seconds or more (for example, 20 seconds), 20 seconds have not passed 10 seconds after the background change notice is displayed until it is hidden (for example, 20 seconds). The time required to count up the unfinished portion has not elapsed), but the total number of winning balls count display 607 is restarted in a state where the unfinished portion of the count-up has been counted up. As a modification, when this background change notice occurs, when the display of the number of prize balls that was being counted up in the total number of prize balls count display 607 is hidden, it is already at the timing immediately before the non-display. The unfinished count-up may be configured to be counted up, and even in that case, the total number of prize balls counted display 607 is counted after the background change notice is displayed for 10 seconds and hidden. The display is resumed with the unfinished portion of the upload already counted up.

In the present embodiment, the effect determining means 303 (sub CPU310) is configured to manage the total number of prize balls to be paid out, but manages the total number of paid out (paid out) prize balls. In that case, the total number of winning balls count display 607 and the enlarged prize ball number display 619 or the count-up display may be paid instead of being displayed based on the number of prize balls to be paid out. It may be configured to display based on the number of prize balls issued (paid out).

For this embodiment and the modified example, "display of the number of prize balls won in the high probability low base state and / or high base state", that is, "display of the cumulative number of prize balls won in the so-called consecutive chan" (hereinafter, We have explained (referred to as "total display during consecutive chans"), but when the game state before or after the execution of a special game is a high-probability low-base state, "the number of prize balls won in the special game" Total display with the number of prize balls won in one or more small hit games (from the transition to the high probability high base state to the big hit in the high probability high base state) in the high probability high base state "(hereinafter," The same configuration may be applied to (referred to as "total display of one set"). Further, in such a configuration, regarding the total number of winning prize balls count display, the total display during the consecutive chan and the total display of one set may be displayed at the same time, and the total display during the consecutive chan and one set may be displayed. It is preferable to display both count-ups of the total display of. As for the enlarged highlighting, both the total display in the continuous chan and the total display of one set may be enlarged and highlighted, but only one of them may be enlarged and highlighted. Further, the timing of enlarging and highlighting may be when the total number of winning prize balls count display reaches a specific number, that is, the number of prize balls to be paid out managed by the production determination means 303 (sub CPU310). Instead of displaying the total or the total number of prize balls paid out (paid out) based on reaching a specific number, the total number of prize balls won count display has reached the display related to the specific number. It may be displayed based on.

Regarding the modified example of displaying both the total display in the consecutive chan and the total display in one set, the total display in the continuous chan is immediately switched and displayed without counting up (for example, in the case of 15 prize balls). , 2000 → 2001 → 2002 → ..., instead of counting up one by one, suddenly switching to 2000 → 2015) On the other hand, the total display of one set is configured to be counted up. Alternatively, the total display of one set may be switched and displayed immediately without counting up (for example, in the case of 15 prize balls, the total is counted up by 1 like 2000 → 2001 → 2002 → ...). On the other hand, the total display during the consecutive chan may be configured to be a count-up display (instead of suddenly switching from 2000 to 2015). As for the enlarged highlighting in this case, both the total display in the consecutive chan and the total display of one set may be enlarged and highlighted, but only one of them may be enlarged and highlighted. The timing may be the case where the total number of prize balls counted is reached a specific number, that is, the total number of prize balls to be paid out managed by the production determination means 303 (sub CPU310), or Rather than displaying based on the total number of paid out (paid out) prize balls reaching a specific number, based on the total number of prize balls counted display reaching the display related to a specific number. It may be displayed.

Further, with respect to this embodiment and each modification, the total display during continuous chan or the total display of one set has been described, but the same configuration may be applied to the display during the special game. That is, during the special game (for example, during the special game corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot), when performing the total display during the continuous chan and / and the total display of one set, the same as in this embodiment and each modification. Depending on the configuration, count-up display, enlarged highlight display, and total number of prize balls may be displayed. In this case, a count-up display, an enlarged highlighting display, and a total winning number of winning balls count display are displayed based on the entry into the large winning opening during the execution of the special game (during each round). However, in a special game with a small number of winning prize balls, for example, a special game corresponding to a 2R normal big hit, even if the ball enters the big winning opening, the count-up effect, the enlarged highlighting, the number of big hits 614, and the total winning prize balls It is preferable that the number count display 607, the winning count lamp 618, and the number of small hits 615 are not displayed. In a special game with a relatively small profit, adopting the same aspect as the special game with a relatively high profit may mislead the player into thinking that it is a big hit in favor of the player, which is prevented. Because it is necessary to do.

In addition, during the special game, the number of prize balls acquired during the special game is added to the total number of prize balls (combined display with the number of prize balls of the small hit game) such as the total number of prize balls counted display 607. Each time, it is added in real time and the total number of winning prize balls count display 607 is updated and displayed. Here, the update display for adding the number of winning balls is displayed even if there is the next new winning (winning) during the addition effect of adding the winning balls for one winning (winning). The addition effect of is not interrupted, and after the addition effect is completed, the addition effect for the next incoming ball is executed. For example, during the display of switching from the display of "2400" to the display of "2415" (for example, "2400" → "2401" → "2402" → ... → "2415", the count is gradually increased. Even if a ball entering the large winning opening 20 is detected while "2402" is being displayed in the production), once the count-up to "2415" is completed, the count-up corresponding to the ball entry is started. To do. As a modification, the previous count-up effect may be forcibly terminated (the display of "2402" is counted up to "2415" at once), and the count-up corresponding to the incoming ball may be started. Further, the total number of prize balls may be displayed differently from the total number of prize balls count display 607 in FIG. 47 (separate display). In that case, the total number of prize balls count display 607 was acquired during the consecutive chan. Cumulative value (total number of prize balls won for multiple special games and during multiple small hit rushes staying before or after the multiple special games are executed (multiple high probability low base states) (Total value with the total number of prize balls acquired in), and the total number of prize balls is only during one special game and one small hit rush staying before or after the special game is executed ( It is preferable to add up the number of prize balls acquired in a plurality of high-probability low-base states).

For the main decorative symbol 600 and the alternative symbol 601 in this embodiment, the specifications described below (relationship between the main decorative symbol 600 and the alternative symbol 601) may be adopted.
(1) The display area of the main decorative symbol 600, which is easy for the player to recognize, is larger than the display area of the alternative symbol 601 for display security (to compensate for the display state of the decorative symbol).
(2) By setting the display position of the main decorative symbol 600 to a different display position depending on whether it is in the first effect mode or the second effect mode, the variety of effects in the decorative symbol can be increased according to the effect mode. realizable. On the other hand, since the alternative symbol 601 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol, it is an extra development design as the same display position regardless of whether it is the first effect mode or the second effect mode. It is preferable not to do this.
(3) By setting the display mode of the main decorative symbol 600 to a different display mode depending on whether it is the first effect mode or the second effect mode, the variety of effects in the decorative symbol can be increased according to the effect mode. realizable. For example, in the first effect mode, the main decorative symbol 600 is composed of only the decorative symbols of numbers (decorative symbols such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second effect mode, the decorative symbols of numbers are used. And the decorative symbol of the ally character are combined to form the main decorative symbol 600 ("1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g", etc. Decorative design). On the other hand, since the alternative symbol 601 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol, only the same display mode, for example, a number, regardless of whether it is the first effect mode or the second effect mode. It is preferable that the alternative symbol 601 is composed of only the decorative symbols and that no extra development design is required.
(4) The display area of the main decorative symbol 600 is variable (moved) according to the fluctuation status (for example, whether it is in normal reach, whether it is in super reach, etc.), so that the main decorative symbol is moved. Diversity can be added to the production of 600. On the other hand, since the alternative symbol 601 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol, the display area of the alternative symbol 601 does not change (does not move) so that no extra development design can be performed. Suitable.
(5) The fluctuation speed of the main decorative symbol 600 can be changed to low speed, medium speed, high speed, ultra high speed, etc. according to the fluctuation status (for example, whether it is at the start of fluctuation, in the middle of fluctuation, or just before the end of fluctuation). By doing so, it is possible to give diversity to the production of the main decorative design 600. On the other hand, since the alternative symbol 601 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol, the fluctuation speed of the alternative symbol 601 is not variable, or the number of stages of variation is reduced (for example, only low speed and high speed). Therefore, it is preferable not to carry out extra development design. Also, regarding the direction of fluctuation, the main decorative symbol 600 enables not only the fluctuation from top to bottom but also the fluctuation from bottom to top (it enables fluctuation in a plurality of directions), while the alternative symbol 601 allows the variation. It is preferable to make only the fluctuation from top to bottom.
(6) The main decorative symbol 600 is temporarily stopped (of the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52) before the fixed stop (stop at the timing when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 stops). A temporary stop is performed with a slight swaying fluctuation in the middle of the fluctuation, and at that time, a special design that is a decorative design other than numbers (for example, the word "super" that announces the development to super reach is written. By temporarily stopping the decorative design), the effect of the main decorative pattern 600 and other effects can be related. On the other hand, since the alternative symbol 601 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol, the alternative symbol 601 is not temporarily stopped or the special symbol is not temporarily stopped, and an extra development design is made. It is preferable not to do so.
(7) The main decorative symbol 600 overlaps with the display area of other notice effects (for example, ally character appearance effect and enemy character appearance effect in FIG. 47 and the like), that is, superimposed display is performed. Such superimposition display is allowed in order to perform a powerful effect by using the area on the screen as much as possible, but the alternative symbol 601 plays a role of compensating the display state of the decorative symbol, so that the alternative symbol 601 It is desirable to design the display area of the above so that it does not overlap with the display area of the other notice effect (does not overlap and display). However, regarding the relationship with the special notice effect that is inevitably duplicated (for example, the background notice displayed on the entire screen), the display priority of the alternative symbol 601 is set higher than the display priority of the special notice effect. It is preferable to set it high (set the alternative symbol 601 to be displayed in front of the special advance notice effect). Further, since it is desirable that the launch direction indicator 606 shown in FIG. 32 or the like is always visible to the player, the display area of the alternative symbol 601 and the display area of the launch direction indicator 606 do not overlap ( It is desirable to design so that it is not superimposed. However, when the display area of the main decorative symbol 600 is moved or enlarged, the display area of the main decorative symbol 600 and the display area of the launch direction indicator 606 may overlap (superimpose display). In that case, set the display priority of the main decorative symbol 600 to be lower than the display priority of the launch direction indicator 606 (set the main decorative symbol 600 to be displayed on the rear surface of the launch direction indicator 606). Is preferable.
(8) In the main decorative symbol 600, in addition to the fluctuation (for example, movement from top to bottom), a predetermined operation is performed at the start of fluctuation, immediately after temporary stop, after the reach is established, during temporary stop, and the like. The accompanying display may be performed (the operation in each situation may be referred to as a fluctuation start operation, a temporary stop operation, a reach establishment operation, or a shaking operation). For example, in the case of non-reach (when the main decorative symbol 600 and the alternative symbol 601 are displayed as "624" when the confirmation is stopped), when the fluctuation starts, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the main decorative symbol 600 are displayed. After performing an operation that expands all of the above, it starts to fluctuate, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation and then temporarily stops "6" and then shakes. Continue, then when the right symbol temporarily stops, perform a bouncing motion, then continue the swinging motion after "4" temporarily stops, and then bounce when the middle symbol temporarily stops. After performing such an operation, "2" temporarily stops and performs a slight shaking operation, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the operations of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are terminated. In this case, the alternative symbol 601 does not perform each operation at all. In addition, in the case of normal reach (when the main decorative symbol 600 and the alternative symbol 601 are displayed as "212" when the confirmation is stopped), when the fluctuation starts, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the main decorative symbol 600 After performing an operation that expands everything, it starts to fluctuate, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation and then continues the shaking operation after "2" temporarily stops. After that, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, then continues the swinging motion after "2" temporarily stops, and then the left symbol to notify that it is reach. After the right symbol rotates, the swaying motion is continued again, and then when the middle symbol temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing motion, "1" temporarily stops and the swaying motion is slightly stopped. After that, at the fixed stop timing, all the operations of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are ended (the middle symbol does not rotate). In this case, the alternative symbol 601 does not perform each operation at all. In addition, in the case of super reach (when the main decorative symbol 600 and the alternative symbol 601 are displayed as "232" when the confirmation is stopped), when the fluctuation starts, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the main decorative symbol 600 are displayed. After performing an operation that expands all of the above, it starts to fluctuate, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation and then temporarily stops "2" and then shakes. Continue, then when the right symbol temporarily stops, perform a bouncing motion, then continue the swaying motion after "2" temporarily stops, and then left to notify that it is reach. The symbol and the right symbol rotate and then continue the swaying motion again, and then the middle symbol fluctuates while the left and right symbols are swaying (at this time, the middle symbol expands). It fluctuates from top to bottom in the state of being overlapped, and the overlapping or overlapping ratio is high for the left and right symbols that were not overlapping or had a small overlapping ratio until then), and then the super It shifts from the normal background to the reach background in order to execute the reach effect, and when the super reach effect notifies that it is the result of the deviation, it shifts from the reach background to the normal background, and after the transition, the left pattern, the middle The symbol and the right symbol continue to swing for a predetermined time, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the operations of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are terminated (the middle symbol does not bounce or rotate). In this case, the alternative symbol 601 does not perform each operation at all. With this configuration, it is possible to give diversity to the production of the main decorative symbol 600, while the alternative symbol 601 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol. Is preferably configured so as not to perform any particular operation, and does not require unnecessary development and design. Further, even between the time when the fluctuation is stopped and the time when the standby demo screen is displayed, the main decorative symbol 600 swings after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after the fluctuation is stopped. However, even in this situation, it is preferable that the alternative symbol 601 does not operate at all. With this configuration, it is possible to motivate the game even while the game is waiting (the symbol is stopped), and the alternative symbol 601 does not perform a shaking motion to notify that the game is waiting. Can be secured. In addition, when the standby demo screen is displayed, the main decorative symbol 600 is hidden, but it is preferable that the alternative symbol 601 is continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to secure the display of what kind of symbol is stopped while emphasizing the display of the standby demo screen. Further, the specific symbol (for example, “7” of the middle symbol) in the main decorative symbol 600 may be configured so that the predetermined operation is not performed or the probability of performing the predetermined operation is lower than that of the other symbols. This predetermined operation may be, for example, the above-mentioned temporary stop operation (jumping operation). With this configuration, the rarity of the movement in a specific symbol can be increased.

In addition, it is preferable that the count-up effect in this embodiment is performed even during the execution of the special game (based on the detection of the ball entering the large winning opening in the special game), and the specifications described below are adopted. May be good.
(1) A count-up effect corresponding to the entry of game balls within the specified count number (particularly, a count-up effect corresponding to the 10th count, which is the specified count number) is being performed, and is still for 15 balls. If an over-winning occurs when the count-up for the count-up is not completed, the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed yet. After all the count-ups for the count-up effect are completed (count for 15 balls) It is desirable that the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning is started (after the above). Here, if the over-winning is detected just before the end of the interval period (the pause time from the end of each unit game to the start of the setting of the next unit game or the jackpot end demo), The count-up effect itself corresponding to the over winning will overlap with the execution period of the next round (next round starting after the interval period elapses), but the next round (next starting after the interval period elapses). Even if there is a ball in the large winning opening 20 during the execution of the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning performed during the execution of the round), the counting-up effect corresponding to the over-winning is performed. When the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed yet, the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed. After all the count-ups for the count-up effect have been completed (for 15 balls). (After the count is performed), it is preferable that the count-up effect corresponding to the entry of the large winning opening 20 in the next round is started.
(2) The count-up time for one prize ball (the time required to count up from "N" to "N + 1") is set to "0.03 seconds", that is, in "0.03 seconds" increments. Is counted up. The execution time of the count-up effect is the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) given by inserting one game ball into the large winning opening 20 in the time value required for counting up for one prize ball. Derived by multiplying the values, the execution time of the count-up effect is "15 (number of unit prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds". However, even during the execution of the special game, the count-up effect is not executed during the execution of the start demo and the end demo. Further, the execution time of the count-up effect is set shorter than the interval time (also referred to as “interval period”) set after the end of each unit game. The interval time is a waiting time set between each unit game or between the final unit game and the end demo, and is a period during which the closing operation of the grand prize opening 20 is maintained from the start of the closing operation. It is a waiting time or an end demo waiting time, and is set to "2 seconds" in all round games. Further, by configuring the count-up production time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), the game ball enters the large winning opening 20 just before the end of a certain unit game. Even when the count-up effect is performed based on the above, the count-up effect is completed within the interval time after the end of the unit game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the count-up effect will be performed over the interval period until the next unit game or the end demo (if an over prize is won, the interval period may be exceeded). , The division between each unit game or the division between the final unit game and the end demo can be clarified.
(3) The count-up production time is set shorter than the execution time of the end demo. As described above, the count-up effect time is set to "0.45 seconds". The execution time of the end demo is set to "20 seconds", which is common to all jackpot types (production during jackpot). The execution time of the end demo is the waiting time from the time when the interval time after the end of the last unit game in the special game elapses to the end of the special game. That is, the execution time of the end demo does not include the interval time set after the end of the final unit game. That is, during the interval time after the end of the final unit game, the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 20 is effectively detected (that is, it is detected as the target of the winning ball payout, and it is determined as an illegal entry. It is set as the remaining time (grace time) of the unit game that may be detected), but the execution time of the end demo is valid for the game ball to enter the grand prize opening 20 within that time. It is set as a preparation time for a game (effect mode) after the end of a special game separated from the unit game, which is unlikely to be detected in. By configuring the count-up production time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the end demo, the game ball enters the grand prize opening 20 just before the end of the final unit game. Even if the count-up effect is performed based on the ball, even if an over-winning occurs in the final unit game, the large winning opening 20 is closed after the final unit game. If the specifications are such that the count-up effect is performed even later (even during the end demo period), the count-up effect will be completed within the end demo period. Therefore, the count-up effect is not performed over the end demo period until the fluctuation display after the end of the special game, and the division between the end of the special game and the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation is clarified. can do.
(4) When a specified number of game balls enter the large winning opening 20 in one unit game, the total time of the count-up production time for the specified number of counts in this one unit game (one unit). The count-up effect for the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the game) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. Specifically, the total time of the count-up effect time for the specified count number is "0.45 seconds (count-up effect time) x 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds". On the other hand, as described above, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds", which is common to all jackpot types (production during jackpot). In the present embodiment, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up production time for the specified number of counts is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demo, so that the unit of the final round Even if a plurality of count-up effects are continuously performed based on a plurality of game balls continuously entering the large winning opening 20 just before the end of the game, after the final unit game. If the specification is such that the count-up effect is performed even after the closing of a certain big winning opening 20 (even during the big hit end demo period), the count-up effect will be completed within the big hit end demo period. Therefore, the count-up effect does not extend beyond the jackpot end demo period to the variable display after the end of the special game, and the division between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display of the first rotation is clarified. Can be.

The present invention has been described above based on examples. It is understood by those skilled in the art that this embodiment is merely an example, and that various modifications are possible for each of these components and combinations of each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. is there. Hereinafter, modification examples will be given.

The techniques described in the examples and modifications may be specified by the following aspects.

[First aspect]
[Item 1]
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that allows the entry of game balls,
An operating port that allows the entry of game balls,
An expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows a game ball to enter or easily enter the second starting port when expanded.
A large winning opening that allows the game ball to enter or is easy to enter when opened,
A first pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is in a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the first start port.
A second pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the second start port.
A first symbol display device in which the first special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A second symbol display device in which the second special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol for indicating that the expansion mechanism is expanded is displayed in a variable manner when the ball enters the operating port.
A first pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A second pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A display control means for varyingly displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and
With the first hold control means, which holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means as the first hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the first hit / miss judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
A second hold control means that holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means as a second hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the second hit / fail judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means is a big hit, the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, and the special game control means.
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is a small hit, or when the result of at least one of the first hit / miss judgment means and the second hit / miss judgment means is a small hit. A small hit game control means that executes a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
As the state related to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and a ball entry ease state in which the ball entry ease is higher than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. A ball entry state setting means that can set the ball easy state, and
A normal probability state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means and the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means become a big hit with a predetermined probability, the result of the hit / miss judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means, and the second. A probability state setting means that has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means becomes a big hit with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state can be set.
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and
The production determining means for determining the production content and
With
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state.
It is configured so that the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit. The result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is not a small hit, while the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means may be a small hit.
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced as compared with the case where the expansion mechanism is not expanded. The second starting port and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the ball entry easy state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria, which is easy to determine.
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion in which a fluctuation pattern having a relatively longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. The fluctuation pattern is determined
In the first gaming state in which the ball is easy to enter, if the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means or the second hit / miss judgment means is a big hit, the start of the symbol variation related to the result of the hit / miss judgment is started. As an opportunity to end the easy entry state,
In the second gaming state, which is a state in which the ball is easy to enter and is different from the first gaming state, the result of the hit / fail determination by the first hit / miss determination means or the second hit / miss determination means is a big hit. , A ball game machine characterized in that the easy-to-enter state is terminated when the symbol change related to the result of the hit / fail determination is terminated.
[Item 2]
The first gaming state is a probability fluctuation state and a ball entry easy state.
The ball game machine according to item 1, wherein the second gaming state is a normal probability state and a ball entry easy state.
[Item 3]
In the first gaming state, the specific effect can be executed only when the result of the hit / fail determination by the first hit / fail determination means or the second hit / fail determination means is a big hit, and in the specific effect, the big hit Performs an effect that suggests to the player whether or not the special game corresponding to is a special game that involves a transition to a probability fluctuation state.
In the second gaming state, the item 1 or 2 is characterized in that the specific effect can be executed even when the result of the hit / miss determination by the first hit / miss determination means or the second hit / miss determination means is not a big hit. The listed ball game machine.
[Item 4]
In any of the items 1 to 3, in the first gaming state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined so that the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes relatively long. The listed ball game machine.
[Item 5]
In the first gaming state, which shifts when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means or the second hit / miss judgment means becomes a big hit in the probability fluctuation state, the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined so that the time becomes relatively long.
In the first gaming state, the first game state shifts when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means or the second hit / miss determination means becomes a big hit in the normal game state and the normal ball entry state. The ball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 4, wherein the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined so that the deviation fluctuation time of the special symbol is relatively short.
[Item 6]
When the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined so that the disengagement fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes relatively long in the first gaming state, the number of the first hold reaches a predetermined number or more. The ball game machine according to item 4 or 5, wherein the ball game machine is characterized by being
[Item 7]
The display control means waits for the fluctuation display of the other when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variablely displayed, and when the fluctuation start timing of the first special symbol is reached, the display control means said. The ball game machine according to any one of items 4 to 6, wherein even if the lottery value is held as the second hold, the variable display of the first special symbol is preferentially executed.
[Item 8]
The display control means variablely displays the first special symbol even when the second special symbol is changing, and variablely displays the second special symbol even when the first special symbol is changing.
In the first gaming state, when the number of the first hold is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined so that the detachment fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes relatively long. The ball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 3, characterized in that.
[Item 9]
The display control means waits for the fluctuation display of the other when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variablely displayed, and when the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol is reached, the display control means said. Even if the lottery value is held as the first hold, the variable display of the second special symbol is prioritized and executed.
In the first gaming state, when the number of the first hold is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined so that the detachment fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes relatively long. The ball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 3, characterized in that.

[Second aspect]
[Item 1]
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that allows the entry of game balls,
An operating port that allows the entry of game balls,
An expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows a game ball to enter or easily enter the second starting port when expanded.
A large winning opening that allows the game ball to enter or is easy to enter when opened,
A first pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is in a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the first start port.
A second pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the second start port.
A first symbol display device in which the first special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A second symbol display device in which the second special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol for indicating that the expansion mechanism is expanded is displayed in a variable manner when the ball enters the operating port.
A first pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A second pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A display control means for varyingly displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and
With the first hold control means, which holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means as the first hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the first hit / miss judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
A second hold control means that holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means as a second hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the second hit / fail judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means is a big hit, the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, and the special game control means.
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is a small hit, or when the result of at least one of the first hit / miss judgment means and the second hit / miss judgment means is a small hit. A small hit game control means that executes a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
As the state related to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and a ball entry ease state in which the ball entry ease is higher than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. A ball entry state setting means that can set the ball easy state, and
A normal probability state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means and the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means become a big hit with a predetermined probability, the result of the hit / miss judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means, and the second. A probability state setting means that has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means becomes a big hit with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state can be set.
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and
The production determining means for determining the production content and
With
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state.
It is configured so that the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit. The result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is not a small hit, while the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means may be a small hit.
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced as compared with the case where the expansion mechanism is not expanded. The second starting port and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the ball entry easy state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria, which is easy to determine.
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion in which a fluctuation pattern having a relatively longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. The fluctuation pattern is determined
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means or the second hit / miss judgment means is a big hit, the first symbol is stopped and displayed when the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is the first symbol. After the execution of the special game executed in is completed, the process shifts to the first game state, which is the easy-to-enter state, with the end condition of the easy-to-enter state as the first condition.
When the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail determination means or the second hit / fail determination means is a big hit is a second symbol of a type different from the first symbol. After the execution of the special game executed by displaying the stop display of the second symbol is completed, the ball entry easy state is a second condition in which the end condition of the ball entry easy state is a second condition different from the first condition. A ball game machine characterized by shifting to the gaming state of 2.
[Item 2]
The first condition is the start of the symbol change related to the result of the hit / fail judgment when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit.
The ball game machine according to item 1, wherein the second condition is the end of the symbol variation related to the result of the hit / miss determination when the result of the hit / miss determination is a big hit.
[Item 3]
The first condition is that the number of symbol fluctuations after the transition to the easy-to-enter state reaches a predetermined number.
The ball game machine according to item 1, wherein the second condition is a case where the result of the hit / fail determination is a small hit.
[Item 4]
The ball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 3, wherein the first gaming state and the second gaming state are the same gaming state, both of which are in a probability fluctuating state and a ball entry easy state. ..
[Item 5]
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are different gaming states.
The first gaming state is a probability fluctuation state and a ball entry easy state.
The bullet game machine according to any one of items 1 to 3, wherein the second gaming state is a normal probability state and a ball entry easy state.
[Item 6]
In any of the items 1 to 5, in the first gaming state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined so that the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes relatively long. The listed ball game machine.
[Item 7]
In the first gaming state, which shifts when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means or the second hit / miss judgment means becomes a big hit in the probability fluctuation state, the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined so that the time becomes relatively long.
In the first gaming state, the first game state shifts when the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means or the second hit / miss determination means becomes a big hit in the normal game state and the normal ball entry state. The ball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 5, wherein the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined so that the deviation fluctuation time of the special symbol is relatively short.
[Item 8]
When the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined so that the disengagement fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes relatively long in the first gaming state, the number of the first hold reaches a predetermined number or more. The ball game machine according to item 6 or 7, wherein the ball game machine is characterized by being
[Item 9]
The display control means waits for the fluctuation display of the other when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variablely displayed, and when the fluctuation start timing of the first special symbol is reached, the display control means said. The bullet game machine according to any one of items 6 to 8, wherein even if the lottery value is held as the second hold, the variable display of the first special symbol is preferentially executed.
[Item 10]
The display control means variablely displays the first special symbol even when the second special symbol is changing, and variablely displays the second special symbol even when the first special symbol is changing.
In the first gaming state, when the number of the first hold is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined so that the detachment fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes relatively long. The ball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 5, characterized in that.
[Item 11]
The display control means waits for the fluctuation display of the other when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variablely displayed, and when the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol is reached, the display control means said. Even if the lottery value is held as the first hold, the variable display of the second special symbol is prioritized and executed.
In the first gaming state, when the number of the first hold is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined so that the detachment fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes relatively long. The ball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 5, characterized in that.

[Third aspect]
[Item 1]
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that allows the entry of game balls,
An operating port that allows the entry of game balls,
An expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows a game ball to enter or easily enter the second starting port when expanded.
A large winning opening that allows the game ball to enter or is easy to enter when opened,
A first pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is in a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the first start port.
A second pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the second start port.
A first symbol display device in which the first special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A second symbol display device in which the second special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol for indicating that the expansion mechanism is expanded is displayed in a variable manner when the ball enters the operating port.
A first pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A second pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A display control means for varyingly displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means is a big hit, the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, and the special game control means.
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is a small hit, or when the result of at least one of the first hit / miss judgment means and the second hit / miss judgment means is a small hit. A small hit game control means that executes a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
As the state related to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and a ball entry ease state in which the ball entry ease is higher than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. A ball entry state setting means that can set the ball easy state, and
A normal probability state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means and the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means become a big hit with a predetermined probability, the result of the hit / miss judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means, and the second. A probability state setting means that has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means becomes a big hit with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state can be set.
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and
The production determining means for determining the production content and
An effect control means for displaying the effect content based on the determination by the effect determination means on the effect display device,
With
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state.
It is configured so that the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit. The result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is not a small hit, while the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means may be a small hit.
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced as compared with the case where the expansion mechanism is not expanded. The second starting port and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the ball entry easy state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria, which is easy to determine.
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion in which a fluctuation pattern having a relatively longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. The fluctuation pattern is determined
In the first situation, which is a normal ball entry state, a warning prompting the player to hit the ball aiming at the first start port is output by a predetermined output means, triggered by the entry into the second start port. On the other hand, in the second situation, which is a situation different from the first situation in which the ball is normally entered, even if the ball is entered into the second starting port, the player is given the first start. A ball game machine characterized in that a warning for hitting a ball aimed at the mouth is not output by a predetermined output means.
[Item 2]
The ball game machine according to item 1, wherein when a ball enters the second starting port while the warning is being output, the output of the warning is restarted over a predetermined time.
[Item 3]
With the first hold control means, which holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means as the first hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the first hit / miss judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
A second hold control means that holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means as a second hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the second hit / fail judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
With more
The ball game machine according to item 1 or 2, wherein when the second hold reaches the upper limit while the warning is being output, the warning is switched from the output normal state to the output limit state.
[Item 4]
Items 1 to 3 characterized in that the warning is terminated when the ball enters the first starting port or when the ball should be entered into the second starting port while the warning is being output. The ball game machine described in any of.
[Item 5]
From the change from the situation where the ball should be put into the second starting port to the situation where the ball should be put into the first starting port to the elapse of a predetermined period, even in the normal probability state and the normal ball entering state, the above-mentioned The ball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 4, wherein the output of the warning is limited.
[Item 6]
The ball game machine according to item 5, wherein when a predetermined number or more of balls have entered the second starting port while limiting the output of the warning, the restriction is released.
[Item 7]
The bullet game machine according to item 5 or 6, wherein the display for guiding the hit ball aimed at the first starting port to the player is not limited even while the output of the warning is limited. ..
[Item 8]
In the easy-to-enter state, or in the probability-variable state and the normal ball-entry state, the player is hit by the ball aiming at the second starting port for at least a predetermined time with the ball entering the first starting port. A urging warning is output, and if there is a ball entering the second starting port or a situation is required to enter the first starting port during the output of the warning, the warning during the output is terminated. The ball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 7, wherein the ball game machine is characterized.

[Fourth aspect]
[Item 1]
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that allows the entry of game balls,
An operating port that allows the entry of game balls,
An expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows a game ball to enter or easily enter the second starting port when expanded.
A large winning opening that allows the game ball to enter or is easy to enter when opened,
A first pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is in a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the first start port.
A second pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the second start port.
A first symbol display device in which the first special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A second symbol display device in which the second special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol for indicating that the expansion mechanism is expanded is displayed in a variable manner when the ball enters the operating port.
A first pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A second pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A display control means for varyingly displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and
With the first hold control means, which holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means as the first hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the first hit / miss judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
A second hold control means that holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means as a second hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the second hit / fail judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means is a big hit, the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, and the special game control means.
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is a small hit, or when the result of at least one of the first hit / miss judgment means and the second hit / miss judgment means is a small hit. A small hit game control means that executes a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
As the state related to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and a ball entry ease state in which the ball entry ease is higher than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. A ball entry state setting means that can set the ball easy state, and
A normal probability state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means and the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means become a big hit with a predetermined probability, the result of the hit / miss judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means, and the second. A probability state setting means that has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means becomes a big hit with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state can be set.
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and
The production determining means for determining the production content and
An effect control means for displaying the effect content based on the determination by the effect determination means on the effect display device,
With
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state.
It is configured so that the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit. The result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is not a small hit, while the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means may be a small hit.
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced as compared with the case where the expansion mechanism is not expanded. The second starting port and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the ball entry easy state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria, which is easy to determine.
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion in which a fluctuation pattern having a relatively longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. The fluctuation pattern is determined
As the types of special games, the first special game in which the profit given to the player during the execution of the special game is relatively large, and the first special game in which the profit given to the player during the execution of the special game is relatively small. There are two special games, and after the end of the first special game, the probability fluctuates and the ball is easily entered, while after the end of the second special game, the probability fluctuates and the normal ball is entered, or the normal ball is entered. It becomes a probability state and a ball entry easy state,
A ball game machine characterized in that the profit given to a player during a probability fluctuation state and a normal ball entry state is larger than the profit given to a player during a probability fluctuation state and a ball entry easy state.
[Item 2]
From the sum of the expected value of winning the prize ball in the period of the first special game and the expected value of acquiring the prize ball in the period of the probability fluctuation state and the easy entry state, the expected value of winning the prize ball in the period of the second special game. The ball game machine according to item 1, wherein the total value of the prize ball acquisition expected values during the period of the probability fluctuation state and the normal ball entry state is larger.
[Item 3]
In the symbol variation effect that triggers the execution of the second special game, an effect indicating that the result is disadvantageous to the player is executed, and in the effect at the start of the second special game, the special game ends. The ball game machine according to item 1 or 2, which executes an effect suggesting whether the ball is in a probability fluctuating state and a normal ball entry state or a normal probability state and a ball entry easy state later.

[Fifth aspect]
[Item 1]
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that allows the entry of game balls,
An operating port that allows the entry of game balls,
An expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows a game ball to enter or easily enter the second starting port when expanded.
A large winning opening that allows the game ball to enter or is easy to enter when opened,
A first pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is in a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the first start port.
A second pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the second start port.
A first symbol display device in which the first special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A second symbol display device in which the second special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol for indicating that the expansion mechanism is expanded is displayed in a variable manner when the ball enters the operating port.
A first pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A second pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A display control means for displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner even when the second special symbol is changing, and displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner even when the first special symbol is changing.
With the first hold control means, which holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means as the first hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the first hit / miss judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
A second hold control means that holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means as a second hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the second hit / fail judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means is a big hit, the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, and the special game control means.
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is a small hit, or when the result of at least one of the first hit / miss judgment means and the second hit / miss judgment means is a small hit. A small hit game control means that executes a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
As the state related to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and a ball entry ease state in which the ball entry ease is higher than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. A ball entry state setting means that can set the ball easy state, and
A normal probability state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means and the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means become a big hit with a predetermined probability, the result of the hit / miss judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means, and the second. A probability state setting means that has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means becomes a big hit with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state can be set.
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and
The production determining means for determining the production content and
An effect control means for displaying the effect content based on the determination by the effect determination means on the effect display device,
With
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state.
It is configured so that the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit. The result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is not a small hit, while the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means may be a small hit.
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced as compared with the case where the expansion mechanism is not expanded. The second starting port and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the ball entry easy state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria, which is easy to determine.
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion in which a fluctuation pattern having a relatively longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. The fluctuation pattern is determined
The effect control means
A plurality of decorative symbols that show the result of the hit / fail judgment in an effect manner are variablely displayed on the effect display device.
In the normal ball-entry state, the first decorative symbol, which is the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, is displayed in a variable manner without displaying the second decorative symbol, which is the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. A plurality of first alternative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol and displayed in an area smaller than the first decorative symbol, and a simple symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and simply showing the result of the pass / fail judgment. Further variable display,
In the easy-to-enter state, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner without displaying the first decorative symbol, and a plurality of second decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol and displayed in an area smaller than the second decorative symbol are displayed. The alternative symbol and the simplified symbol corresponding to the second special symbol and simply showing the result of the pass / fail judgment are further varied and displayed.
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, the simple symbol corresponding to the first special symbol whose fluctuation is stopped in the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game related to the jackpot of the first special symbol is displayed in the stopped state. In the case, the stop symbol mode indicating the deviation is displayed as the simple symbol, and
In the first variation display of the first special symbol in the case of shifting from the easy entry state to the normal entry state, the variation display is performed from the combination of symbols indicating that the plurality of first decorative symbols and the plurality of first alternative symbols are out of alignment. A ball game machine characterized by starting.
[Item 2]
The alternative symbol is a symbol for ensuring that the symbol is always displayed at any position on the screen of the effect display device by displaying it in a complementary manner in addition to the display of the decorative symbol. ,
The simplified symbol is a symbol for suggesting whether or not at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and for showing the result of the hit / fail determination. The bullet game machine according to item 1.
[Item 3]
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the simple symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is hidden after a predetermined first time from the start of the fluctuation, and the second special symbol is hidden. While the simple symbol is released from the hidden display and put into the display state before a predetermined second time from the scheduled timing of stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, the first time when the ball enters the ball from the easy entry state to the normal entry state, or the above The bullet according to item 1 or 2, characterized in that the simplified symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not hidden in the first variation display of the second special symbol after the power of the ball game machine is turned on. Ball game machine.

[Sixth aspect]
[Item 1]
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that allows the entry of game balls,
An operating port that allows the entry of game balls,
An expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows a game ball to enter or easily enter the second starting port when expanded.
A large winning opening that allows the game ball to enter or is easy to enter when opened,
A first pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is in a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the first start port.
A second pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the second start port.
A first symbol display device in which the first special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A second symbol display device in which the second special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol for indicating that the expansion mechanism is expanded is displayed in a variable manner when the ball enters the operating port.
A first pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A second pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A display control means for displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner even when the second special symbol is changing, and displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner even when the first special symbol is changing.
With the first hold control means, which holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means as the first hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the first hit / miss judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
A second hold control means that holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means as a second hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the second hit / fail judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means is a big hit, the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, and the special game control means.
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is a small hit, or when the result of at least one of the first hit / miss judgment means and the second hit / miss judgment means is a small hit. A small hit game control means that executes a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
As the state related to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and a ball entry ease state in which the ball entry ease is higher than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. A ball entry state setting means that can set the ball easy state, and
A normal probability state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means and the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means become a big hit with a predetermined probability, the result of the hit / miss judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means, and the second. A probability state setting means that has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means becomes a big hit with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state can be set.
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and
The production determining means for determining the production content and
An effect control means for displaying the effect content based on the determination by the effect determination means on the effect display device,
A movable accessory that can operate in front of the effect display device,
With
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state.
It is configured so that the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit. The result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is not a small hit, while the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means may be a small hit.
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced as compared with the case where the expansion mechanism is not expanded. The second starting port and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the ball entry easy state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria, which is easy to determine.
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion in which a fluctuation pattern having a relatively longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. The fluctuation pattern is determined
The effect control means
A plurality of decorative symbols that show the result of the hit / fail judgment in an effect manner are variablely displayed on the effect display device.
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed without displaying the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is displayed. A plurality of alternative symbols displayed in an area smaller than the decorative symbol and a simple symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and simply showing the result of the pass / fail judgment are further varied and displayed.
At least in the easy-to-enter state, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed, but the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed, and the decorative symbol is displayed in a manner corresponding to the decorative symbol. A plurality of alternative symbols displayed in a small area and a simple symbol corresponding to the second special symbol and simply showing the result of the pass / fail judgment are further variedly displayed.
The operation completion position of the movable accessory is a position that can overlap with the simple symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.
At least in the normal ball entry state, the movable accessory is not operated for a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time from a timing one predetermined time before the scheduled fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol. A ball game machine characterized by that.
[Item 2]
It is further equipped with an effect that can be displayed in an effect by emitting light on the screen of the effect display device.
The ball game machine according to item 1, wherein the light emission of the effecting object corresponding to the first special symbol is restricted for at least a predetermined time from the time when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped.

[7th aspect]
[Item 1]
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that allows the entry of game balls,
An operating port that allows the entry of game balls,
An expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows a game ball to enter or easily enter the second starting port when expanded.
A large winning opening that allows the game ball to enter or is easy to enter when opened,
A first pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is in a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the first start port.
A second pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the second start port.
A first symbol display device in which the first special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A second symbol display device in which the second special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol for indicating that the expansion mechanism is expanded is displayed in a variable manner when the ball enters the operating port.
A first pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A second pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A display control means for varyingly displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and
With the first hold control means, which holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means as the first hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the first hit / miss judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
A second hold control means that holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means as a second hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the second hit / fail judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means is a big hit, the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, and the special game control means.
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is a small hit, or when the result of at least one of the first hit / miss judgment means and the second hit / miss judgment means is a small hit. A small hit game control means that executes a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
As the state related to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and a ball entry ease state in which the ball entry ease is higher than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. A ball entry state setting means that can set the ball easy state, and
A normal probability state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means and the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means become a big hit with a predetermined probability, the result of the hit / miss judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means, and the second. A probability state setting means that has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means becomes a big hit with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state can be set.
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and
The production determining means for determining the production content and
An effect control means for displaying the effect content based on the determination by the effect determination means on the effect display device,
With
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state.
It is configured so that the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit. The result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is not a small hit, while the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means may be a small hit.
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced as compared with the case where the expansion mechanism is not expanded. The second starting port and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the ball entry easy state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria, which is easy to determine.
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion in which a fluctuation pattern having a relatively longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. The fluctuation pattern is determined
There are at least a first special game and a second special game as types of the special game, and the probability fluctuating state and the normal ball entry state are not obtained after the end of the first special game, while the second special game After the end, the probability fluctuates and the ball enters normally,
The profit given to the player during the probability fluctuation state and the normal ball entry state is larger than the profit given to the player during the probability fluctuation state and the ball entry easy state.
In the situation where the probability fluctuating state and the normal ball entry state are planned after the end of the second special game, a specific effect executed in the probability fluctuation state and the normal ball entry state is performed during the execution of the second special game. On the other hand, in a situation where the game is scheduled to be in a game state other than the probability fluctuation state and the easy-to-enter state after the end of the first special game, the specific effect is not executed during the execution of the first special game. A ball game machine characterized by that.
[Item 2]
When the probability fluctuation state and the normal ball entry state are reached after the end of the second special game, the effect executed during the special game period continues even in the probability fluctuation state and the normal ball entry state after the end of the special game. The ball game machine according to item 1, wherein the ball game machine is characterized by being played.
[Item 3]
The first hit / fail determination means, the second hit / fail determination means, the first pattern determination means, the second pattern determination means, the special game control means, the small hit game control means, the ball entry state setting means, and the above. The probability state setting means is provided in the main control unit that controls the operation of the game.
The effect determining means is provided in a sub control unit that controls the effect operation of the game.
The effect determining means is executed when the large winning opening is opened in the small hit game when the effect executed in the probability fluctuation state and the normal ball entry state is executed during the period of the special game related to the second big hit. A pseudo small hit opening effect that imitates the effect is executed based on the opening command of the large winning opening generated by the main control unit, and the effect executed when the large winning opening is closed in the small hit game is imitated. The pseudo small hit closing effect is executed based on the closing command of the large winning opening generated by the main control unit, and after the pseudo small hit closing effect is completed, the number of winning balls won in the small hit game is displayed. The sub-control unit provides a pseudo small hit end effect that imitates the end effect, a pseudo small hit variation effect that imitates the symbol variation related to the small hit, and a pseudo small hit start effect that imitates the start demo effect of the small hit game. The ball game machine according to item 1 or 2, wherein the ball game machine is executed based on a generated command.
[Item 4]
If the probability fluctuating state and the normal ball entry state are not reached after the end of the second special game, the time of the end effect of the special game is relatively lengthened, and the probability fluctuating state and the normal ball entering state are obtained after the end of the second special game. The ball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 3, characterized in that the time for the end effect of the special game is relatively shortened when the ball is in the ball-entering state.

[8th aspect]
[Item 1]
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that allows the entry of game balls,
An operating port that allows the entry of game balls,
An expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows a game ball to enter or easily enter the second starting port when expanded.
A large winning opening that allows the game ball to enter or is easy to enter when opened,
A first pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is in a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the first start port.
A second pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the second start port.
A first symbol display device in which the first special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A second symbol display device in which the second special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol for indicating that the expansion mechanism is expanded is displayed in a variable manner when the ball enters the operating port.
A first pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A second pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A display control means for varyingly displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and
With the first hold control means, which holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means as the first hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the first hit / miss judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
A second hold control means that holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means as a second hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the second hit / fail judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means is a big hit, the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, and the special game control means.
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is a small hit, or when the result of at least one of the first hit / miss judgment means and the second hit / miss judgment means is a small hit. A small hit game control means that executes a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
As the state related to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and a ball entry ease state in which the ball entry ease is higher than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. A ball entry state setting means that can set the ball easy state, and
A normal probability state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means and the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means become a big hit with a predetermined probability, the result of the hit / miss judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means, and the second. A probability state setting means that has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means becomes a big hit with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state can be set.
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and
The production determining means for determining the production content and
An effect control means for displaying the effect content based on the determination by the effect determination means on the effect display device,
With
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state.
It is configured so that the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit. The result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is not a small hit, while the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means may be a small hit.
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced as compared with the case where the expansion mechanism is not expanded. The second starting port and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the ball entry easy state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria, which is easy to determine.
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion in which a fluctuation pattern having a relatively longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. The fluctuation pattern is determined
The first notice effect and the second notice, which is more expected to shift to a special game than the first notice effect, are the effects that can be executed during the period when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed once. Have at least directing,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that makes it appear as if the predetermined effect content is paused at a predetermined timing within the period in which the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed once.
While the first notice effect and the second notice effect are not executed during the execution of the specific effect, the first notice effect or the second notice effect can be executed after the execution of the specific effect.
The predetermined timing has at least a first timing and a second timing that is a timing after the first timing, and when the specific effect is executed at the first timing, the second notice effect Although the possibility of occurrence of the first notice effect is low, the possibility of the first notice effect is high, while the possibility of the first notice effect is low when the specific effect is executed at the second timing. Is a ball game machine characterized in that the second notice effect is more likely to occur.
[Item 2]
The first notice effect or the second notice effect is generated after the execution of the specific effect that suspends the effect at a predetermined timing in one variable effect period, and in the case of the first notice effect, the predetermined value after the re-execution of the variable effect. After executing the specific effect that suspends the effect again at the timing of, the first notice effect or the second notice effect is further generated, so that the effect that makes it appear as if the pseudo multiple symbol fluctuations have been executed is executed. In some cases,
Further equipped with an operation input means that accepts operation input by the player,
In the specific effect, a predetermined effect, which is an effect of urging the player to input an operation to the operation input means and generating the first notice effect or the second notice effect as a trigger of the operation input by the player, is executed. May be
When the time from the start or re-execution of the variation of the variation effect to the pause is relatively short, there is a relative possibility that the first advance notice effect or the second advance notice effect is generated after the predetermined effect is generated. On the other hand, if the time from the start of fluctuation or the re-execution of the effect to the pause is relatively long, the first advance notice effect or the second advance notice effect is generated after the predetermined effect is generated. The bullet game machine according to item 1, which is set so as to have a relatively high possibility of generating.
[Item 3]
Item 2. The item 2 is set so that when the predetermined effect occurs, the possibility that the second notice effect will occur is higher than the possibility that the first notice effect will occur after the predetermined effect occurs. Bullet game machine.
[Item 4]
A special effect in which the pause time of the variable effect due to the specific effect exceeds a predetermined time may be executed, and the longer the duration of the special effect is, the higher the possibility of the second notice effect being generated. The bullet game machine according to item 1 to be set.
[Item 5]
The bullet game machine according to item 4, wherein the end timing of the special effect is synchronized with the generation timing of the specific effect.
[Item 6]
Item 4 or 5 characterized in that when the second notice effect occurs after the execution of the special effect, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the second notice effect occurs without the special effect being executed. The listed ball game machine.

[9th aspect]
[Item 1]
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that allows the entry of game balls,
An operating port that allows the entry of game balls,
An expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows a game ball to enter or easily enter the second starting port when expanded.
A large winning opening that allows the game ball to enter or is easy to enter when opened,
A first pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is in a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the first start port.
A second pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the second start port.
A first symbol display device in which the first special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A second symbol display device in which the second special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol for indicating that the expansion mechanism is expanded is displayed in a variable manner when the ball enters the operating port.
A first pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A second pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A display control means for varyingly displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and
With the first hold control means, which holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means as the first hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the first hit / miss judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
A second hold control means that holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means as a second hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the second hit / fail judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means is a big hit, the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, and the special game control means.
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is a small hit, or when the result of at least one of the first hit / miss judgment means and the second hit / miss judgment means is a small hit. A small hit game control means that executes a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
As the state related to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and a ball entry ease state in which the ball entry ease is higher than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. A ball entry state setting means that can set the ball easy state, and
A normal probability state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means and the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means become a big hit with a predetermined probability, the result of the hit / miss judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means, and the second. A probability state setting means that has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means becomes a big hit with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state can be set.
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and
The production determining means for determining the production content and
An effect control means for displaying the effect content based on the determination by the effect determination means on the effect display device,
With
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state.
It is configured so that the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit. The result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is not a small hit, while the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means may be a small hit.
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced as compared with the case where the expansion mechanism is not expanded. The second starting port and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the ball entry easy state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria, which is easy to determine.
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion in which a fluctuation pattern having a relatively longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. The fluctuation pattern is determined
The fluctuation pattern may be composed of a combination in which any of a plurality of types of fluctuation addition patterns is added to any of a plurality of types of basic fluctuation patterns.
By referring to the basic variation pattern selection criteria according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, one basic variation pattern according to the result of the hit / fail judgment is selected.
By referring to the variation addition pattern selection criterion corresponding to the selected basic variation pattern of 1, the variation addition pattern of 1 according to the selected basic variation pattern is selected.
The plurality of types of basic fluctuation patterns include at least a first basic fluctuation pattern and a second basic fluctuation pattern, and even when the first basic fluctuation pattern is selected, the second basic fluctuation pattern is selected. Even if it is done, it is possible to execute a specific effect,
Whether the first basic fluctuation pattern is selected or the second basic fluctuation pattern is selected, a specific fluctuation addition pattern can be selected, while the first basic fluctuation pattern is selected. Is selected and the case where the second basic variation pattern is selected, the ball is characterized in that the type of variation addition pattern selection criterion in which the specific variation addition pattern to be referred to is included in the selection candidate is different. Game machine.
[Item 2]
The first notice effect or the second notice effect is generated after the execution of the specific effect that suspends the effect at a predetermined timing in one variable effect period, and in the case of the first notice effect, the predetermined value after the re-execution of the variable effect. After executing the specific effect that suspends the effect again at the timing of, the first notice effect or the second notice effect is further generated, so that the effect that makes it appear as if the pseudo multiple symbol fluctuations have been executed is executed. In some cases,
When the time from the start or re-execution of the variation of the variation effect to the pause is relatively short, the possibility of the second advance notice effect is low, but the possibility of the first advance notice effect is high. On the other hand, when the time from the start of the fluctuation or the re-execution of the effect to the pause is relatively long, the possibility of the first notice effect is low, but the possibility of the second notice effect is high. Set,
The bullet game machine according to item 1, wherein the variation addition pattern is a pattern that defines the type and timing of the first notice effect.
[Item 3]
The ball game machine according to item 1 or 2, wherein the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns include a first fluctuation pattern and a second fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation effect content and the fluctuation time are common to each other.
[Item 4]
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, when the result of the hit / fail judgment corresponds to a small hit, the fluctuation addition time of any one of the plurality of types of fluctuation addition patterns is set with respect to the basic fluctuation pattern corresponding to the small hit. The ball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 3, wherein the ball game machine is added, and a predetermined addition time is added.
[Item 5]
The ball according to any one of items 1 to 4, wherein the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns include a fluctuation pattern that can be selected regardless of whether the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit or a miss. Game machine.
[Item 6]
In the fluctuation pattern that can be selected, when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, a predetermined addition time which is a time other than the fluctuation addition time is added to the fluctuation time, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, the predetermined addition time The bullet game machine according to item 5, wherein the addition time is not added to the fluctuation time.
[Item 7]
Of the plurality of types of variation patterns, only one predetermined type of variation addition pattern is associated with the variation pattern corresponding to the effect of reaching the jackpot through the first advance notice effect, whereas the first advance notice effect is used. The bullet according to any one of items 1 to 6, characterized in that a plurality of types of variable addition patterns are associated with the variable pattern corresponding to the effect of reaching a big hit without passing through. Game machine.

[10th aspect]
[Item 1]
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that allows the entry of game balls,
An operating port that allows the entry of game balls,
An expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows a game ball to enter or easily enter the second starting port when expanded.
A large winning opening that allows the game ball to enter or is easy to enter when opened,
A first pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is in a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the first start port.
A second pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the second start port.
A first symbol display device in which the first special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A second symbol display device in which the second special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol for indicating that the expansion mechanism is expanded is displayed in a variable manner when the ball enters the operating port.
A first pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A second pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A display control means for varyingly displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and
With the first hold control means, which holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means as the first hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the first hit / miss judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
A second hold control means that holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means as a second hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the second hit / fail judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means is a big hit, the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, and the special game control means.
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is a small hit, or when the result of at least one of the first hit / miss judgment means and the second hit / miss judgment means is a small hit. A small hit game control means that executes a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
As the state related to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and a ball entry ease state in which the ball entry ease is higher than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. A ball entry state setting means that can set the ball easy state, and
A normal probability state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means and the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means become a big hit with a predetermined probability, the result of the hit / miss judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means, and the second. A probability state setting means that has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means becomes a big hit with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state can be set.
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and
The production determining means for determining the production content and
An effect control means for displaying the effect content based on the determination by the effect determination means on the effect display device,
With
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state.
It is configured so that the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit. The result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is not a small hit, while the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means may be a small hit.
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced as compared with the case where the expansion mechanism is not expanded. The second starting port and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the ball entry easy state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria, which is easy to determine.
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion in which a fluctuation pattern having a relatively longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. The fluctuation pattern is determined
In the normal ball entry state, the time from the stop of fluctuation of the second special symbol to the start of the next fluctuation differs depending on whether the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means is a small hit or a miss. In the easy-to-enter state, the time from the stop of fluctuation of the second special symbol to the start of the next fluctuation is constant regardless of whether the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means is a small hit or a miss. A ball game machine.
[Item 2]
The decorative symbol related to the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a symbol mode indicating other than a small hit in the easy-to-enter state when the fixed time of the symbol is set to the first time. The symbol fixing time to be performed is the second time obtained by adding the time of the small hit game to the first time, and the symbol fixing time displayed as a stop in the symbol mode indicating other than the small hit in the normal ball entering state is the second time. The ball game machine according to item 1, wherein the third time is shorter than the time.
[Item 3]
The second time includes the first time, a fourth time which is a start demonstration time of a small hit game that occurs in an easy-to-enter state, a fifth time which is an end demonstration time of the small hit game, and the small hit game. The ball game machine according to item 2, wherein the time is the sum of the sixth time, which is the execution time of the winning game.
[Item 3]
The start demo time of the small hit game that occurs in the normal ball-entry state is the 7th time different from the 4th time, and the end demo time of the small hit game is the 8th time different from the 5th time. The bullet game machine according to item 3, wherein the execution time of the hit game is the sixth time.

[11th aspect]
[Item 1]
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that allows the entry of game balls,
An operating port that allows the entry of game balls,
An expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows a game ball to enter or easily enter the second starting port when expanded.
A large winning opening that allows the game ball to enter or is easy to enter when opened,
A first pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is in a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the first start port.
A second pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the second start port.
A first symbol display device in which the first special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A second symbol display device in which the second special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol for indicating that the expansion mechanism is expanded is displayed in a variable manner when the ball enters the operating port.
A first pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A second pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A display control means for displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner even when the second special symbol is changing, and displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner even when the first special symbol is changing.
With the first hold control means, which holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means as the first hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the first hit / miss judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
A second hold control means that holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means as a second hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the second hit / fail judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means is a big hit, the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, and the special game control means.
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is a small hit, or when the result of at least one of the first hit / miss judgment means and the second hit / miss judgment means is a small hit. A small hit game control means that executes a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
As the state related to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and a ball entry ease state in which the ball entry ease is higher than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. A ball entry state setting means that can set the ball easy state, and
A normal probability state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means and the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means become a big hit with a predetermined probability, the result of the hit / miss judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means, and the second. A probability state setting means that has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means becomes a big hit with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state can be set.
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and
The production determining means for determining the production content and
An effect control means for displaying the effect content based on the determination by the effect determination means on the effect display device,
With
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state.
It is configured so that the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit. The result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is not a small hit, while the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means may be a small hit.
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced as compared with the case where the expansion mechanism is not expanded. The second starting port and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the ball entry easy state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria, which is easy to determine.
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion in which a fluctuation pattern having a relatively longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. The fluctuation pattern is determined
In a predetermined situation in the normal ball entry state, the content of the background display can be changed by at least one of the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop of the first special symbol, while the fluctuation start of the second special symbol. And, when the fluctuation is stopped, the contents of the background display are not changed.
Under a predetermined situation in the easy-to-enter state, the content of the background display can be changed by at least one of the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop of the second special symbol, while the content of the first special symbol can be changed. It is configured so that the content of the background display is not changed when the fluctuation starts and stops.
In the final symbol change during the duration of the easy entry state, the background display can be updated at least one of the start and stop of the change of the second special symbol, and the change of the first special symbol. A ball game machine characterized in that the background display can be updated even when at least one of a start and a fluctuation stop is triggered.
[Item 2]
The first hit / fail determination means, the second hit / fail determination means, the first pattern determination means, the second pattern determination means, the display control means, the special game control means, and the ball entry state setting means are games. It is provided in the main control unit that controls the operation of
The effect determining means is provided in a sub control unit that controls the effect operation of the game.
When a reset due to a predetermined error occurs in at least one of the main control unit and the sub control unit, the background display is displayed triggered by at least one of the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop of the first special symbol. The ball game machine according to item 1, wherein the background display can be updated even when at least one of the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop of the second special symbol can be updated.
[Item 3]
After the end of the easy-to-enter state, the game result in the easy-to-enter state is between the elapse of a certain period of time and the start of the next change after the command to stop the fluctuation of the final symbol variation in the continuation period is transmitted. The ball game machine according to item 1 or 2, wherein a normal background immediate switching designation command for immediately switching from a special background for displaying to a normal background is transmitted.

[12th aspect]
[Item 1]
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that allows the entry of game balls,
An operating port that allows the entry of game balls,
An expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows a game ball to enter or easily enter the second starting port when expanded.
A large winning opening that allows the game ball to enter or is easy to enter when opened,
A first pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is in a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the first start port.
A second pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the second start port.
A first symbol display device in which the first special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A second symbol display device in which the second special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol for indicating that the expansion mechanism is expanded is displayed in a variable manner when the ball enters the operating port.
A first pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A second pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A display control means for varyingly displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and
With the first hold control means, which holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means as the first hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the first hit / miss judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
A second hold control means that holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means as a second hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the second hit / fail judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means is a big hit, the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, and the special game control means.
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is a small hit, or when the result of at least one of the first hit / miss judgment means and the second hit / miss judgment means is a small hit. A small hit game control means that executes a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening,
As the state related to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and a ball entry ease state in which the ball entry ease is higher than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. A ball entry state setting means that can set the ball easy state, and
A normal probability state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means and the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means become a big hit with a predetermined probability, the result of the hit / miss judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means, and the second. A probability state setting means that has a probability fluctuation state in which the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / fail determination means becomes a big hit with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and a normal probability state or a probability fluctuation state can be set.
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and
The production determining means for determining the production content and
An effect control means for controlling an effect based on a determination by the effect determination means,
With
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the easy ball entry state is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate in the normal ball entry state.
It is configured so that the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means will be a small hit. The result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is not a small hit, while the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means may be a small hit.
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced as compared with the case where the expansion mechanism is not expanded. The second starting port and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the ball entry easy state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern selection criteria, which is easy to determine.
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is based on a fluctuation pattern selection criterion in which a fluctuation pattern having a relatively longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. The fluctuation pattern is determined
The effect determining means can manage the cumulative value information which is the information regarding the cumulative value of the number of prize balls to be paid out.
The effect control means can execute a prize ball addition effect of adding and displaying the number of prize balls to be paid out while counting up.
If the above cumulative value reaches a specific number while the count-up display in the prize ball addition effect is still being displayed without being completed, the count-up display is still being continued without being completed. Even so, the ball game machine is characterized in that the number of prize balls corresponding to the specific number is highlighted.
[Item 2]
The bullet game machine according to item 1, wherein the number of prize balls during the count-up is hidden when a specific effect display occurs during the count-up display.
[Item 3]
If the number of prize balls during the count-up is hidden by the specific effect display and then the display of the number of prize balls is resumed by the end of the specific effect display, the incomplete count-up is counted. The bullet game machine according to item 2, wherein the display is resumed in a state where the display has been completed.

11 1st start port, 12 2nd start port, 51 1st special symbol, 52 2nd special symbol, 60 effect display device, 221 1st hit / fail judgment means, 222 2nd hit / fail judgment means, 240 hold control means, 260 special Game control means, 265 small hit game control means, 303 effect determination means, 510 ball entry state setting means, 512 probability state setting means.

Claims (1)

The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that allows the entry of game balls,
An operating port that allows the entry of game balls,
An expansion mechanism that is attached to the second starting port and allows a game ball to enter or easily enter the second starting port when expanded.
A large winning opening that allows the game ball to enter or is easy to enter when opened,
A first pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is in a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the first start port.
A second pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game, which is a state advantageous to the player, triggered by entering the ball into the second start port.
A first symbol display device in which the first special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A second symbol display device in which the second special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is variablely displayed, and
A normal symbol display device in which a normal symbol for indicating that the expansion mechanism is expanded is displayed in a variable manner when the ball enters the operating port.
A first pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
A second pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion.
With the first hold control means, which holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / fail judgment means as the first hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the first hit / miss judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
A second hold control means that holds the lottery value used for the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means as a second hold until the hit / fail judgment is performed by the second hit / fail judgment means, up to a predetermined number of numbers. ,
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means is a big hit, the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, and the special game control means.
As the state related to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and a ball entry ease state in which the ball entry ease is higher than the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state is set or entered. A ball entry state setting means that can set the ball easy state, and
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and
The production determining means for determining the production content and
With
A plurality of decorative symbols that show the result of the hit / fail judgment in an effect manner are variablely displayed on the effect display device.
In the normal ball-entry state, the first decorative symbol, which is the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, is displayed in a variable manner without displaying the second decorative symbol, which is the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. A plurality of first alternative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol and displayed in an area smaller than the first decorative symbol are variablely displayed.
In the easy-to-enter state, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner without displaying the first decorative symbol, and a plurality of second decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol and displayed in an area smaller than the second decorative symbol are displayed. Variable display of alternative symbols,
In the first variation display of the first special symbol in the case of shifting from the easy entry state to the normal entry state, the variation display is performed from the combination of symbols indicating that the plurality of first decorative symbols and the plurality of first alternative symbols are out of alignment. A ball game machine characterized by starting.

Images